Contents

Seat Arona 2018 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 368
1 of 368

Summary of Content for Seat Arona 2018 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

Owners manual SEAT Arona

6F 90 12 72 0B C

In gl

s 6

F9 01

27 20

BC (

07 .18

)

SE A

T A

ro na

I ng

l s

(0 7.

18 )

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.18

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Introduction Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology and top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man- ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving.

Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNING Read and always observe safety infor- mation concerning the passenger's front airbag page 80, Important in- formation regarding the front passeng- er's airbag.

About this manual This manual describes the features of the ve- hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of the features described below will be intro- duced in the future or will only be available in certain markets.

Some of the features described here are not included in all the types or variations of the model and they can be varied or modified based on technical or marketing requirements without it being considered misleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, backwards) in this manual refer to the travel direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta- ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant to help the users better understand some fea- tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the instruction manual. Access the instruction manual to see the complete information and warnings.

The features marked with an asterisk are included by default only in certain versions of the model, supplied as op- tional only for certain versions or only of- fered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with . The ab- sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. It indicates that the section continues on the next page. Important warnings on the page.

More in-depth content on the page.

General information on page indicated.

Emergency information on the page.

You can access the information in this manual using:

Thematic table of contents that follows the manuals general chapter structure. Visual table of contents that uses graphics to indicate the pages containing essential information, which is detailed in the corre- sponding chapters. Alphabetical index with many terms and synonyms to help you find information.

WARNING Texts after this symbol contain informa- tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks.

CAUTION Texts after this symbol indicate possible damage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts after this symbol contain informa- tion about the protection of the environ- ment.

Note Texts after this symbol contain addition- al information.

Printed Instruction Manual The printed instruction manual contains rele- vant information about the use of the vehicle and the Infotainment System.

The digital version of the manuals contains more in-depth information.

Digital Version of the Infotainment System Manual

Fig. 1 SEAT website

The digital version is available on SEAT's offi- cial website.

To view the digital version of the manual:

scan the QR code Fig. 1 OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then Infotainment.

Related videos

Fig. 2 SEAT website

The operation of some of the vehicle's fea- tures can be shown as an instruction video:

scan the QR code Fig. 2 OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then Multimedia.

Note Video instructions are only available in certain languages.

Frequently Asked Ques- tions

Before driving

How do you adjust the seat? page 19

How do you adjust the steering wheel? page 20

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? page 20

How do you turn on the exterior lights? page 31

How does the automatic gearbox selector lever work? page 40

How do you refuel? page 46

How do you activate the windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system? page 33

Emergency situations

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does this mean? page 36

Where are the first-aid kit and the warning trian- gle in the vehicle? page 83

How do you open the bonnet? page 17

How do you perform a jump start? page 58

Where is the vehicle tool kit located? page 52

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture kit? page 51

How do you change a wheel? page 52

How do you change a fuse? page 49

How do you change a light? page 50

How do you tow a vehicle? page 57

Useful tips

How do you set the time? page 111

When should the vehicle inspection should be performed? page 114

What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on the steering wheel perform? page 117

How do you remove the luggage compartment cover? page 155

How do you drive in an economical and environ- mentally-friendly way? page 241

How do you check and top up the engine oil? page 46

How do you check and top up the engine cool- ant? page 47

How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid? page 48

How do you check and top up the brake fluid? page 48

How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val- ues? page 321

Vehicle washing tips page 331

Functions of interest

Easy Connect, CAR menu page 34

How does the START-STOP system work? page 245

What parking assistants are available? page 282

How does the rear assist work? page 290

How does the adaptive cruise control work? page 257

How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted? page 272

How does tyre pressure monitoring work? page 324

How do you open the vehicle without a key (Keyless Access)? page 128

Interior lighting and ambient light page 141

Table of Contents

Table of Contents The essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Passenger-side general instrument pan- el (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Passenger-side general instrument pan- el (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 57 How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 60

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Correct position of the vehicle occu- pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Why wear a seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 71 Seat belt tensioners* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Safety instructions about airbags . . . . . . . . . . 75 Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 86 Towing or tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Change the front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Change the rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Changing the interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Anti-theft alarm* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Adjusting the seat and head restraints . . . . . . 146 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 150 Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Manual air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

5

Table of Contents

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Infotainment system safety instructions . . . . . 168 Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Full Link* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 SEAT Media Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Vehicle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Engine management and emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Emergency braking assistance system (Front Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as- sistance (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Park Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Parking aid parking and manoeuvring (ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Rear Assist Rear View Camera* . . . . . . . . . . 290 Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Accessories and modifications to the ve- hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Radio transmitters and office equipment . . . 304 Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 310 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel)* . . . . 325 Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 328 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Remove the vehicle from traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Description and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Information about the EU Directive 2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Simplified EU compliance declaration . . . . . . 338 Table of correspondences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Addresses of the manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Frequency bands, station power . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

6

The essentials

Exterior view

page 16 page 46 page 15 page 46

1

2

3

4

page 57 page 17 page 51

5

6

7

7

The essentials

Exterior view

page 47 page 46 page 48 page 49

1

2

3

4

page 46 page 48 page 48 page 155

5

6

7

8

page 30 page 52 page 51

9

10

11

8

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

page 32 page 38 page 31 page 20

1

2

3

4

page 18 page 17 page 36 page 33

5

6

7

8

page 108 page 31 page 20 page 49

9

10

11

12 9

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

page 33 page 108 page 31 page 20

1

2

3

4

page 18 page 31 page 36 page 32

5

6

7

8

page 38 page 20 page 49

9

10

11

10

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

page 21 page 18 page 150

1

2

3

11

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

page 21 page 18 page 17 page 150

1

2

3

4 12

The essentials

Centre console

page 32 page 40

1

2

page 218 page 15

3

4

page 34, page 168 page 41

5

6

The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical. 13

The essentials

Interior view

page 19 page 19 page 144 page 27

1

2

3

4

page 19 page 22

5

6

14

The essentials

How it works

Opening and closing

Related video

Fig. 3 Opening and clos- ing

Doors

Fig. 4 Remote control key: keys.

Fig. 5 Centre console: central locking buttons.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the key Lock: press the Fig. 4 button. Unlock: press the Fig. 4 button. Unlock rear lid: press the button Fig. 4 until all the turn signals on the vehicle briefly light up.

Locking and unlocking with the central locking switch Lock: press the Fig. 5 button. The symbol lights up yellow to indicate that it is activated. None of the doors can be opened from the outside. The doors can be opened from the inside by pulling the inside door han- dle. Unlock: Press the button again Fig. 5. The symbol reverts to its initial colour.

in Description on page 125

page 125

Unlocking or locking of driver door

Fig. 6 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail to op- erate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system page 131.

Unfold the vehicle key blade page 123.

15

The essentials

Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle Fig. 6 (arrow) then remove the cover upwards. Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will not be triggered page 131. After the driver door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo- bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de- activates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key shaft page 131.

Emergency locking of doors with- out door cylinder

Fig. 7 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail to work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder will have to be locked separately.

A mechanical locking device (only visible when the door is open) is provided on the front passenger door.

Pull the cap out of the opening. Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side).

Once the door has been closed it can no lon- ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- rior door handle once to unlock and open the door.

Rear lid

Fig. 8 Rear lid: handle

The rear lid opening system operates electri- cally*. It is activated by exerting slight pres- sure on the handle Fig. 8.

This system may or may not be operative, de- pending on the situation of the vehicle.

If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked then the opening system is operative and the rear lid may be opened.

To lock/unlock, press the button or the button Fig. 4 on the remote control key.

A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed.* An audible warning is also given if the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

16

The essentials

Open the rear lid: exert slight pressure on the handle Fig. 8. The rear lid opens auto- matically. Close the rear lid: hold it by one of the han- dles on the interior lining and close it by push- ing gently.

in Opening and closing on page 134

page 17

Unlocking the rear lid manually

Fig. 9 Unlocking the rear lid manually.

This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking does not work (for example, if the battery is flat).

There is a groove in the luggage compart- ment allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism.

Opening the rear lid from inside the lug- gage compartment Insert the key in the groove and unlock the locking system, turning the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow Fig. 9.

Related video

Fig. 10 Bonnet

Bonnet

Fig. 11 Release lever in the driver's footwell area.

Fig. 12 Lever under the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen.

17

The essentials

Open the door and pull the lever under the dashboard Fig. 11 1 . To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on the lever located under the bonnet, in the centre Fig. 12 2 . The arrester hooks are released. Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet Slightly lift the bonnet. Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall so it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above.

in Safety notes for work in the engine compartment on page 310

page 310

Controls for the windows

Fig. 13 Detail of the driver door: controls for the windows.

Open the window: press the button . Close the window: pull on the button .

Buttons on the driver door Window on the front left door Window on the front right door Window on the rear left door Window on the rear right door Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

1

2

3

4

5

in Opening and closing the electric windows on page 135

page 134

Before driving

Related video

Fig. 14 Vehicle interior

18

The essentials

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 15 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and move the seat. Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever. Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

in Adjusting the front seats on page 146

1

2

3

Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 16 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint.

To raise or lower the head restraint, press the side button 1 and move it upwards or downwards until it engages in the desired po- sition.

in Adjusting the front head re- straints on page 146

page 66, page 146

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 17 Positioning and removing the seat belt buckle.

19

The essentials

Fig. 18 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your shoulders, adjust the height of the seats.

The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body.

The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel- vis.

page 69

page 71

Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the front seats are retracted automatically.

The tensioner can be triggered only once.

in Maintenance and disposal of belt tensioners on page 73

page 72

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 19 Detail of the driver door: control for the exterior mirror.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob to the corresponding position:

Turning the knob to the desired position, adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,

L/R

left) and the passenger side (R, right) to the direction desired. Folding in mirrors.

in Electric exterior mirrors* on page 145

page 144

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 20 Lever in the lower left side of the steer- ing column.

Adjusting the position of the steering wheel: pull the Fig. 20 1 lever down, move the steering wheel to the desired position and lift the lever back up until it locks.

in Adjusting the steering wheel position on page 64

20

The essentials

Airbags

Related video

Fig. 21 Vehicle interior

Front airbags

Fig. 22 Driver airbag located in steering wheel.

Fig. 23 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel Fig. 22 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel Fig. 23. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

When the driver and front passenger airbags are deployed, the covers remain attached to the steering wheel and dashboard, respec- tively Fig. 22 Fig. 23.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the driver and the front passenger additional protection for the head

21

The essentials

and chest in the event of a severe frontal col- lision.

The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibil- ity.

page 75

Deactivating the front passenger front airbag*

Fig. 24 Front passenger front airbag switch.

Fig. 25 Centre of the instrument panel: control lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag in centre console.

To deactivate the front passenger front airbag: Switch the ignition off. Open the door on the front passenger side. Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig. 24. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. Turn the key gently to change its position to . If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. Close the front passenger door. Check, with the ignition switched on, that the control lamp remains lit where it says in the centre of the dash panel Fig. 25.

in Activation and deactivation of front passenger airbag* on page 78

page 77

Side airbags*

Fig. 26 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 27 Illustration of completely inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle.

22

The essentials

The side airbags are located in the driver's seat and front passenger seat backrests Fig. 26. The locations are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air- bag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision.

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the front and rear outer seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these airbags pro- vide maximum protection.

in Side airbags* on page 76

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 28 Location and deployment area of the head-protection airbag.

There is a head airbag on each side of the in- terior above the doors Fig. 28. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

The area framed in red is covered by the head-protection airbag when it is deployed Fig. 28 (deployment area). Therefore, ob- jects should never be placed or mounted in this area in Head-protection airbags* on page 77.

In the event of a side collision the curtain air- bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve- hicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers in the front and rear side seats facing the impact.

in Head-protection airbags* on page 77

Child seats

Related video

Fig. 29 Vehicle interior

23

The essentials

Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag

Fig. 30 Airbag adhesives - version 1: on the passenger-side sun blind and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 31 Airbag adhesives - version 2: on the passenger-side sun blind and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passeng-

er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame.

in Important information re- garding the front passenger's airbag on page 80

page 79

24

The essentials

Securing child seats

Fig. 32 On rear seats: possible assemblies of chil- dren seats.

Figure Fig. 32 A shows the basic child re- straint system mounting using lower retaining rings and the upper retaining strap. Figure Fig. 32 B shows the child restraint system mounting using the vehicle seat belt.

The seat belt may be used to secure univer- sal type child seats to the vehicle seats marked with a U in the table below.

In the passenger seat without height regu- lation: the passenger seat must be in its rear- most position1). In the passenger seat with height regula- tion: the passenger seat must be in its rear- most and highest position1).

To correctly use a child seat in the back, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child seat in the back in the case that it goes opposite to the direction of the car. In the case of front facing restraint systems, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child's feet.

To adjust the passenger seat to accommo- date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a perfect position, adjust the passenger back- rest as far forward as possible1).

If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- led, in which the method of attachment to the

car is through the seat belt and support bracket, it should never be installed in the central rear seat as the ground clearance is lower than in other places and the support bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- ciently stable.

The systems include the child restraint system mounting with an upper retaining strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on the seat.

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.

25

The essentials

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X Uc) U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X Uc) U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X Uc) U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UFc) UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UFc) UF UF

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration. U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat. c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

in Safety instructions on page 81

26

The essentials

Securing child seats with the ISOFIX/iSize and Top Tether system*

Fig. 33 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 34 Position of the Top Tether rings on the back of the rear seat.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear outer seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* system.

Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on both outermost rear seats. In some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor. The

ISOFIX rings are located between the rear seat backrest and the seat cushioning Fig. 33. The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear part of the backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat backrest or in the boot) Fig. 34.

To understand the compatibility of the "ISO- FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table below.

The body weight permitted and information regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the label on child seats with universal or semi-uni- versal certification.

Weight group Size class Electrical equipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Baby carrier F ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

27

The essentials

Weight group Size class Electrical equipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- ---

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

in Safety instructions on page 81

28

The essentials

Securing child seats with the ISOFIX/i-Size ISOFIX System

Fig. 35 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 36 Rear seat: cut-out grooves.

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- turer's instructions.

Open the cut-out section behind the marked grooves to access the retaining rings Fig. 36.

Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX/iSize retaining rings until the child seat is heard to engage securely. If the child seat is equipped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to the correspondent ring Fig. 38. Observe the manufacturer's instructions.

Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* attachment system are available from Tech- nical Services.

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U Valid position for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129. X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

29

The essentials

Securing child seats with the Top Tether* retaining straps

Fig. 37 Retainer strap: adjustment and assem- bly according to the Top Tether belt.

Fig. 38 Position of the Top Tether rings on the back of the rear seat.

Child seats with the Top Tether system come with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- cle anchor point, located at the back of the rear seat backrest and provide greater re- straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for- ward movements of the child seat in a crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun- ted seats Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufac- turer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap Follow the manufacturer's instructions to deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer strap. Place the belt under the head restraint of the back seat Fig. 37 (depending on the in- structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the head restraint if necessary). Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchorage of the backrest Fig. 38. Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap Loosen the strap following the manufactur- er's instructions. Push the lock and release it from the an- choring support.

in Safety instructions on page 81

30

The essentials

Starting the vehicle

Ignition lock

Fig. 39 Ignition key positions.

Turn on the ignition: place the key in the igni- tion and start the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel Lock the steering wheel: remove the key from the ignition and turn the wheel until it locks. In vehicles with automatic transmission, in order to remove the key, move the gear shift to the P position. If necessary, press the gear shift blocking key and release it. Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into the ignition and turn it at the same time as the steering wheel in the direction indicated by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer- ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow plugs reheating Turn on the ignition: turn the key to the 2 position. Turn off the ignition: turn the key to the 1 position. Diesel vehicles : the glow plugs reheat when the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine Manual transmission: press the clutch ped- al all the way down and move the gearbox lever into neutral. Automatic transmission: press the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the P position or into N. Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not press the accelerator.

Start-Stop system* When you stop and release the clutch pedal, the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. The ignition remains switched on.

in Ignition key positions on page 215

page 215

Lights and visibility

Related video

Fig. 40 Lights and visi- bility

Light switch

Fig. 41 Instrument console: light panel.

Turn the switch to the required position Fig. 41.

31

The essentials

Sym- bol

Ignition switched off

Ignition is switched on

Fog lights, dipped beam and side lights off.

Light off or daytime driving light on.

The Coming home and Leav- ing home guide lights may be switched on.

Automatic control of dipped beam and daytime running light.

Side light on. Daylight running lights switched on.

Dipped beam headlight off

Dipped beam switched on.

Fog lights: move the switch to the first po- sition, from positions , or .

Rear fog light: move the switch complete- ly from positions , or .

Turn on fog lights: push the switch or turn it to the position.

page 137

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 42 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light: right-hand parking light (ignition switched off). Left turn light: left-hand parking light (ig- nition switched off). Main beam on: control lamp lit up on the instrument panel. Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con- trol lamp lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.

in Turn signal and main beam lever on page 139

page 138

1

2

3

4

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 43 Dashboard: switch for hazard warning lights.

Switched on, for example:

When approaching a traffic jam In an emergency The vehicle has broken down When towing or being towed

in Hazard warning lights on page 141

page 141

32

The essentials

Interior lights

Fig. 44 Detail of headliner: front interior light- ing.

Knob Function

Turning the interior lights on or off.

Activating or deactivating the auto- matic door contact lights. The interior lights come on automati- cally when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is opened or the key is removed from the ignition. The light goes off a few seconds after all the doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the ignition is switched on.

/ Turning the reading light on and off

The light controls may vary depending on the vehicle version.

page 141

Windscreen wipers and window wiper blade

Fig. 45 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper.

More the lever to the required position:

0 Windscreen wipers off.

More the lever to the required position:

1

Windscreen wipers interval wipe. Using the control Fig. 45 A adjust the interval (vehicles without rain sen- sor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.

5

Automatic wipe. The windscreen wash- er function is activated by pushing the lever forwards, and simultaneously the windscreen wipers start.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper will wipe the window approximately ev- ery six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti- vated by pressing the lever, and the rear wiper starts simultaneously.

in Windscreen wiper and win- dow wiper on page 143

page 143

page 60

33

The essentials

Easy Connect

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 46 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 47 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options will depend on the vehicles electronics and equipment.

Switch the ignition on. If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on. Press the Infotainment button / and then the Vehicle function button Fig. 46,

or, press the Infotainment button / to go to the Vehicle menu Fig. 47. Press the SETTINGS function button to open the Vehicle settings menu. To select a function in the menu, press the desired button.

When the function button check box is activa- ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing those menus.

34

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) page 224

Tyres Tyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) page 324

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value page 326

Lights

Light assist Motorway function, turning-on time, automatic lights when raining, one-touch signalling. page 137

Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls page 141

Coming home/Leaving home function Switch-on time of the Coming home and Leaving home functions page 139

Driver assistance

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Activation/deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. page 257

Front Assist (emergency brak- ing assistance system)

Activation/deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis- play page 253

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation page 110

Parking and ma- noeuvring

Parking and manoeuvring set- tings

Automatically activate front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound treble page 289

Ambient lighting Background lighting, switch-off, colour page 142

Mirrors and wind- screen wipers

Rear view mirrors Activate/deactivate folding after parking page 144

Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipe in case of rain, wipe when reversing page 33

Opening and clos- ing

Electric windows control Convenience open function, all, only driver page 136

Central locking Unlocking doors, automatic lock when driving, interior monitoring page 125

Instrument panel Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Advice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed dis- play, speed warning, oil temperature, reset data when setting off, reset data for total calculation

page 108

35

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Date and time Time source, time, time zone, time format, date, date format

Units Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, pressure

Service Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service page 114

Factory settings All Restore all settings

Individual Restore factory settings for lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect system while driving could dis- tract you from traffic.

Warning lamps

Control and warning lamps

Fig. 48 Related video: Dash panel

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor- mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on page 222.

Fault in the brake system page 222.

Fault in the steering system page 239.

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt page 68.

Press the foot brake page 258.

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor- mation on the instrument panel display

Front brake pads worn page 222.

Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation page 223.

Fault in ASR or disconnection caused by the system; OR ASR in operation page 223.

ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC in Sport mode page 223.

Fault in the ABS page 223.

Rear fog light switched on page 137.

Fault in the emission control system page 243.

Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault in the management of the diesel engine page 243.

Fault in the petrol engine management page 243.

Particulate filter blocked page 243.

Fault in the steering system page 239.

Tyre monitor system page 324.

Fuel tank almost empty page 112.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten- sioners page 78.

36

The essentials

Front passenger front airbag is disa- bled page 78.

The front passenger front airbag is activa- ted page 78.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle page 137.

Low engine oil level page 313.

Fault in the gearbox page 237.

Other warning lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on page 137.

Trailer turn signals page 137.

Press the foot brake page 230.

Speed regulator page 248; OR Adap- tive Cruise Control page 249.

Main beam on or flasher on page 137.

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not properly closed page 106.

Engine cooling fluid page 113.

Engine oil pressure page 313.

Fault in the battery page 319.

Electronic immobiliser active page 217.

Service interval display page 114.

Mobile telephone is connected via Blue- tooth page 206.

Mobile telephone battery charge status page 206.

Risk of freezing page 106.

Start-Stop system activated page 245.

Start-Stop system unavailable page 245.

Low consumption driving status page 107.

in Warning symbols on page 117

page 117

37

The essentials

Cruise control

Operating the cruise control system (CCS)*

Fig. 49 Related video: Dash panel

Fig. 50 On the left of the steering column: con- troller and buttons to operate the cruise control system; third lever to operate the cruise control system.

Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 50 or the third lever Fig. 50 Effect

Switching on the cruise control system

Move controller 1 to the position on the turn signal lever or move the third lever forward.

The system switches on. The last set speed of the cruise control is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching on the cruise control system Press the button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 3 on the third lever. The current speed is stored and the cruise control is

activated.

Temporarily switching off the cruise control

Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever to the position or move the third lever into pressure point .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be stored.

38

The essentials

Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 50 or the third lever Fig. 50 Effect

Switching on the cruise control system again

Press the button 2 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into the pres- sure point . The set speed control is activated.

Increasing the set speed of the cruise control

Briefly press the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area or press 3 on the third lever to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)

and set it.

The speed is changed to the set value.Press on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the cruise control

Briefly press the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area or move the third lever into position to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is changed to the set value.Press on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to continuously decrease the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Switching off the cruise control system

Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third lever into position . The system switches off.

in Cruise control operation on page 249

page 248

39

The essentials

Gearbox lever

Manual gearbox

Fig. 51 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever Fig. 51.

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. Move the gearbox lever to the required po- sition. Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it downwards, move it to the left as far as it will

go and then forwards to select reverse Fig. 51 R . Release the clutch.

in Driving with a manual gear- box on page 230

page 230

Automatic transmission*

Fig. 52 Automatic transmission: selector lever positions.

Parking lock Reverse gear Neutral (idling) Drive (forward) Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards (+) to go up a gear or backwards () to go down a gear.

P R N D/S +/

in Selector lever positions on page 231

page 230

page 40

Manual release of the selector lev- er

Fig. 53 Selector lever: manual release from position P.

Should the power supply be interrupted, there is a manual unlocking device located under the console of the selector lever, on the right. Releasing the selector lever requires a certain degree of practical skill.

Unlock: use the flat part of a screwdriver blade.

40

The essentials

Removing the cover from the selector lev- er Apply the handbrake to ensure that the car does not move. Carefully pull the corners of the selector lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev- er handle.

Releasing the selector lever Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel- low unlocking tab sideways Fig. 53. Press the interlock button on the selector lever and move the selector lever to posi- tion N. After carrying out the manual release, at- tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox console again.

If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis- charged battery) and the vehicle has to be pushed or towed, the selector lever must first be moved to position N, after operating the manual release mechanism.

WARNING The selector lever may be moved out of po- sition P only when the handbrake is firmly applied. If this does not work, secure the vehicle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehicle could otherwise start to move inadvertently after shifting the selector lev- er out of position P - accident risk!

Air conditioning

Related video

Fig. 54 Air conditioning

41

The essentials

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 55 In the centre console: Climatronic control panel.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.

1 Temperature

The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature.

2 Fan

The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.

3 Air distribution

The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .

4 Indications on the display screen of the fan speed and the temperature selected for the right and left sides.

Defrost function

The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3C (+38F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents. 42

The essentials

Air distribution towards the footwell.

Upward air distribution.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation

Seat heating buttons

Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the button to apply the driver-side settings to the passenger side. Use the temperature regulator for the passenger side in order to set a different temperature.

Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution.

Switching off Press the button or manually set the fan to .

in General notes on page 159

page 166

43

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning* and the heating and fresh air system work?

Fig. 56 In the centre console: controls for the manual air conditioning; heating and fresh air system controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.

1 Temperature

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

2 Fan

Level 0: blower and manual air conditioning/heating off Level 4: maximum fan level.

3 Air distribution

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Manual air conditioning: Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the wind- screen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

: Air distribution towards the footwell.

: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

44

The essentials

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Manual air conditioning: Air recirculation

Manual air conditioning: Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Manual air conditioning: Seat heating buttons

in General notes on page 159

page 162, page 164

45

The essentials

Fluid level control

Filling capacities

Capacities

Fuel tank 40 litres. 7 litre re- serve.

Windscreen washer fluid con- tainer

3 litres

Fuel

Fig. 57 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The tank flap is released electronically by means of the central locking and is located at the rear of the vehicle, on the right. The tank holds approximately 40 litres.

Opening the fuel tank cap Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the left side. Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap Fig. 57.

Closing the fuel tank cap Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go. Close the lid.

in Refuelling on page 305

page 305

Oil

Fig. 58 Engine oil dipstick.

Fig. 59 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap.

The level is measured using the dipstick loca- ted in the engine compartment page 312.

The oil indicator must be between zones A and C . It can never go above zone A .

Zone A : do not add oil. Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level in that zone. Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Topping up engine oil Unscrew cap from oil filler opening. Add oil slowly. At the same time, check the level to ensure you do not add too much. When the oil level reaches at least zone B , unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

46

The essentials

Engine oil additives No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type Type of Service

Specifica- tion

With particulate filter (DPF)a)

Set Service and Flexible Service Inter- vals

VW 507 00

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

If the engine oil level is too low You can get information about the correct en- gine oil for your vehicle in your specialised shop. If you have to change your engine oil, use this oil.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa- ble, in the event of an emergency you can change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L of the next oil until the next oil change:

Gasoline engines: standard VW 504 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or API SN. Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00, VW 509 00, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work- shop.

Recommended by SEAT

SEAT recommends the use of SEAT Genuine Oil to guarantee the high performance of LongLife Service engines.

in Changing engine oil on page 315

page 312

Coolant

Fig. 60 Engine compartment: coolant expan- sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the engine compartment page 312.

When the engine is cold, replace the coolant when the level is below .

Coolant specifications The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25C (-13F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably rai- ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent- age of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- tifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti- corrosion protection in Topping up coolant on page 316. The mixture of G13 with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significantly

47

The essentials

reduce anti-corrosion protection and should therefore be avoided in Topping up coolant on page 316.

in Topping up coolant on page 316

page 315

Brake fluid

Fig. 61 Engine compartment: brake fluid reser- voir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- gine compartment page 312.

The level should be between the and marks. If it is below , please visit a Technical Service.

in Changing the brake fluid on page 317

page 316

Windscreen washer

Fig. 62 In the engine compartment: cap of the windscreen washer tank.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment page 312.

To top up, mix water with a product recom- mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for win- dows.

in Checking and topping up the windscreen washer reservoir water on page 317

page 317

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart- ment page 312. It does not require maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service.

in Symbols and warnings on handling the battery on page 318

page 318

48

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse location

Fig. 63 On the dashboard on the driver side: lid of the fuse box.

Fig. 64 In the engine compartment: lid of the fuse box.

Opening and closing the fuse box situated below the dash panel Open: remove the fuse box cover in the di- rection indicated Fig. 63. Close: click the cover back into place.

To open the engine compartment fuse box Raise the bonnet. Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover Fig. 64 Then lift the cover out. To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.

Identifying fuses situated below the dash panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Colour Amp rating

Green 30

Orange 40

in Introduction on page 90

page 90

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 65 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparation Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- cal equipment. Open the corresponding fuse box page 90.

49

The essentials

Identifying a blown fuse A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 65.

Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.

To replace a fuse Remove the fuse. Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size. Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Note: Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior light- ing. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an authorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Halogen headlights. Type

Main beam headlights H7

Side light/DRL (daytime running light) W21W

Turn signal PY 21W

Halogen headlight with LED DRL

Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Main beam headlights H7

Turn signal PY 21W

Side light/DRL (daytime running light) LEDa)

a) In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised work- shop to have it replaced.

Full-LED main headlights Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs. In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Bulb lighta) Left Right

Brake lights 2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL

Side lights

Retro fog light P21 WLL

Reverse light P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi- cle. The position of lights may vary according to the country.

Light with LEDsa)

Left Right

Brake lights LED LED

Side lights LED LED

Retro fog light LED

Reverse light P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi- cle. The position of lights may vary according to the country.

page 92

50

The essentials

Action in the event of a punc- ture

Related video

Fig. 66 Wheels

What to do first

Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible. Apply the handbrake. Switch on the hazard warning lights. Manual transmission: select the 1st gear. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to position P. If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle. Have the vehicle tool kit* page 52 and the spare wheel page 325 ready. Observe the applicable legislation for each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, etc.).

All occupants should leave the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

WARNING Always observe the above steps and pro- tect yourself and other road users. If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- cle from moving.

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ture kit

Fig. 67 Standard display: contents of the anti- puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the tyre Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use the Fig. 67 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface. Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously Fig. 67 10 . Screw the inflator tube Fig. 67 3 into the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break au- tomatically. Remove the lid from the filling tube Fig. 67 3 and screw the open end of the tube into the tyre valve. With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant bot- tle. Remove the bottle from the valve. Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ing the tool Fig. 67 1 .

Inflating the tyre Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube Fig. 67 8 into the tyre valve. Check that the air bleed screw is closed Fig. 67 6 . Start the engine and leave it running. Insert the connector Fig. 67 9 into the vehicle's 12-volt socket page 152. Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF switch Fig. 67 5 .

51

The essentials

Keep the air compressor running until it rea- ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes. Disconnect the air compressor. If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre. Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the valve. Repeat the inflation process. If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and request assistance from an authorised technician. Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Check the pressure again after 10 minutes page 85.

in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on page 84

page 84

Changing a wheel

Related video

Fig. 68 Wheels

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 69 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- gage compartment: on-board tools.

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* Towline anchorage Box spanner for wheel bolts* Crank handle for jack

1

2

3

4

Jack* Hook for extracting the central wheel trims* Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps.

in Vehicle tools on page 83

page 83

Central trim for steel rims*

Fig. 70 Correct positioning of the central wheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for access to the wheel bolts.

5

6

7

52

The essentials

Removing Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools Fig. 69 6 ) to one of the chambers of the central wheel trim. Insert the box spanner through the hook, supporting it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim.

Fitting Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The bottom of the S of the SEAT badge should align with the inflation valve Fig. 70 1 . Press the central trim firmly until it locks in with an audible click.

Note There is also a valve mark on the back of the central wheel trim that indicates the correct alignment.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 71 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the cap until it clicks into place Fig. 71. Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

Wheel bolts

Fig. 72 Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts.

Fig. 73 Tyre change: tyre valve 1 and the cor- rect position for the anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the car to loosen the wheel bolts.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

53

The essentials

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push on the end of the wheel wrench with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel bolts Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go Fig. 72. Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlock- wise in Removing and fitting the wheel on page 55.

The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be pushed fully on again after changing the tyre.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt Take the adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts out of the vehicle tool kit. Insert the adapter fully onto the anti-theft wheel bolt Fig. 73. Fit the wheel wrench as far as it will go over the adapter. Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlock- wise in Removing and fitting the wheel on page 55.

The anti-theft wheel bolt has a different cap. This cap only fits on anti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard wheel bolts.

Important information about wheel bolts Factory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe- cially matched during construction. There- fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not even use wheel bolts from vehicles of the same model.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft locking bolt must be threaded onto positions Fig. 73 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valves po- sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the hubcap.

Raising the vehicle

Fig. 74 Jack position points.

Fig. 75 Fitting the jack.

Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm ground. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. If the surface is slip- pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- ping . Find the support point on the strut (sunken area) closest to the wheel to be changed Fig. 74. Turn the jack* crank handle, located below the strut support point, to raise it until the tab 1 Fig. 75 is below the housing provi- ded. Align the jack* so that tab 1 grips onto the housing provided on the strut and the mo- bile base 2 is resting on the ground. The base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- spect to the support point 1 . Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground.

54

The essentials

WARNING Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could slip or sink, respectively, with the re- sultant risk of injury. Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks, even those approved for other SEAT mod- els could slip, with the consequent risk of injury. Only mount the jack* on the support points designed for this purpose on the strut, and always align the jack correctly. If you do not, the jack* could slip as it does not have an adequate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury! The height of the parked vehicle can change as a result of variations in tempera- ture and loading.

CAUTION The vehicle must not be raised on the crossbar. Only place the jack* on the points designed for this purpose on the strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam- aged.

Removing and fitting the wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

Taking off the wheel Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box spanner and place them on a clean surface. Take off the wheel .

Putting on the spare wheel When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation direction, observe the instructions in page 56.

Mount the wheel. Screw on the wheel bolts in position and tighten them loosely with a box spanner. Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs using the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- ting the wheel.

Wheel bolt tightening torque The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. Af- ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor- que checked immediately with a torque wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have any rusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re- placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

WARNING If the wheel bolts are not properly tight- ened, they could come loose while driving and cause an accident, serious injury and loss of vehicle control. Use only wheel bolts which correspond to the rim in question. Never use different wheel bolts. Wheel bolts and threads should be clean, free of oil and grease, and it should be pos- sible to screw them easily. To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, only use the wheel wrench that came with the car from the factory. Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescri- bed torque, they could come loose while driving. Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims. If wheel bolts are tightened below the prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could come loose while driving. If tightening tor- que is too high, the wheel bolts or threads can be damaged.

55

The essentials

CAUTION When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may hit and damage the brake disc. For this reason, please take care and get a second person to assist you.

Tyres with compulsory direction of rotation

A directional tread pattern can be identified by the arrows on the sidewall that point in the direction of rotation. Always observe the di- rection of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel to guarantee optimum properties of this type of tyres with regard to grip, noises, wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive with care as this means the tyre does not of- fer optimum driving properties. This is of par- ticular importance when the road surface is wet.

To return to directional tread tires, replace the punctured tyre as soon as possible and re- store the obligatory direction of rotation of all tyres.

Subsequent work

Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.

Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap. Return all tools to their proper storing loca- tion. If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug- gage compartment page 153. Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- ted tyre as soon as possible. In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica- tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory page 324. Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Meanwhile, drive carefully. Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.

Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on the front wheels.

Check that they are correctly seated after driving for a few yards; correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the manufac- turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).

If there is a danger of being trapped de- spite having mounted the chains, it is best to disable the traction control system (ASR) in the ESC page 224.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as well as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may only be used with the following wheel rim/tyre combination.

195/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 13.5 mm

205/60 R16

Chains with links of maximum 9 mm205/55 R17

215/45 R18

Remove wheel covers and any integral trim ring before fitting snow chains.

Remove the chains when roads are free of snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the wheels become damaged quickly and may even be rendered unusable.

WARNING Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manufacturer's in- structions. This will prevent the chains coming into contact with the wheel hous- ing.

56

The essentials

Emergency towing of the ve- hicle

Towing

Fig. 76 Right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage.

Fig. 77 Right side of the rear bumper: towline anchorage.

Towline anchorages Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- rages.

The towline anchorages are located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment, next to the vehicle tools page 52.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screw connection Fig. 76 or Fig. 77 and tighten it with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow bar It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow- ed using a tow bar. You should only use a tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re- duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis- able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi- bre or similarly elastic material.

Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the towline anchorages provided or a towing bracket.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle The tow rope must be taut before you drive off. Release the clutch very carefully when starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or ac- celerate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving style Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. Inex- perienced drivers should not attempt to tow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- ways a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles with a manual gearbox. With an automatic gearbox, place the lever in N.

The brake servo only works when the engine is running. When not running, you must apply considerably more pressure to the brake pedal.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you will need more strength to steer than you normally would.

in General information on page 86

page 86

57

The essentials

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting it using the battery of another vehicle page 58. You should only attempt to tow-start a vehicle if charging the battery does not work. This is done by leveraging wheel movement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en- gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the catalytic converter.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow- started: Engage 2nd or 3rd gear. Keep the clutch pressed down. Switch the ignition on. Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch. As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing vehicle.

in General information on page 86

page 86

How to jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis- charged battery, the battery can be connec- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.

Jump leads Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- tions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board network.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 78 Diagram of connections for vehicles without Start-Stop system.

Fig. 79 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connections Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

1.

58

The essentials

Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 78. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- hicle providing assistance B . In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal of the vehicle providing the current B Fig. 78. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block itself Fig. 79. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid metal component bol- ted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery A . Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compart- ment.

Starting Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

5.

6.

7.

Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are switched on. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse order to the details given above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- onds, switch off the starter and try again after about 1 minute.

WARNING Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 310, Working in the engine compartment. The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V) and approximately the same capaci-

8.

9.

10.

11.

ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- ply could result in an explosion. Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- plosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion. Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit- ted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion. Never attach the negative cable to fuel system components or the brake lines in the other vehicle. The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment. Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

59

The essentials

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Changing the wiper blades

Fig. 80 Wipers in service position.

Fig. 81 Changing the windscreen wiper blade.

To change the blades it is necessary to move the wipers from the rest position into the serv- ice position.

Do not change the windscreen wipers when out of the service position, as it could cause paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction with the windscreen wiper arm.

Service position (for changing wiper blades) Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. Turn the ignition on and off and then (within approximately 9 seconds) push the wind- screen wiper lever down (short wipe). The windscreen wipers will move to the service position Fig. 80.

Removing the wiper blade Lift the windscreen wiper arm. Press the securing tab down 1 Fig. 81.

Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

Fitting the wiper blade Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen wiper arm until it clicks into place. Place the windscreen wiper arms to their initial position. Turn the ignition on, push the windscreen wiper lever down (touch wipe) and then turn the ignition off.

in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades on page 86

page 86

60

The essentials

Changing the rear window wiper blade

Fig. 82 Removing and fitting the rear window wiper blade.

Removing the wiper blade Lift the wiper arm away from the glass Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove the blade Fig. 82 A.

Fitting the wiper blade With one hand, hold the top end of the wip- er arm. Place the blade as shown in Fig. 82 B and slide the adapter along until it engages.

in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades on page 86

page 86

61

Safety

Safety

Safe driving Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING This manual contains important informa- tion about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documenta- tion also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers. Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- pecially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Advice about driving

Before setting off

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.

Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured page 153.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according to your size.

Ensure that the passenger in the central rear seat always has the head restraint in the correct position for use.

Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- straints according to their height.

Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly applied seat belts page 79.

Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sitting position page 63.

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly page 68.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers. When your concentra- tion or driving safety is affected by any cir- cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road , for this reason:

Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by passengers or telephone calls.

Never drive when your driving ability is im- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and accidents increa- ses.

62

Safe driving

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- dent, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The following points cover part of the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

three-point seat belts, Belt tension limiter for the front and rear side seats belt tensioners for the front and rear seats, front airbags, side airbags in the front seat backrests, ISOFIX anchor points for ISOFIX rear child seat system height-adjustable front head restraints, Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po- sition and non-use position adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your pas- sengers with the best possible protection in the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position of the vehi- cle occupants

Correct sitting position for the driv- er

Fig. 83 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel.

Fig. 84 Correct head restraint position for the driver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recom- mend the following adjustments for the driver:

Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest Fig. 83.

Move the driver's seat forwards or back- wards so that you are able to press the ac- celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled .

Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your

1) Depending on the version/market. 63

Safety

head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head Fig. 84.

Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- tion so that your back rests completely against it.

Fasten your seat belt securely page 68.

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat page 146.

WARNING An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries. Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel Fig. 83. If distance is less than 25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you properly. If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop will help you decide if spe- cial specific modifications are necessary. When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi- tions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head. To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest til- ted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt correctly. Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel posi- tion

Read the additional information carefully page 20

WARNING Never adjust the position of the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this could cause an accident. Move the lever up firmly so the steering wheel position does not accidentally change during driving. risk of accident!

Make sure you are capable of reaching and firmly holding the upper part of the steering wheel: risk of accident! If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.

Correct position for the front pas- senger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recom- mend the following adjustments for the front passenger:

Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible .

Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- tion so that your back rests completely against it.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head page 66.

Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the front passenger seat.

Fasten your seat belt securely page 68.

64

Safe driving

It is possible to deactivate the front passen- ger airbag in exceptional circumstances page 77.

Adjusting the front passenger seat page 19.

WARNING An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe injuries. Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your chest and the dash panel. If distance is less than 25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you properly. If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop will help you decide if spe- cial specific modifications are necessary. Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the air- bag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position. To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such as sudden brak- ing manoeuvres or an accident, never trav- el with the backrest tilted far back! The air- bag system and seat belts can only pro- vide optimal protection when the backrest

is in an upright position and the front pas- senger is wearing his or her seat belt prop- erly. The further the seat backrests are til- ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position! Adjust the head restraint correctly in or- der to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rear seat passengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear seat bench must con- sider the following:

Sit up straight.

Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- sition page 66.

Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the rear seat.

Fasten your seat belt securely page 68.

Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children in the vehicle page 79.

WARNING If the passengers in the rear seats are not sitting properly, they could sustain severe injuries. Adjust the head restraint correctly in or- der to achieve maximum protection. Seat belts can only provide optimal pro- tection when seat backrests are in an up- right position and the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In the rear seats are not sitting in an upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the seat belt in- creases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi- tions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ly when the belt webs are properly posi- tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect seat belt position. As the driver, you are re- sponsible for all passengers, especially chil- dren.

Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while travelling .

The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dangerous for all

65

Safety

vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to make you aware of this issue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in mo- tion: Never stand in the vehicle. Never stand on the seats. Never kneel on the seats. Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear. Never lean against the dash panel. Never lie on the rear bench. Never sit on the front edge of a seat. Never sit sideways. Never lean out of a window. Never put your feet out of a window. Never put your feet on the dash panel. Never put your feet on the surface of a seat. Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot- well. Never travel without wearing the seat belt. Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug- gage compartment.

WARNING Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries. Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the vehicle occupants to severe injuries if

airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and maintain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, in- struct your passengers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip page 63, Correct position of the vehicle occupants.

Correct adjustment of front head restraints

Fig. 85 Correctly adjusted head restraint as viewed from the front and the side.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- portant part of passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident sit- uations.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is, as far as possible, at the same level as the top of your head, or at the very least, at eye level Fig. 85.

WARNING Travelling with the head restraints re- moved or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. An improper ad- justment of the head restraints may cause death in an accident and increase the risk of suffering injuries during abrupt braking actions or unexpected manoeuvres. The head restraints must always be ad- justed according to the height of the pas- senger.

66

Safe driving

Correct adjustment of rear head restraints

Fig. 86 Head restraints in the correct position.

Fig. 87 Head restraint position warning label.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- portant part of the passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci- dent situations

Rear head restraints The rear head restraints have 2 positions:

use and non-use.

One position for use (head restraint raised) Fig. 86. In this position, the head re- straints are used normally, protecting pas- sengers along with the rear seat belts.

And one position for non-use (head re- straint lowered).

To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges with both hands in the di- rection of the arrow.

WARNING Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warn- ing label located on the rear side fixed win- dow Fig. 87. Do not swap the centre rear head re- straint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!

CAUTION Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 146.

Pedal area

Pedals

Ensure that you can always press the ac- celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim- paired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unim- paired to their initial positions.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a specialised dealership.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.

WARNING If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious injuries. Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This

67

Safety

would reduce the pedal area and could ob- struct the pedals. Risk of accident. Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of acci- dent!

Seat belts

Why wear a seat belt

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your vehicle. Every vehicle occupant must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt control lamp*

Fig. 88 Dashboard: right rear seat occupied and corresponding seat belt fastened display.

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp illuminates to remind the driver to fasten his seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off. Protect children by using a child seat ac- cording to the child's height and weight.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed surpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened during the drive, a warning sound will be

68

Seat belts

heard for a few seconds. The warning light will also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened with the ignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display* Depending on the model version, when the ignition is switched on, the seat belt status display Fig. 88 on the instrument panel in- forms the driver whether the passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. The symbol indicates that the passenger in this seat has fastened his or her seat belt.

When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis- played for approximately 30 seconds. The in- dication can be hidden by pressing the button on the dash panel.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be heard if the vehi- cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 89 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- den braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in the proper position. These also help pre- vent uncontrolled movements that may result in serious injury and reduce the risk of being thrown out of the vehicle.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other pas- sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- gy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat

belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival when in- volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec- tion provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air- bags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of head-on collision. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- bag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!

Important safety instructions for the use of seat belts

Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.

69

Safety

Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.

WARNING If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly. Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. Other vehicle occupants must also wear the seat belts at all times, otherwise they run the risk of be- ing injured. The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- tion if the seat belt is not positioned cor- rectly. Never allow two passengers (even chil- dren) to share the same seat belt. Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion. Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn. The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries. Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position.

Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belts, re- ducing their capacity to protect. The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from en- gaging securely. Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar items to alter the position of the belt webbing. Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and have been stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- newal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked. Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- moved or modified in any way. The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws of physics

Fig. 90 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Fig. 91 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driv- er who is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the case of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the

70

Seat belts

moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en- ergy called kinetic energy starts acting on both the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher the speed and the greater the weight, the more energy there is to be absorbed in an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- gy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our exam- ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc- cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed solely by said impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- screen or whatever else is in the way Fig. 90.

It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could other- wise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- danger not only themselves but also the front occupants Fig. 91.

How to properly adjust your seat belt

Fastening and unfastening your seat belt

Fig. 92 Positioning and removing the seat belt buckle.

71

Safety

Fig. 93 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Read the additional information carefully page 19.

Fasten your seat belt The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

Adjust the seat and head restraint correct- ly. To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly across your chest and lap. Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click Fig. 92. Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an auto- matic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- ing sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners page 72.

Releasing the seat belt Press the red button on the belt buckle Fig. 92. The latch plate is released and springs out . Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim is not damaged.

Positioning seat belts Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- ly when they are properly positioned.

WARNING The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright posi- tion and the seat belts have been fastened properly. Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- hicle is in motion. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the torso The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stom- ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com- fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack. For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exer- ted on the abdomen Fig. 93. Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 79. Read and observe the warnings page 69.

Seat belt tensioners*

How the seat belt tensioner works

Read the additional information carefully page 20

72

Airbag system

The seat belts for the front and side rear oc- cupants are equipped with belt tensioners. The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, although only in severe head-on and lateral collisions. This retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the oc- cupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle over- turns, or in accidents where no major forces act on the vehicle.

Note If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar with these regula- tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of belt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- ers or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the

belt tensioners function incorrectly or may not function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- sioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regulations, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances. Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts. The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au- tomatic retractor cannot be repaired. Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other re- pair work, must be performed by a special- ised workshop only. The belt tensioners will only provide pro- tection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. There- fore, it is most important to properly wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 68, Why wear a seat belt.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the air- bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

73

Safety

thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis- tance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of impact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the speci- fied reference values, the front, side and/or curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how seri- ous, is not a determining factor for the air- bags to have been triggered.

WARNING Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- suming an incorrect sitting position can lead to critical or fatal injuries. All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-

gered. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never trans- port children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not ap- propriate for their age, size or weight. If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you lean forward or to the side while travel- ling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of in- jury. This increased risk of injury will be fur- ther increased if you are struck by an inflat- ing airbag. To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- erly. Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system

Read the additional information carefully page 21.

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- al protection for the driver and passenger in combination with the seat belts.

The airbag system mainly comprises (as per vehicle equipment): an electronic control and monitoring sys- tem (control unit) frontal airbags for driver and passenger,

side airbags, curtain airbags, a control lamp on the dash panel page 78. key-operated switch for front passenger airbag, a control lamp for disabling/enabling the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control lamp : does not light up when the ignition is switched on page 78, turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on, illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is moving.

The airbag system is not triggered if: the ignition is switched off there is a minor frontal collision there is a minor side collision there is a rear-end collision

74

Airbag system

the vehicle turns over.

WARNING The seat belts and airbags can only pro- vide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 63, Correct position of the vehicle occupants. If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- tem, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, dur- ing a frontal collision the system might not trigger correctly or may fail to trigger at all.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to provide addition- al protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag de- ploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to function when the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air- bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli- sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors The conditions that lead to the airbag system activating in each situation cannot be gener- alised. Some factors play an important role, such as the properties of the object the vehi- cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec- tory and activates the respective restraint system.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede- fined reference value in the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous head-on collisions: Driver airbag. Front passenger front airbag

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous side-on collisions: Front side airbag on the side of the acci- dent. Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- cident.

In an accident with airbag activation: the interior lights switch on (if the interior light switch is in the courtesy light position); the hazard warning lights switch on; all doors are unlocked; the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Safety instructions about airbags

Front airbags

Read the additional information carefully page 21.

WARNING The seat belts and airbags can only pro- vide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 63, Correct position of the vehicle occupants. The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. It is also important not to attach any ob- jects such as cup holders or telephone

75

Safety

mountings to the surfaces covering the air- bag units. Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

Side airbags*

Read the additional information carefully page 22.

WARNING If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident. In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deploy- ment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered. Under no circumstances should protec- tive covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been ap- proved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the back- rest, the use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness. Any damage to the original seat uphols- tery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. Any work on the side airbag system or re- moval and installation of the airbag com- ponents for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation. Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way. The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- ation of the side and curtain (head) airbags neither the doors nor the door panels

should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is dam- aged, the airbag system may not work cor- rectly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop. In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the inte- rior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel. Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted. Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- ers in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been closed properly. Always check that the openings are closed or covered if additional loudspeak- ers or other equipment are fitted inside the door panels. Any work carried out to the doors should be made in an authorised specialised work- shop.

Head-protection airbags*

Read the additional information carefully page 23.

76

Airbag system

WARNING In order for the head-protection airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the ve- hicle. See your technical service to make this adjustment. There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protection airbag can deploy com- pletely without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. Any work on the head-protection airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop.

Otherwise, faults may occur during the air- bag system operation. Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way. The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- ation of the side and curtain airbags nei- ther the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud- speakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Activation and deactivation of front passenger airbag*

Fig. 94 Switch for activating and deactivating the front passenger airbag.

Fig. 95 Centre of the instrument panel: control lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag in centre console.

77

Safety

Deactivate the front passenger front airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the front passenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag switch When the front passenger airbag is deacti- vated, this means that only the front passen- ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Disconnect the front passenger front air- bag Switch the ignition off. Open the door on the front passenger side. Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. Turn the key gently to change its position to . If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. Close the front passenger door. Check, with the ignition switched on, that the control lamp remains lit where it says in the centre of the dash panel Fig. 95.

Connect the front passenger front airbag Switch the ignition off. Open the front passenger door. Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should enter, as far as it will go. Turn the key gently to the position. If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. Close the front passenger door. Check, with the ignition switched on, that the control lamp is not lit where it says in the centre of the dash panel Fig. 95. The control lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes off.

WARNING The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag. Always switch off the ignition before dis- abling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do so could result in a fault in the airbag deactivation system. Never leave the key in the airbag disa- bling switch as it could get damaged or en- able or disable the airbag during driving. If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, reactivate it as soon as possible so that it can fulfil its protective function.

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru- ment

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag disabled. Check whether the airbag should remain disabled

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger airbag enabled. The control lamp switches off automatically 60 sec- onds after the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system control lamp remains on or flashes, it indi- cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system . Have the system checked immediately by a specialised work- shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, the warning lamp re- mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that

78

Transporting children safely

the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp does not remain lit or if it is lit together with the control lamp on the dash panel, there is a fault in the airbag system . If the con- trol lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the dis- abling of the airbag system . Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

WARNING In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop. Do not mount a child seat in the front passenger seat or remove the mounted child seat! The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descrip- tions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Transporting children safely

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned from accident statistics, we recommend that chil- dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in rear seats must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- sons, the child seat should be installed in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or in the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to children page 70. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc- tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al- ways use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod- ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- gramme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke (not for all countries) (see www.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de- signed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seats shown on the website as described below:

Child seats in the opposite direction of trav- el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)). Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX DUO Plus). Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX (RMER KIDFIX XP). Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX (TATAKI MAXI PLUS).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats. Always read and note page 80.

We recommend you always carry the manu- facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- gether with the on-board documentation.

79

Safety

Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag

Read the additional information carefully page 24.

Read and always observe the safety informa- tion included in the following chapters:

Safety distance with respect to the passen- ger airbag page 73. Objects between the passenger and the passenger side airbag in Front airbags on page 75.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena- bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing backward since the airbag can strike the seat with such force that it can cause serious or fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats. This is the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- bled with a key-operated switch page 77. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child page 81.

WARNING If a child seat is secured to the front pas- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-

ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases. An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest. Never install a child seat facing back- wards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in ex- ceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger front airbag must always be disabled page 77, Activation and deactivation of front passenger airbag*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest, most upright position. If it is a fixed seat, it should be moved to the rearmost position possible. For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a technical service. Do not forget to reconnect the air- bag when an adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat. All vehicle occupants, especially chil- dren, must assume the proper sitting posi- tion and be properly belted in while travel- ling. Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- ling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other vehi- cle occupants. If children assume an improper sitting po- sition when the vehicle is moving, they ex- pose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly impor- tant if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or even death. A suitable child seat can protect your child! Never leave a child alone in the child seat or inside the vehicle because depending on the season, very high temperatures may be reached inside a parked vehicle, which could be fatal. Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci- dent. Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted and the seat belt should be proper- ly in place page 68. Only one child may occupy a child seat page 81, Child seats.

80

Transporting children safely

When a child seat is mounted in the rear seats, the door child-proof lock should be activated page 131.

Child seats

Safety instructions

Read the additional information carefully page 23.

WARNING When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suita- ble for age, weight and size. Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 80.

WARNING The retaining rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX and Top Tether* system child seats. Never secure other child seats that do not have the ISOFIX or Top Tether* sys- tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas- tening rings - this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child. Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- rectly using the ISOFIX and Top Tether* securing rings.

WARNING An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a crash. Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment. Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially ap- proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco- nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- ries:

Group 0 Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 months)

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 months)

Group 1 from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 years old)

Group 2 from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 years old)

Group 3 from 22 to 36 kg (up to approx. 7 years old)

Child seats that have been tested and ap- proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at SEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval category Child seats may have the approval category of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific (all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i- Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

Universal: child seats with universal appro- val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no need to consult any list of models. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt.

81

Safety

Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in addition to the standard requirements of universal approval, requires safety devices to lock the child seat, which require additional testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- proval include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval requires a dynamic test of the child seat for each vehicle model separately. Child seats with vehicle-specific approval also include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE- R 129 standard in relation to installation and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- cle.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach- ment systems are used for safely installing child seats.

Attachment systems overview ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- ment system allowing quick and safe attach- ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- tachment establishes a rigid connection be- tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, called connectors. These connectors are fit- ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found between the seat cushion and the backrest of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO- FIX attachment systems are used mainly in Europe page 27. If necessary, ISOFIX attachment may have to be supplemented with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

Automatic three-point seat belt. When- ever possible, it is preferable to attach the child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than attaching them with an automatic three-point seat belt page 25.

Additional attachment:

Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points are located at the back of the rear seat back- rest on the boot side page 30. The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol. Support bracket: some child seats rest on the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket. The support bracket prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of impact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket should only be used in the passenger seat and side rear seats . For the assembly of this type of seat you should also consult the list of approved vehicles for this assembly,

available in the instructions for child restraint systems.

Recommended systems for attaching child seats SEAT recommends attaching child seats as follows:

Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo- site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support bracket or iSize. Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- FIX and Top Tether.

WARNING Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury. Make sure the support bracket is correct- ly and safely installed.

82

Self-help

Emergencies

Self-help

Emergency equipment

Emergency warning triangle*

The use of reflective warning triangles is obligatory in emergencies in some countries. As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light bulbs.

The warning triangle is under the storage compartment which is located under the lug- gage compartment floor.

Note The warning triangle is not part of the ve- hicle's standard equipment. The warning triangle should meet legal requirements.

First-aid kit and fire extinguisher*

The first-aid kit can go in the storage com- partment which is located under the luggage compartment floor.

The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug- gage compartment carpet with Velcro.

Note The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's standard equipment. The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements. Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. After it has expired you should purchase a new one. The fire extinguisher must comply with le- gal requirements. Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the next date for checking. Before acquiring accessories and emer- gency equipment see the instructions in Accessories and spares page 304.

Vehicle tools

Read the additional information carefully page 52

Depending on the equipment, the tools and anti-puncture kit* are stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Towline anchorage Box spanner for wheel bolts* Jack* Wire hook for pulling off the wheel covers* / wheel bolt cap clip.

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are optional extras.

WARNING The factory-supplied jack is only de- signed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in- jury. Use the jack only on a firm, level ground. Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident. If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be secured by suitable means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

Note The jack does not generally require any maintenance. If required, it should be greased using universal type grease.

83

Emergencies

Tyre repair

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

Read the additional information carefully page 51

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, you must again check the tyre pressure about 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa- miliar with the procedure and you have the necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following cases: If the wheel rim has been damaged. In outside temperatures below -20C (-4F). In the event of cuts or perforations in the tyre greater than 4 mm. If you have been driving with very low pres- sure or a completely flat tyre.

If the sealant bottle has passed its use by date.

WARNING Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury: Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- rounding traffic to fill the tyre. Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid. All passengers and particularly children must keep a safe distance from the work area. Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users. Use the tyre mobility system only if you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance. The tyre mobility set is intended for tem- porary emergency use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop. Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mobility set as soon as possible. The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact with the skin. Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the reach of small children.

Always stop the engine, apply the hand- brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of vehicle involuntary movement.

WARNING A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conven- tional tyre. Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the tyre.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of used or expired sealant observ- ing any legal requirements.

Note A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at SEAT dealerships. Take into account the separate instruc- tion manual of the tyre mobility set* manu- facturer.

84

Self-help

Contents of the tyre mobility sys- tem*

Fig. 96 Standard display: contents of the anti- puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compart- ment. It includes the following components Fig. 96:

Valve insert remover Sticker indicating maximum speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50 mph Filler tube with cap Air compressor ON/OFF switch Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube).

1

2

3

4

5

6

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- toring system (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube). Tube for inflating tyres 12 volt connector Bottle of sealant Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the lower end for the valve insert. The valve insert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part 11 .

WARNING When inflating the wheel, the air compres- sor and the inflator tube may become hot. Protect hands and skin from hot parts. Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or hot air compressor on flammable mate- rial. Allow them to cool before storing the de- vice. If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

7

8

9

10

11

CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid overheating! Before switching on the air compressor again, let it cool for several mi- nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw in the inflator tube Fig. 96 8 again and check the pressure on the gauge 7 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. You should obtain professional assistance .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: Set the tyre pressure to the correct value again. Carefully resume your journey, without ex- ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reach the nearest specialised workshop and re- place the tyre.

WARNING Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious in- jury.

85

Emergencies

Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. Seek specialist assistance.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades

Read the additional information carefully page 60.

Perfect windscreen wiper blade condition is essential for clear vision. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the windscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty .

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the windscreen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be

checked by a specialised workshop and cor- rected if necessary.

WARNING Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows! Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly. The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

CAUTION Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass. Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win- dows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades. Never move any windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage. To prevent damage to the bonnet and the windscreen wiper arms, the latter should only be lifted off the windscreen when in service position.

Note The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the bonnet is properly closed. You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to fix a cover over the

windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice.

Towing or tow-starting

General information

Read the additional information carefully page 57.

Tow-starting means starting the engine of the vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling another that is not roadworthy.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access system, towing is only allowed with the igni- tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is towed with the engine switched off and the ignition connected. Depending on the battery charge status, the drop in voltage may be so large, even after just a few minutes, that no electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the steering wheel could lock up.

WARNING If the vehicle has no electrical power, the brake lights, turn signals and all other

86

Self-help

lights will no longer function. Do not have the vehicle towed away. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident.

WARNING The risk of accidents is high when tow- starting, for example, the towed vehicle can easily be driven into the towing vehicle.

CAUTION If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri- cant in the automatic transmission the car may only be towed with the driven wheels lifted clear of the road, or transported on a special car transporter or trailer.

CAUTION Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in attempt to start it. There is risk of damage to the catalytic converter.

Note Please observe related legal require- ments. Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe any regu- lations to the contrary. The tow rope must not be twisted. Other- wise the front tow line anchorage could be pulled off the vehicle.

Indications for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow- started. The jump start should be used in- stead page 58.

For technical reasons, towing the following vehicles is not allowed:

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system the steering re- mains locked and the electronic parking brake cannot be deactivated nor can the electronic lock of the steering column be re- leased if they are activated. If the battery is flat, it is possible that the engine control units may not operate correct- ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely be tow-started (in the case of manual gear- boxes): Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear. Keep the clutch pressed down. Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- ing lights. Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch. Once the engine starts, press the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle.

Note The vehicle can only be tow-started if the electronic parking brake and, if appropri- ate, the electronic lock of the steering col- umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be tow-started to de- activate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column.

87

Emergencies

Anchoring the front tow line

Fig. 97 Right side of the front bumper: remove the lid.

Fig. 98 Right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage screwed in.

The front towline anchorage is only mounted if the vehicle has to be towed.

There is a cover with an opening into which the towline anchorage is screwed on the right part of the front bumper.

Take the towline anchorage from the on- board tool set.

Remove the cover by pressing down on its right-hand side until it is unclipped Fig. 97.

Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in the direction of the arrow Fig. 98.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage and fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the tow- line anchorage back in the vehicle tool kit. The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 99 Right side of the rear bumper: cover- cap.

Fig. 100 Right side of the rear bumper: towline anchorage screwed in.

The rear towline anchorage should only be mounted if you wish to tow another vehicle.

On the right of the rear bumper there is a cover which covers a threaded hole.

Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi- cle tool set page 83.

Remove the cover by pressing down on its right-hand side until it is unclipped Fig. 99.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screw connection as far as it will go Fig. 100 and tighten with the wheel brace.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage and put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace the cover on the bumper. The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle.

88

Self-help

WARNING If the towline anchorage is not screwed in as far as the stop, there is a risk of the screw connection shearing off during tow- ing (accident risk). If your car has a towing bracket, only use special towing ropes. Risk of accident!

CAUTION In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, on- ly use special tow bars to prevent damage to the ball joint. These tow bars have been specially approved for use with towing brackets.

Towing vehicles with a manual gearbox

Towing is relatively straightforward.

Please observe the relevant instructions page 86.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope in the normal way, with all four wheels on the road; it can also be towed with either the front or rear wheels lifted off the road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h (30 mph).

Towing a vehicle equipped with au- tomatic gearbox

Certain restrictions must be observed when towing your vehicle.

Please observe the relevant instructions page 86.

The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or tow rope in the normal way, with all four wheels on the ground. When doing so, please note the following points:

Make sure the selector lever is in the N position. The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h (30 mph). The vehicle must not be towed further than 50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine is not running, the gearbox oil pump does not work and the gearbox is not adequately lubri- cated for higher speeds or longer distances.

If the vehicle has to be towed with a break- down truck, it must only be suspended at the front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo- cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e. travelling backwards), the drive shafts also turn backwards. The planetary gears in the automatic gearbox then turn at such high speeds that the gearbox will be severely damaged in a short time.

Note If it is not possible to tow the vehicle in the normal way, or if it has to be towed fur- ther than 50 km (30 miles), it must be transported on a special car transporter or trailer. Should the power supply to the selector lever be interrupted in position P, the selec- tor lever will be locked. Before the vehicle can be recovered/manoeuvred you must manually release the selector lever.

89

Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Likewise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a special- ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death! Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury. Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) and size. Never repair a fuse. Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- ple or similar.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec- tric system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec- trical elements and remove the key from the ignition. If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to another part of the electrical system. Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system. Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle.

Note One component may have more than one fuse. Several components may run on a single fuse. In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop.

Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- pear in the following tables. Some of the equipment listed in the ta- bles below pertain only to certain versions of the model or are optional extras. Please note that the above lists, while correct at the time of printing, are subject to change.

Fuses to the left of the instrument panel

Read the additional information carefully page 49

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

No. Consumer/Amps

1 Tow Hook 20

2 Cigarette lighter /Power point 20

3 Sound amplifier 30

6 Central locking 40

8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30

10 Tow Hook 20

13 Lights switch, steering column LSS and SMLS, diagnostic port, rain/light sensor

7.5

90

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps

14 Steering Column LSS: wiper control 10

15 Instrument panel 7.5

16 Right Lights Power Supply 40

17 Right Door Window Control 30

18 Windscreen wipers 30

19 Radio, Multimedia System 25

20 Heated Rear Window 30

21 SCR Control Unit 30

23 Rear View Camera 7.5

24 Connectivity Box, external audio source wiring (Double USB-Aux IN), telephone amplifier, MIB display

5

25 Steering Column Electronics (MFL) 7.5

26 Gateway 7.5

27 Active Suspension Control Unit 7.5

28 DWA Sensor 7.5

29 DWA Horn 7.5

31 9AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5

9AK Climatronic control unit 15

32 Steering Column LSS, without Kessy 7.5

33 Left Door Window Control 30

35 Left Lights Power Supply 40

No. Consumer/Amps

36 Signal Horn 20

37 Heated seats control unit 30

38 BCM Power C63 30

39 BSD, PDC, MRR 10

40

Light switch, diagnosis input, head- lamp range regulator, LSS steering column: lamps, halogen lamps, switch, reverse gear, electrochromic mirror, RKA without radio.

7.5

41 Regulation of unfolded exterior mir- rors, 7.5

42 Clutch pedal, ignition relays, AA pressure sensor 7.5

43 DWP relay coil, rear window wiper motor, heated nozzles 15

44 Airbag 7.5

45 Leimo Plus left headlight 7.5

46 Leimo Plus right headlight 7.5

48 Steering Column Lock, Kessy Con- trol Unit 7.5

49 SCR Relay Coil 7.5

53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5

58 Double Water Pump 7.5

59 Heated rear view mirrors 10

No. Consumer/Amps

60 Tow Hook 30

61 Tow Hook 30

Fuse arrangement in engine com- partment

Read the additional information carefully page 49

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

No. Consumer/Amps

1

MPI Engine Injection Module 10

TSI Engine Injection Module 15

Diesel Engine Injection Module 30

2

Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7), Low temperature coolant pump (TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil Pressure Regu- lating Valve (TJ1), Coolant Valve AGR (TJ1), High and Low Water Bumps (TJ1), SCR relay coil

7.5

3 Lambda probes 15

4 Petrol engine pump relay (MPI), Gauge control unit (TSI and diesel) 15

91

Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps

5

Pressure transducer, EPW Solenoid Valve, TOG Sensor, PWM Electric fan, Camshaft Control Valve, Active Carbon Tank Valve and Oil Pressure Regulating Valve (TSI)

10

6 Ignition coils (MPI and TSI) 20

Glow plug relay, Suction hose re- sistance (diesel) 7.5

7 Vacuum pump (TSI) 15

8 Injectors and EKP Relay Coil (MPI), Fuel metering valve (diesel) 10

9 Servo sensor 7.5

10 Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM and BCM 7.5

14 Engine Injection Module, Main En- gine Relay, ESC 7.5

15 Automatic Gearbox DQ200 and AQ160 30

17 50 Diag 7.5

18 Starter Motor 30

20 ESC (Pump) 60

ABS (Pump) 40

21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25

24 TH4 Electric fan without A/C for moderate climate countries 30

No. Consumer/Amps

25 TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder- ate climate countries 20

PTC1 40

26 TJ1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I Electric fan for warm climate countries 50

27 TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder- ate climate countries 30

PTC2 40

28 PTC3 40

Changing bulbs

General notes

Read the additional information carefully page 50

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of practical skill.

If you choose to change the engine compart- ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a dangerous area in Safety notes for work in the engine compartment on page 310.

Always use identical bulbs with the same designation. The name can be found on the base of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, there are different sets of headlights and tail lights:

Halogen headlights. Full-LED main headlights* Halogen headlights with LED daytime run- ning lights* Rear bulb light LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system* Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the lifetime of the vehicle and the bulbs cannot be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

WARNING Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm, there is a risk of burns. Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury. When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.

92

Fuses and bulbs

CAUTION Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit could occur. Switch off the lights or parking lights be- fore you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be tem- porarily misted. This has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted. Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest of your own safety, but also that of all other road users. Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead. The residue left by the fin- gerprints would vaporise as a result of the

heat generated by the bulb, they will be deposited on the reflector and will impair its surface. Depending on the level of equipment fit- ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an authorised workshop for its replacement.

Change the front bulbs

Main beam headlight bulb

Fig. 101 In the engine compartment: main beam lamp.

Raise the bonnet.

Turn the cover 1 anti-clockwise and take it out Fig. 101.

Remove the bulb connector 2 by pulling it outwards.

Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit the new one.

Fit the bulb connector 2 .

Fit cover 1 , turning it towards the right.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

93

Emergencies

Dipped beam headlight

Fig. 102 In the engine compartment: remove the lid.

Fig. 103 In the engine compartment: dipped beam lamp.

Raise the bonnet.

Move the loop Fig. 102 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover.

Remove the bulb connector Fig. 103 2 .

Unclip the retainer spring Fig. 103 3 pressing inwards to the right.

Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the lug on the base fits into the recess on the reflector.

Fit the connector.

Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the casing cover during the operation.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Turn signal light and DRL (daytime running light)1)

Fig. 104 In the engine compartment: turn sig- nal light bulb 1 and DRL (daytime running light) bulb 2 .

Raise the bonnet.

Turn the bulb holder Fig. 104 1 or 2 to the left and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

1) In headlight versions with LED DRL, this light source cannot be replaced. It is designed to last the length of the vehicles service life. In case of failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

94

Fuses and bulbs

Fog light bulb

Fig. 105 Fog light: remove the grille

Fig. 106 Fog light: detach the bulb holder

Follow the steps indicated:

Lever the groove with a screwdriver Fig. 105 (arrow). Next, unclip the clips located on the edge of the grille, pulling on it. Remove the 3 screws Fig. 106 1 and remove the fog light.

1.

2.

Remove the bulb connector 2 . Turn the bulb holder 3 to the left and pull. Remove the bulb by pressing on it and turning it anticlockwise at the same time. Replace the bulb, making sure that the fixing guides are in the right position and then press it and turn it clockwise. To install the headlight go back through the above steps in reverse. Check that the bulb works properly.

Change the rear bulbs

Rear bulbs (in the side panel)

Fig. 107 Boot: access to the bolt securing the tail light unit.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7

8. Fig. 108 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light.

Follow the steps indicated:

Check which of the bulbs is defective. Open the rear lid. Remove the lid, levering the flat side of a screwdriver into the recess Fig. 107 1 . Remove the bulb connector 2 . Unscrew the light securing bolt 3 by hand or using a screwdriver. Remove the light from the body, gently pulling it toward you, and place on a clean, smooth surface. Remove the bulb holder unlocking the retaining tabs Fig. 108 A . Change the damaged bulb. To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when fitting the bulb

1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8. 9.

95

Emergencies

holder. The securing tabs must click into place.

CAUTION Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no damage to the paintwork or any of its components.

Note Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light unit, to avoid any scratches. For LED lights, you can only change the turn signal and reverse light bulbs.

Rear lights (in the rear lid)

Fig. 109 Rear lid open: remove the lid.

Fig. 110 Remove the bulb holder.

Follow the steps indicated:

Check which of the bulbs is defective. Open the rear lid. Remove the rear lid cover in the direction indicated Fig. 109. Remove the bulb connector Fig. 110 1 . Remove the bulb holder unlocking the retaining tabs A . Change the damaged bulb. Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb. Check that the new bulb works properly. Carry out the same actions in reverse or- der for assembly and pay special atten- tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuring that the tabs are properly secured.

1. 2. 3.

4.

5.

4. 6.

7. 8.

Note For LED lights, you can only change the turn signal and reverse light bulbs.

Number plate light

Note Number plate lights use LED technology. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an authorised workshop for replace- ment.

Side turn signals

Fig. 111 Turn signal integrated in the rear view mirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte- grated in the rear view mirrors.

96

Fuses and bulbs

In case of failure, go to an authorised work- shop to have it replaced.

Additional brake light

Given the difficulty involved in the replace- ment of this light it should be done by Techni- cal Services.

Changing the interior bulbs

Interior light and front reading lights

Fig. 112 Front reading light.

To remove the glass Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-

ing and the glass Fig. 112.

Carefully remove the glass, levering it to avoid possible damage.

To replace the bulbs Pull the bulbs outwards.

To remove the central bulb, hold and press to one side.

Assembly Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-

tly on the outer edge of the side light.

First fit the glass with the fastening tabs over the frame of the switch. Next press the front part until the two long tabs click on the support.

Note In LED courtesy lights it is not possible to replace the light sources. If the light does not work, take the vehicle to an official Service.

Luggage compartment light*

Fig. 113 Boot light.

Fig. 114 Boot light.

Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside edge using the flat side of a screwdriver Fig. 113.

Disconnect the cable.

Press the bulb sideways and remove it from its housing Fig. 114.

97

Emergencies

Change the bulb.

Connect the cable again.

Refit the bulb and press it in until it engages.

98

Operation

Fig. 115 Dash panel.

100

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays General instrument panel

Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Door release lever Control for adjusting electric exteri- or mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Air vents Lever for: Turn signals/main beam head-

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Depending on equipment fitted: Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Steering wheel with horn and Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 On-board computer controls . . . . . 115 Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialogue system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 233

Instrument panel and warning lamps: Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . 36 Lever for: Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 143 Wipe and wash system* . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Multi-function display control* . . . 108 Infotainment system: Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Depending on the equipment, glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 192 Front passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Front passenger airbag disconnec- tion switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Switches for: Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Front passenger seat heating con- trol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Gear lever Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Depending on the equipment, but- tons for: Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Start-Stop operation button . . . . . . . 245 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . . . 324 Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac- cess closing and start-up sys- tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Depending on the equipment: USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Driver's seat heating control* . . . . . . . 147 Ignition lock (vehicles without Key- less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Steering column adjustment lev- er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Lever for unlocking the bonnet . . . . . . 17 Light range control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Note Some of the equipment listed in this sec- tion is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras. The arrangement of switches and con- trols on right-hand drive models* may be slightly different from the layout shown in page 101. However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

101

Operation

Instruments and warn- ing/control lamps

Dashboard

Introduction

Fig. 116 Related video: Dash panel

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrument panel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEAT Cockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort set- tings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Do not operate the instrument panel con- trols when driving. To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions

on the screen of the instrument panel and to the instructions on the screen of the Info- tainment system when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

102

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 117 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments Fig. 117:

Revolution counter (with the engine run- ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- nute) page 111.

1

Engine coolant temperature display page 113 Displays on the screen page 105. Adjuster button and display.

2

3

4

Speedometer. Fuel gauge page 112.

5

6

103

Operation

Digital instrument panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 118 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: Engine coolant temperature display page 113 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- nute the engine is running page 111. Gear engaged or position of the selec- tor lever currently selected Screen display page 105 Speedometer Digital speed display Fuel gauge page 112.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument panel digital with monochrome screen in col- our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi- ble using the button of the multifunction steering wheel. By selecting different infor- mation profiles, indications other than the classic circular instruments can be displayed, such as navigation data, multimedia informa- tion or travel data.

Information profiles With the option INSTRUMENT PANEL (Infotain- ment button / > Vehicle function button > View > Instrument cluster)

you can choose between the different dis- play options of the information that appears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit.

Classic View The revolutions per minute and speedometer needles appear along the entire length Fig. 118.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1)

Personalisation of the information that ap- pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of these items of information can be displayed

1) Pre-set information depending on the Driving mode selected.

104

Instruments and warning/control lamps

at the same time, but the user chooses which to display, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can be memorised by existing the menu or keeping the View button pressed.

Consumption. Graphic representation of the current consumption and digital display of the average consumption. Audio. Digital display of the current audio playback. Altitude. Digital display of the current alti- tude above sea level. Compass. Digital display of the compass. Information about the final destination. Digital display of the remaining travelling time, distance to the destination and the esti- mated time of arrival. Operating range. Digital display of the re- maining range. Travel time. Route guidance. Journey. Digital display of the distance travelled. Assistance systems. Graphic representa- tion of different assistance systems. Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec- ted. Navigation. Graphical representation of the navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num- ber and the contents of the selectable infor- mation profiles.

Navigation system in the SEAT Digital Cockpit*

Fig. 119 Infotainment system: map transfer button

Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital Cockpit can display a detailed map. To do this, select the Navigation option in the menu menu on the instrument panel page 107.

Depending on the features or the navigation map, it can be shown in the Digital SEAT Cockpit or on the Infotainment system or on both at the same time. If it is displayed only in the Infotainment system, the SEAT Digital Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma- noeuvres.

Transfer of navigation map Using the map transfer key Fig. 119, the map is transferred from the Infotainment sys- tem to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice ver- sa.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu, you can transfer the map back to the Info- tainment System.

Display indications

Possible indications on the instrument panel display Different pieces of information can be dis- played on the screen of the instrument panel, depending on the features of the vehicle. Doors, bonnet and rear lid open Warning and information messages Odometer Time page 111 Indications of the radio and navigation sys- tem Indications of the phone Outside temperature Indications of the compass Selector lever positions Gear-change recommendation page 238

105

Operation

Display of travel data (multifunction dis- play) and menus for different settings page 107 Service interval display page 114 Speed warning page 108 Speed warning for winter tyres Start-Stop system status display page 245 Indication of the status of active cylinder management (ACT) page 241 Low consumption driving Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Driver assistance system display page 245

Doors, bonnet and rear lid open When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- ing, the instrument panel display shows if any of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are opened and, in some cases, it is also indica- ted by an audible warning. The display may vary according to the type of instrument pan- el fitted.

Selector lever positions (dual-clutch DSG) The current position of the selector lever is shown on the side of the lever and on the in- strument panel display. When the lever is in the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in

some cases, the gear engaged in each case is shown on the instrument panel display.

Outside temperature display If the outside temperature is lower than ap- proximately +4C (+39F), the ice crystal symbol on the outside temperature dis- play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un- til the outside temperature exceeds +6C (+43F) .

When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux- iliary heater is switched on or when driving at very low speeds, the outside temperature in- dicated may be higher than the actual tem- perature due to the heat produced by the en- gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from -45C (-49F) to +76C (+169F).

Driving recommendation While driving, the instrument panel of certain vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda- tion for saving fuel page 238.

Odometer The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- tance travelled since the last time it was reset to zero.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Briefly press the button 0.0/SET Fig. 117 4 to reset the trip recorder to 0. Keep the button 0.0/SET 4 pressed for about 3 seconds and the previous value will be displayed.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel: Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain- ment system or the multifunction steering wheel page 108.

Speed warning for winter tyres If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is displayed on the instrument panel page 107.

The speed warning can be adjusted on the Infotainment system: using button / and the SETTINGS > Driver Assistance page 34 button.

Compass indication Depending on the equipment, when the igni- tion is on, the instrument panel display indi- cates the direction in which you are driving with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and there is no route guidance active, the graphic rep- resentation of a compass is also shown.

106

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Low consumption driving* Depending on the equipment, when driving, the display appears on the instrument panel when the vehicle is in low consumption status due to active cylinder management (ACT)* page 241.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Switch the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Hold the button 0.0/SET Fig. 117 4 down for more than 15 seconds to display the identifying letters of the vehicle engine.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel: Select the information profile Range in the instrument cluster (Infotainment button / > View > Driving data > Range func- tion button). Press and hold the button on the multi- function steering wheel until the menu Serv- ice is displayed on the instrument panel dis- play page 107. Select the menu option Engine code.

WARNING Even when the outside temperature is high- er than freezing temperature, some roads and bridges could be frozen.

The ice crystal symbol indicates that there may be a risk of freezing. At outside temperatures above +4C (+39F), there may be ice even when the ice crystal symbol is not on. The outside temperature sensor takes a guideline measurement.

Note There are different instrument panels and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the case of dis- plays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the con- trol warning lamps. Some indications on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by a sudden event, e.g. an incoming call. Depending on the equipment, some set- tings and instructions can be carried out or displayed on the infotainment system as well. If there are several warnings at the same time, the symbols will be displayed one af- ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- bols will stay on until you remove the cause. If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information items available will depend on the vehicles elec- tronics and features.

A specialised workshop can programme or modify additional functions, according to the vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is stationary. Driving data page 108 Assistance systems. Front Assist On/Off page 253 ACC (only display) page 257

Navigation. Audio. Telephone. Vehicle status page 109

Service Menu 3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can be adjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menu To open the Service menu, select the infor- mation profile Range (Infotainment button

107

Operation

/ > View > Driving data > Range button) and press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel for around 4 seconds. You can browse the menu with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel in the usual manner.

Restart the service interval display Select the Service menu and follow the in- structions on the screen of the instrument panel.

Restart the oil service Select the Restore Oil service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument pan- el display.

Restart journey data Select the Reset trip menu and follow the instructions on the instrument panel display to reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Select the menu Engine code. The identify- ing letters of the engine will be shown on the instrument panel display.

Setting the clock Select the Time menu and set the correct time by turning the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel.

Travel data (multifunction indica- tor)

The display of the travel data (multifunction display) shows different values about the journey and the consumption.

Change from one display to another Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: press the rocker switch on the wind- screen wiper lever page 115.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- tion steering wheel page 116.

Changing memory Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button of the multifunc- tion steering wheel.

The memory is deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours.

Display and storage of the journey data and the consumption values collected. When refuelling, the memory is deleted.

This memory contains travel data up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 mi- nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or

Since start

Since refuelling

Long-term

9999.9 km. When one of these values is exceeded (varies depending on the ver- sion of the instrument panel), the memo- ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets Select the memory that you wish to erase. Hold the button of the multifunction steering wheel or the button of the multi- function wheel pressed down for about 2 seconds.

Select the instructions In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi- cle settings, you can display different travel data page 34.

The current fuel consumption display operates throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the engine running and the ve- hicle stopped, in litres/hour.

The average fuel consumption is displayed after driv- ing for approximately 300 metres.

This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ignition was switched on.

Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled if the same driving style is maintained.

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Travelling time

Operating range

108

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Approxi- mate distance in km that can still be travelled with the current level of the AdBlue tank with the same driving style. The indication appears from a range of less than 2,400 km and cannot be de- activated.1)

Distance covered in km (m) after switching on the ignition.

The average speed will be shown after driving for approximately 100 metres.

Current speed displayed in digital format.

Displays a list of the connected comfort systems that in- crease energy consumption, e.g. air conditioning.

Set a speed warning Select the display Speed warning at --- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph. Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel to store the current speed and activate the warning. Activate: adjust to the desired speed within 5 seconds using the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or by turning the

Adblue Autonomy or Autonomy

Distance travelled

Average speed

Digital speed

Convenience consumers

thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel. Next, press the button or again or wait several seconds. The speed is stored and the warning activated. Deactivate: press button or button . The stored speed is deleted.

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be- tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph).

Display Oil temperature The engine reaches its operating tempera- ture when, under normal driving conditions, the oil temperature is between 80C and 120C. If the engine is under a lot of stress and the outside temperature is high, the en- gine oil temperature can increase. This does not present any problem as long as the warn- ing lamps or page 313 do not ap- pear on the display.

Warning and information messages (Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo- nents and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults displayed on the instrument panel as red and yellow warning symbols accompa-

nied with messages and page 36, de- pending on the case, even an audible warn- ing. The representation of the messages and symbols may vary depending on the version of the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually. To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or Vehicle page 107.

The symbol lights up or flashes (in part accompanied by audible warnings). Stop driving! Dan- ger! Check the fault and eliminate the cause. If necessary, seek professional assistance.

The symbol lights up or flashes (in part accompa- nied by audible warnings). Operating faults or the lack of operating fluids can cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, seek professional assistance.

It provides informa- tion about processes in the vehicle.

Note Depending on the equipment, some set- tings and instructions can be carried out or

Priority 1 warning (red).

Priority 2 warning (yellow).

Information message.

1) Not available in all countries. 109

Operation

displayed on the infotainment system as well. If there are several warnings at the same time, the symbols will be displayed one af- ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- bols will stay on until you remove the cause. If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.

Fatigue detection (break recom- mendation)*

Fig. 120 On the screen of the instrument pan- el: fatigue detection.

The Fatigue detection informs the driver when their driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue.

Function and operation Fatigue detection determines the driving be- haviour of the driver when starting a journey, making a calculation of tiredness. This is con- stantly compared with the current driving be- haviour. If the system detects that the driver is tired, an audible warning is given with a sound and an optic warning is shown with a symbol and complementary message on the instrument panel display Fig. 120. The message on the instrument panel display is shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- pending on the case, is repeated. The system stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel display can be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multi function steering wheel page 115.

The message can be recalled to the instru- ment panel display using the multifunction display page 108.

Conditions of operation Driving behaviour is only calculated on speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to around 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- vated in the Easy Connect system with the / button and the SETTINGS function

button page 34. A mark indicates that the adjustment has been activated.

System limitations The Fatigue detection has certain limitations inherent to the system. The following condi- tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- vent it from functioning.

At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) When cornering On roads in poor condition In unfavourable weather conditions When a sporty driving style is employed In the event of a serious distraction to the driver

Fatigue detection will be restored when the vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri- od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys- tem automatically re-establishes the tired- ness calculation. When driving at a faster speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- ted.

110

Instruments and warning/control lamps

WARNING Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- gue detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, sufficient in length when making long jour- neys. The driver always assumes the responsi- bility of driving to their full capacity. Never drive if you are tired. The system does not detect the tiredness of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the information in the section page 110, System limitations. In some situations, the system may incor- rectly interpret an intended driving ma- noeuvre as driver tiredness. No warning is given in the event of the ef- fect called microsleep! Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note Fatigue detection has been developed for driving on motorways and well paved roads only. If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys- tem Press the infotainment / button. Press the SETTINGS function button. Select the menu option Date and time to set the time page 34.

Setting the time on analogue the instru- ment panel To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), press and hold the button 0.0/SET on the instru- ment panel until the Time is displayed. Release the button 0.0/SET . The time is dis- played on the instrument panel display and the hours field is highlighted. Afterwards, press the button 0.0/SET until the desired time is displayed. To scroll quick- ly, hold the button 0.0/SET . When they have finished setting the hour, wait until the minute field is marked on the in- strument panel display. Immediately after, press the button 0.0/SET as many times as required until the correct minute is displayed. To scroll quickly, hold the button 0.0/SET . Release the button 0.0/SET in order to fin- ish setting the time.

Adjusting the time in the SEAT Digital Cockpit While on the Driving data menu select Range (Infotainment button / > View > Driving data > Range). Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the Service menu is dis- played on the instrument panel display page 107. Select the menu Time. Adjust the correct time by turning the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en- gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, the rev counter offers you the possibility of using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable speed.

The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any gear after running-in and with the engine hot. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle reaches the red zone .

111

Operation

We recommend that you avoid high revs and that you follow the recommendations on the gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- al information in page 238, Gear-change indicator.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the engine, the rev counter needle should only remain in the red zone for a short period of time. When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise emissions and en- gine noise.

Fuel level indicator

Fig. 121 Analogue instrument panel: fuel gauge

Fig. 122 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.

Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, the lower diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has been reached . Refuel as soon as possible. When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash- es in red.

It lights up yellow

Presence of water in the diesel. Switch off the engine and request the assistance of specialised personnel.

The display only works when the ignition is switched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrument panel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- hicle in the page 46 section.

WARNING When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- vere injuries. If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could reach the engine irregularly, particularly when driving up or down slopes. The steering system and the driver assis- tance systems and brakes do not work when the engine is running irregularly or

112

Instruments and warning/control lamps

switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu- lar supply thereof. Always refuel when there is only one quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle to stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system. The catalytic converter or the par- ticulate filter may get damaged!

Note The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to the fuel pump symbol points out towards the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank flap.

Engine coolant temperature dis- play

Fig. 123 Analogue instrument panel: engine coolant temperature display.

Fig. 124 Digital instrument panel: engine cool- ant temperature display.

Fig. 123, Fig. 124: Cool zone. The engine has not reached operating temperature yet. Avoid high en-

A

gine speeds and stressing the engine if it has not reached operating temperature. Normal zone. At high outside tempera- tures and when making the engine work hard, the diodes may continue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This is no cause for concern, provided the control lamp does not light up Warning area. When the engine is work- ing hard, especially at high outside tem- peratures, the diodes may light up in the warning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only works when the ignition is switched on.

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not keep driving! Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too high

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and let it cool down. Check the engine coolant level page 315.

B

C

113

Operation

If the warning lamp does not switch off even if the coolant level is correct, request assis- tance from specialised personnel.

CAUTION To ensure a long useful life for the engine, avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approxi- mately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold. The phase until the engine is warm also depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature* page 109 as a guide. Additional lights and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- fect of the coolant. At high outside temper- atures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating. The front spoiler also ensures proper dis- tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can reduce the cooling effect, which could cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe- cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on the instrument panel display and the Infotain- ment system.

There are different versions of instrument panels and infotainment systems, so the ver-

sions and instructions on the screens may vary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en- gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and services without engine oil change (e.g. In- spection).

In vehicles with Services established by time or mileage, the service intervals are al- ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- vals are determined individually. Thanks to technological progress, maintenance work has been greatly reduced. Because of the technology used by SEAT, with this service you only need to change the oil when the ve- hicle so requires. To calculate this variation (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use and individual driving styles are considered. The advance warning first appears 20 days before the date established for the corre- sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- maining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The cur- rent service message cannot be viewed until 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on- ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder If a service or an inspection has to be carried out soon, a service reminder will be dis- played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres that can still be travelled or the time until the next service.

Service due When the time for a service or an inspec- tion comes, an audible warning will be emit- ted when the ignition is switched on and the fixed key symbol may appear on the in- strument panel for a few seconds, along with one of the following messages:

Service now! Request an inspection. Oil service required! Oil service and inspection re- quired!

Check a service warning With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current service notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on the infotainment system Press the infotainment / button. Press the SETTINGS function button page 34. Select the Service menu option to display information about the services.

114

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel Press and hold the button 0.0/SET Fig. 117 4 for more than 5 seconds to con- sult the service message.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel The date of the service can only be read through the Service menu page 107.

Resetting service interval display If the service was not carried out by a SEAT dealership, the display can be reset as fol- lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel Switch off the ignition, press and hold the button 0.0/SET Fig. 117 4 . Switch ignition back on. Release the button 0.0/SET and press it again for the next 20 seconds.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel The service interval display can only be re- set through the Service menu page 107.

Do not restart the indicator between the service intervals, otherwise the information displayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, the service interval display changes to a fixed service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible oil change service.

Note The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when OK/RESET is pressed on the wind- screen wiper lever, or OK on the multifunc- tion steering wheel. In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to calculate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the maximum service intervals permitted page 328. If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehi- cles with fixed service intervals. For this reason we recommend that the service in- terval display be reset by a SEAT author- ised Dealer.

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display by scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, the multifunction display can only be operat- ed with the steering wheel buttons.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Never use the menus on the instrument panel display while the vehicle is in motion.

Note After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- tery, check the system settings. If the pow- er supply is interrupted, the system settings might be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the windscreen wip- er lever

Fig. 125 Windscreen wipers lever: control but- tons.

115

Operation

As long as a priority 1 page 109 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button Fig. 125 1 .

Select a menu or an informative display Switch the ignition on. If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press button 1 ; if necessary, several times. To display the menus page 107 or to re- turn to the selection of menus from a menu or from an informative display, hold down the rocker button 2 . To change from one menu to another, press the upper or lower part of the rocker switch. To open the menu or the informative display shown, press button 1 or wait a few seconds until the menu or the informative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings In the menu displayed, press the upper or lower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re- quired menu option is checked. The option appears framed. Press button 1 to make the required modi- fications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection Select Back on the corresponding menu to exit.

Note If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.

Using the multifunction steering wheel

Fig. 126 Right side of multifunction steering wheel: buttons to the menus and informative in- dications on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 page 109 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and

hidden with the button of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 126.

Select a menu or an informative display Switch the ignition on. If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press the button Fig. 126; if necessary, several times. To change menus, use buttons or Fig. 126. To open the menu or the information dis- played, press the button Fig. 126 or wait a few seconds until the menu or the in- formative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb- wheel of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 126 until the desired option of the menu is highlighted. The option appears framed. Press the button Fig. 126 to make the required modifications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection Press the button or Fig. 126.

Note If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not

116

Instruments and warning/control lamps

be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.

Control and warning lamps

Warning symbols

Read the additional information carefully page 36

The control and warning lamps are indicators of warnings, , faults or certain func- tions. Some control and warning lamps come on when the ignition is switched on, and switch off when the engine starts running, or while driving.

Depending on the model, additional text messages may be viewed on the instrument panel display. These may be purely informa- tive or they may be advising of the need for action page 102, Dashboard.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- times a symbol may be displayed on the in- strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps are lit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ig- nored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries. Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- ble. Park the vehicle away from traffic and ensure that there are no highly flammable materials under the vehicle that could come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry grass, fuel). A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- dent for the driver and for other road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers. Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool. In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe injuries page 310.

CAUTION Failure to heed the control lamps and text messages when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Multifunction steering wheel*

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone and radio/navigation functions without needing to distract the driv- er.

There are two versions of the multifunction module:

Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi- gation version: for controlling the audio functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, iPod1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel. Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi- gation version: for controlling the audio functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, iPod1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment. 117

Operation

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 127 Controls on the steering wheel.

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

A Turn

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in audio mode (radio).

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in audio mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in audio mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in telephone mode.

Turn announcement volume up/down. You do not need to be in navigation mode but there has to be an announce- ment active when you adjust the volume.

A Press Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute the current navigation

announcement.

B a) Activate/deactivate voice control. This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). When the system is in telephone mode this buttons function is deactivated during the ongoing call, and without Radio/Media functionality (except AUX).

C / D Search for the previous/next stationb).

Short press: Switch to the previous/next song. Hold down: Fast rewind/for- wardc).

No function

There is no active call: Ra- dio/Media functionality (ex- cept AUX) Active call: no function

No function for the other modes (navigation, assis- tants, vehicle status, travel data).

E / F a) Change instrument panel menu. This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

118

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

G Coloured instrument panel: change to the previous menu. Monochrome Instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

H Turn

Coloured instrument panel: List of stations available (on- ly if the instrument panel is in audio menu).

Coloured instrument panel: next track (only if the instru- ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

There is no active call: List of last calls. Active call: access the call options list (call on hold, hang up, mute microphone, private number, etc.).

Active route: access the view to halt guidance to des- tination. No active route: list of previ- ous destinations.

H Press Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

A Turn

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in audio mode (radio).

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in audio mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in audio mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in tele- phone mode.

Turn announcement volume up/down. You do not need to be in navigation mode but there has to be an announcement active when you adjust the volume.

A Press Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute the current navigation an-

nouncement.

B a) Enable/disable voice controlb). This function can be used from any mode, except with an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/next stationc).

Short press: Switch to the previous/next song. Hold down: Fast rewind/for- wardd).

No function No active call: Radio/Me- dia functions (except AUX) Active call: no function

No function for the other modes (navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

119

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b)

G Short pressb): change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semi-circular clocks Long pressb): access settings of Individual Profiles.

H Turn

List of sources available (audio/media).

List of sources available (audio/media). No function

There is no active call: Re- cent calls list. Active call: go to the call options list (call in standby, hang up, mute microphone, private number, etc.).

If there is a map on the Digital Scorecard: Zoom in-out (with or without an active route). If there is no map on the Digital Scorecard: the map is transferred from the Infotainment System dis- play to the Digital Scorecard (with and without active route).

H Press No function No function No function No function Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the

map on the DigitScorecard.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data). c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

120

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system without voice control

Fig. 128 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

A Turn

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in audio mode (radio).

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in audio mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in audio mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You do not need to be in telephone mode.

Turn announcement volume up/down. You do not need to be in navigation mode but there has to be an announce- ment active when you adjust the volume.

A Press Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute the current navigation

announcement.

B a)

Incoming call: pick up (short press), reject (long press). Ongoing call: hang up (short press). No incoming/ongoing call: open phone menu (short press), repeat last ongoing call (long press). These functions can be carried out on any mode (audio, media, navigations, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

C / D Search for the previous/next stationb).

Short press: Switch to the previous/next song. Hold down: Fast rewind/for- wardc).

No function

There is no active call: Ra- dio/Media functionality (ex- cept AUX) Active call: no function

No function for the other modes (navigation, assis- tants, vehicle status, travel data).

E / F a) Change instrument panel menu. This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

121

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

G Cycles through the audio source: FM/AM CD SD - USB - AUX - BT Audio (only those that are available). This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

H Turn

Coloured instrument panel: List of stations available (on- ly if the instrument panel is in audio menu).

Coloured instrument panel: next track (only if the instru- ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

There is no active call: List of last calls. Active call: access the call options list (call on hold, hang up, mute microphone, private number, etc.).

Active route: access the view to halt guidance to des- tination. No active route: list of previ- ous destinations.

H Press Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

122

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Keys

Set of keys

Fig. 129 Set of keys.

The set of keys may consists of the following, depending on the version of your vehicle:

a remote control key Fig. 129 A

a key without remote control B , a plastic key tab* C .

or

two keys with remote control A

a plastic key tab* C .

Duplicate keys If you need a replacement key, go to a Tech- nical Service with your vehicle identification number.

WARNING An incorrect use of the keys can cause serious injuries. Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their own. An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equip- ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergen- cy situation. Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION There are electronic components in the re- mote control key. Avoid wetting and hitting the keys.

Remote control*

Fig. 130 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key.

Fig. 131 Vehicle key with alarm button.

The radio frequency remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a distance.

By using button 4 Fig. 130 on the control, the key shaft is released.

Unlocking the vehicle Fig. 130 1 . 123

Operation

Locking the vehicle Fig. 130 2 .

Unlocking the rear lid. Press button Fig. 130 3 until all the turn signals on the vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but- ton 3 is pressed, you have 2 minutes to open the door. Once this time has passed, it will lock again.

Moreover, the battery indicator on the key Fig. 130 (arrow), will flash.

The remote control transmitter and the bat- teries are integrated in the key. The receiver is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de- pends on different factors. The range is re- duced as the batteries start to lose power.

Alarm button* Only press alarm button in the event of an emergency Fig. 131 5 ! When the alarm button is pressed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn signals are switched on for a short time. When the alarm button is pressed again, the alarm is switched off.

WARNING Read and observe the relevant warnings in Set of keys on page 123.

Note The remote control key works only when you are in its scope.

If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked by using the radio frequency remote control, the remote control key will have to be re-synchronised. For this, go to your technical services.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 132 Vehicle key: opening the battery com- partment.

Fig. 133 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery Unfold the vehicle key blade page 123. Remove the cover from the back of the ve- hicle key Fig. 132 in the direction of the ar- row . Extract the battery from the compartment using a suitable thin object Fig. 133. Place the new battery in the compartment as shown Fig. 133, pressing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow . Fit the cover as shown Fig. 132, pressing it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.

CAUTION If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged. Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- place the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications. When fitting the battery, check that the polarity is correct.

124

Opening and closing

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries cor- rectly and with respect for the environ- ment.

Synchronising the remote control key

If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door with the remote control, it should be re- synchronised.

While the vehicle is open: Press button 2 Fig. 130 on the remote

control.

Then close the vehicle using the key shaft within one minute.

While the vehicle is closed: Press button 1 Fig. 130 on the remote

control.

Then close the vehicle using the key shaft within one minute.

If the is pressed repeatedly outside the range of action of the remote control, the ve- hicle may not open or close when using the remote control. The remote control key will have to be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys are available at your Technical Service, where they must be matched to the locking system.

Up to five remote control keys can be used.

Central locking system

Description

Read the additional information carefully page 15.

The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by just pushing the button.

Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:

the key, by inserting it into the driver door cylinder and rotating it in the opening direc- tion. Depending on the vehicle version, either all doors will be unlocked or only the driver door will be unlocked. All doors will be locked on locking the vehicle using the key. the interior central lock button page 127. the radio frequency remote control, us- ing the buttons on the key page 123.

Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:

Locking system Safe* Selective* unlocking system Self-locking system to prevent involunta- ry unlocking Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system* Emergency unlocking system

Unlocking the vehicle* Press the button Fig. 130 on the re- mote control to unlock all the doors and the rear lid.

Locking the vehicle* Press the button Fig. 130 on the re- mote control to lock all doors and the rear lid or turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the rear lid.

WARNING Locking from the outside carelessly or without good visibility may lead to bruising, particularly in the case of children. When locking a vehicle, never leave chil- dren unaccompanied inside, as from the outside it will be difficult to provide assis- tance if required. Having the doors locked prevents intrud- ers from getting in, for example when stop- ped at a traffic light.

125

Operation

Note For anti-theft security, only the driver door is fitted with a lock cylinder.

Safe security system*1)

This is an anti-theft device which consists of a double lock for the door locks and a deacti- vation function for the boot in order to prevent forced entry.

Activation The safe system is activated when the vehi- cle is locked using the key or the remote con- trol.

To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in- serted in the door lock cylinder in the locking direction.

To activate the system using the remote con- trol, press the lock button once on the re- mote.

Once this system is activated, opening doors from the outside and the inside is not possi- ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen- tral lock button does not work.

When the ignition is switched off, the instru- ment panel display indicates that the Safe system is on.

Deactivation Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder twice towards the locking direction.

To activate the system using the remote con- trol, press the lock button on the remote twice in less than 5 seconds.

On deactivating the Safe system, the alarm volumetric sensor is also deactivated.

With the Safe switched off, doors can be opened from the interior but not from the ex- terior.

See Selective unlocking system*

Safe status On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi- ble from outside the vehicle through the win- dow which shows the Safe system status.

We will know that Safe system is activated by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted with an alarm, until they unlock.

Remember:

Safe enabled with or without alarm: con- tinuous flashing of warning lamp.

Safe disabled without alarm: the warning lamp stays off.

Safe disabled with alarm: the warning lamp stays off.

WARNING No one should remain inside the vehicle if the Safe system is activated because opening the doors will not be possible in the event of an emergency neither from the inside nor the outside and help from the outside is made difficult. Danger of death. Passengers could become trapped inside in case of emergency.

Selective unlocking system*

This system allows to unlock either just the driver door or all the vehicle.

Driver door unlock button Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote control.

Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder, rotate once in the unlock direction. The driver door will remain without Safe and unlocked.

1) Available depending on market and version. 126

Opening and closing

In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see the Anti- theft Alarm section page 131.

Using the remote control, press the unlock button on the remote once. The Safe sys- tem for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the driver door is unlocked and both the alarm and the warning lamp are also turned off.

Unlocking all doors and the luggage com- partment The unlock button on the remote control must be pressed twice so that all doors and the luggage compartment can be opened.

Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for all vehicle, to unlock all doors and to use the luggage compartment. The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi- cles fitted with one) are turned off.

Unlocking the luggage compartment See page 16.

Self-locking system to prevent in- voluntary unlocking

It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- intentional unlocking of the vehicle.

If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the doors (including the boot) are opened within 30 seconds, it re-locks automatically.

Automatic speed-dependent lock- ing and unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevents access to the vehicle from the outside when it is run- ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).

Locking The doors will lock automatically if the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded.

If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors open, when starting again and exceeding the mentioned speed, all doors will lock again.

Unlocking On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle will returns to its status prior to self-locking.

Each door can be unlocked and opened in- dependently from the inside (for example, when a passenger gets out). To do it, simply operate the lever inside the door.

WARNING The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the door would open.

Note If the airbags are triggered during an acci- dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for the luggage compartment. It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside with the central locking, after turning the ignition off and back on again.

Central lock button*

Fig. 134 Central lock button.

Read the additional information carefully page 15

The central lock button allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside.

The central lock button also works with the ignition switched off, except when the safe system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your ve- hicle with the central lock button:

127

Operation

Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac- cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at a traffic light). The driver door cannot be locked while it is open. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle. All doors can be unlocked separately from inside the vehicle. To do so, pull the door re- lease lever once.

WARNING If the vehicle is locked, children and disa- bled people may be trapped inside it. Repeated operation of central locking will prevent the central lock button from working for a few seconds. Then, it can only be unlocked in case it has been previously locked. After few seconds, the central lock- ing becomes operative again. The central lock button is not operative when the vehicle is locked from the outside (with the remote control or the key).

Related videos Keyless Access

Fig. 135 Convenience

Fig. 136 Technology

Unlocking and locking the vehicle with Keyless Access*

Fig. 137 Keyless Access locking and ignition system: In the proximity of the car.

Fig. 138 Locking and ignition system without Keyless Access: sensor surface A for unlock- ing inside the door handle and sensor surface B for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle without actively using its key. To do this, all that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in the detection area where you are attempting to access the vehicle Fig. 137 and to touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles Fig. 138 .

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via the driver door only. When doing so, the re- mote control key must be no further than ap- prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key, for instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or in a briefcase.

128

Opening and closing

Once the doors have been locked, they can- not be opened again immediately. This will enable you to check that the doors are prop- erly closed.

If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock only the drivers door, the side being un- locked, or the entire vehicle. The necessary adjustments can be performed in vehicles with a driver information system page 34.

General information If a valid key is located in the proximity of the car Fig. 137, the Keyless Access locking and starting system gives the key entry as soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the driver door handle is touched. The following features are then available without having to use the vehicle key actively:

Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using the handle of the front drivers door or the softtouch/handle on the rear lid. Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the sensor on the driver door handle. Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine with the starter button page 218.

The central locking and locking systems op- erate in the same way as a normal locking and unlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a double flash of the indicator lights; locking by a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and the rear lid are closed leaving the last key used inside the vehicle and none outside, the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve- hicle's indicator lights will flash four times. The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if you do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Key- less-Entry) Grip the driver door lever. In doing this, the sensor surface Fig. 138 A (arrow) on the handle is touched and the vehicle unlocks. Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info- tainment system configuration, pulling the door handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without safety system Safe: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex- it) Switch the ignition off. Close the driver's door.

Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B (arrow) on the driver door handle. The door that is used must be closed.

In vehicles with safety system Safe: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex- it) Switch the ignition off. Close the driver's door. Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B (arrow) on the driver door handle. The vehicle locks with the Safe security system page 126. The door that is used must be closed. Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow) of the driver door handle to lock the vehicle without activating the Safe security system page 126.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- id vehicle key in the proximity Fig. 137.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid will not lock automatically after closing it.

129

Operation

What happens when locking the vehicle with a second key If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and it is locked from the outside with a second ve- hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked for engine ignition page 215. In order to enable engine ignition, press the button on the key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensors If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a long period of time, the proximity sensors on the passenger doors are automatically disa- bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles is often activated in an unusual manner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity sensors are disabled for a certain period of time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

After a time. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- ton on the key. OR: if the boot is opened. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with the key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnection function* You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac- cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking cycle.

Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve- hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- wise the vehicle cannot be locked. Close the door. Push the central locking button on the re- mote control and touch the locking sensor surface of the driver door handle Fig. 138 B within the following 5 seconds. Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also possible if the vehicle is locked through the drivers door lock. To check that the function has been deacti- vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull on the door handle. The door should not open.

The next time the door can only be unlocked via the remote control or the lock cylinder. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions To close all the electric windows using the convenience function, keep a finger on the locking sensor surface B (arrow) of the door

handle for a few seconds until the windows have closed.

The doors opened by touching the sensor surface of the door handle depend on the settings that have been activated in the Easy Connect system with the / button and the SETTINGS > Opening and closing function buttons.

CAUTION The sensor surfaces on the door handles could engage if hit with a water jet or high pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. If at least one of the electric windows is open and the sensor surface B (arrow) on the handle is activa- ted continuously, all windows will close.

Note If the vehicle battery has little or no charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost or entirely out of charge, you will probably not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- cle can be unlocked or locked manually. To control the proper locking of the vehi- cle, the release function is disabled for ap- prox. 2 seconds. If the message Keyless access system faulty is displayed on the screen of the dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the operation of the Keyless Access system. Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT

130

Opening and closing

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. Depending on the function set on the in- fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte- rior mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle using the sensor surface on the driver door handle. If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or the system fails to detect one, a warning will display on the dash panel screen. This could happen if any other radio frequency signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mobile device accessory) or if the key is covered by another object (e.g. an aluminium case). If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a layer of salt, the correct functioning of the sensors on the door handles may be affec- ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear stick is in position P. To improve the safety of your vehicle, the remote control of the system is equipped with a position sensor. If this remote control does not detect movement for a certain length of time, the system will conclude that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on a night table) so it will be disabled.

Childproof lock

Fig. 139 Childproof lock on the left hand side door.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside. This sys- tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- ted and deactivated manually, as described below:

Activating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childproof lock.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise

for the left-hand side doors Fig. 139 and clockwise for the right-hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti- vate.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise for the right-hand side doors, and clock- wise for the left-hand side doors Fig. 139.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside. The childproof lock can be activated or de- activated by inserting the key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.

Anti-theft alarm*

Description of anti-theft alarm sys- tem*

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it. The system will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when locking the vehicle. The system is immediately activated and the turn signal light located on the driver door will

131

Operation

flash along with the turn signals, indicating that the alarm and the locking security sys- tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, they will not be included in the protection zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse- quently closed, they will be automatically in- cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle and the turn signals will flash accordingly when the doors close.

The turn signal light will flash twice on opening and deactivating the alarm. The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm? The system triggers an alarm, if the following unauthorised actions are carried out when the vehicle is locked:

Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key without switching on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in certain markets, such as the Netherlands, the alarm is activated im- mediately). A door is opened. Opening the bonnet. The rear lid is opened.

Ignition switched on with a non-validated key. Movements in the driving compartment (ve- hicles with a volume sensor). Towing of the vehicle1). Vehicle tilt angle1 ). Undue manipulation of the alarm. Battery handling.

In this case, the acoustic signals will go off and the turn signal will flash for approximate- ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.

Opening all the doors in manual mode In vehicles without an alarm, when opening the driver door manually, all doors are opened.

How to switch the alarm off To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the key in the opening direction, open the door and switch the ignition on, or press the unlock button on the remote control.

In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm system, you have 15 seconds to insert the key in the ignition lock and activate the ignition if the vehicle is opened using the driver door key.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. and the ignition will be blocked.

Note After 28 days, the indicator light will be switched off to prevent the battery from draining if the vehicle has been left parked for a long period of time. The alarm system remains activated. The alarm will trigger again if attempts are made to open another protection zone. The alarm system can be activated or deactivated using the radio frequency re- mote control page 123. The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button . If the vehicle battery is run down or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not operate correctly. Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason. The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active.

1) With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection 132

Opening and closing

Vehicle interior monitoring and an- ti-tow system*

Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects unau- thorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- sound.

Activation It is automatically switched on when the

anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation Open the vehicle with the key, either me-

chanically or by pressing the button on the remote control. If the vehicle is opened mechanically, the time period from when the door is opened until the key is inserted into the contact should not exceed 15 sec- onds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

Press the button on the remote control twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen- sors will be deactivated. The alarm system remains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system are automatically switched on again next time the vehicle is locked.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched

on. In order to activate it, all the doors and the rear lid must be closed.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must be done each time that the vehicle is locked; if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system should be switched off if animals are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, their movements will trigger the alarm) or when, for example, the vehicle is transported or has to be towed with only one axle on the ground.

False alarms Interior monitoring will only operate correctly if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false alarm: Open windows (partially or fully), Movement of objects inside the vehicle, such as loose papers, items hanging from the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is activated without the volumetric sensor function, relocking will activate the alarm with all its functions, except the volumetric sensor. This function is reactivated when

the alarm is switched on again, unless it is deliberately switched off. If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is different to the flash indicating the alarm is activated. The vibration of a mobile phone left in- side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in- terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors react to movements and shakes in- side the vehicle. If on activating the alarm, any door or the rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system will only be activated once all the doors are closed (including the rear lid).

Deactivating the vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system*

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be triggered if movements are detected in the in- terior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's incli- nation is changed (e.g. during transport). You can prevent the alarm from being triggered accidentally by switching off the vehicle inte- rior monitoring and/or tow-away protection.

To switch off the interior monitoring and tow-away protection, switch off the ignition

133

Operation

and, using the Infotainment system, select: Infotainment button / and then the SETTINGS > Opening and closing > Central locking > Vehicle interior monitoring button.

When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away pro- tection are switched off until the next time the door is opened.

If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)* page 126 is switched off, the vehicle interi- or monitoring and the tow-away protection are automatically switched off.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in De- scription on page 125.

Rear lid

Opening and closing

Read the additional information carefully page 16

WARNING Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of accident or injury.

The rear lid must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights. Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury! Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving. Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjec- ted to extremely high and low tempera- tures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the rear lid and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle. Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the rear lid. Never drive with the rear lid open or half- closed, exhaust gases may enter into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! If you only open the rear lid, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened if the key is left inside.

Controls for the windows

Opening and closing the electric windows

Fig. 140 Detail of the driver door: controls for the front and rear windows.

Read the additional information carefully page 18

The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using the controls on the driver door. The other doors each have a switch for their own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended .

You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front

134

Opening and closing

passenger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch The safety switch Fig. 140 5 on the driver door can be used to disable the electric win- dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated. Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated. The safety control symbol lights up in yellow if the buttons on the rear doors are switched off.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Set of keys on page 123. Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury. Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window. If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be activated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows. The doors can be locked using the re- mote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation.

Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened. If necessary, use the safety switch to dis- able the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled.

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will automatically open again page 135. If this happens, check why the window could not be closed before at- tempting to close it again.

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- jury when the electric windows close.

If a window is obstructed when closing au- tomatically, the window stops at this point and lowers immediately . Next, check why the window does not close before attempting it again. If you try within the following 10 seconds and the window closes again with difficulty or there is an obstruction, the automatic closing will stop working for 10 seconds.

If the window is still obstructed, the window will stop at this point. If there is no obvious reason why the win- dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- back function is now deactivated.

If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate one of the but- tons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING Always take the ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left alone in- side the vehicle. The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened. Closing the windows without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window. Never allow people to remain in the vehi- cle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency. The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.

135

Operation

Convenience opening and closing

Use the convenience opening/closing func- tion to easily open/close all the windows from the outside.

Convenience open function Press and hold the button on the remote

control key until all the windows have reached the desired position, or

First unlock the vehicle using the button on the remote control key and then keep the key in the driver door lock until all the windows have reached the required posi- tion.

Convenience close function Press and hold the button on the remote

control key until all the windows are closed , or

Lock the driver's door with the key and hold the key in the lock position until all the win- dows are closed

Programming convenience opening in the Easy Connect* Select: / SETTINGS> Opening and closing > Electric windows > Con- venience opening, to choose between all the windows (All), only the drivers window (Driver) or none (Deactivated).

WARNING Never close the windows without due care or proper control. There is a risk of suf- fering injury. For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close func- tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the windows when pressing the button to close them. The windows stop moving as soon as the button is released.

One-touch opening and closing*

One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to hold down the button.

Buttons Fig. 140 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have two positions for opening windows and two for closing them. This makes it easier to open and close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing Pull up the window button briefly up to the

second position. The window closes fully.

One-touch opening Push down the window button briefly up to

the second position. The window opens fully.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing The automatic open and close function will

not work if the battery has been temporarily disconnected. The function can be restored as follows:

Close the window as far as it will go by lift- ing and holding the electric window switch.

Release the switch and then lift it again for 1 second. This will re-enable the automatic function.

If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage, the window will open (or close) until you re- lease the button. If you push or lift the button briefly to the second stage, the window will open (one-touch opening) or close (one- touch closing) automatically. If you operate the button while the window is opening or closing, it stops at this position.

136

Lights and visibility

Lights and visibility

Lights

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on page 138.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on page 141.

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on page 138.

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Warn- ing symbols on page 117.

Switching lights on and off

Read the additional information carefully page 31

The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all situations.

Note The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be observed. The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off. If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi- ble warning sounds while the driver door remains open. This is a reminder to switch the lights off. The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory require- ments.

Automatic dipped beam control *

The automatic dipped beam control is merely intended as an aid and is not able to recog- nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , the vehicle lights and the instrument panel and switch lighting switch on and off automatical- ly in the following situations in Daytime running lights on page 138:

Automatic switch- ing on

Automatic switch- ing off

The photo sensor de- tects darkness, for exam- ple, when driving through a tunnel.

When adequate lighting is detected.

The rain sensor detects rain and activates the windscreen wipers.

When the windscreen wipers have been inac- tive for a few minutes.

WARNING If the road is not well lit and other road users cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, accidents may occur. The automatic dipped beam control () only switches on the dipped beam when there are no changes in brightness, and not, for example when it is foggy.

137

Operation

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individu- al lights, integrated in the front headlights. By connecting the daytime running lights, these lights are switched on1) .

The daytime running lights switch on every time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in positions or , according to the level of exterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a light sensor automatically switches dipped beam on and off (including the control and instru- ment lighting) or the daytime running lights depending on the level of exterior lighting.

WARNING Never drive with daytime lights if the road is not well lit due to weather or lighting conditions. Daytime lights do not provide enough light to illuminate the road properly or be seen by other road users. On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, when activating the daytime running light the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi- cle which does not have the rear lights on may not be visible to other drivers in the darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in conditions of poor visibility.

Fog lights

Fig. 141 Instrument console: light panel.

Switching on the front fog lights* Pull the light switch to the first point Fig. 141 1 , from positions , or . The symbol in the light switch lights up.

Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with front fog lights) Completely pull the light switch 2 from position , or . The lamp on the in- strument panel lights up.

Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with no front fog lights) Completely pull the light switch 2 from position , or . This type of switch on-

ly has one position. The lamp on the instru- ment panel lights up.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Read the additional information carefully page 32

Parking lights Switch the ignition off and remove the key from the lock. Move the turn signal lever up or down to turn the right or left-hand parking lights on, respectively.

Convenience turn signals For the one-touch signalling, when the igni- tion is switched on, move the lever as far as possible upwards or downwards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

One-touch signalling is activated and deacti- vated in the Easy Connect system via the / button and the function button SET- TINGS > Lights > One-touch signal- ling page 34.

1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the rear side light is switched on as well.

138

Lights and visibility

In vehicles that do not have the correspond- ing menu, this function can be deactivated in a specialised workshop.

WARNING The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other drivers.

Note If the convenience turn signals are oper- ating (three flashes) and the other conven- ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- tive part stops flashing and only flashes once in the new part selected. The turn signals only work when the igni- tion is switched on. The corresponding warning lamp flashes in the instrument panel. The control lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec- tive, the control lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs are defective, the control lamp does not light up. Change the bulb. The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the instrument panel. The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if no other

lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the instrument panel. When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light on the cor- responding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only work with the igni- tion off. If said light is on, an audible warn- ing will be emitted while the driver door is open. If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This is intended as a re- minder to switch off the turn signal, unless you wish to leave the parking light on.

Coming Home/Leaving Home Func- tion*

Fig. 142 Related video

The Leaving Home function is controlled with a photosensor.

If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func- tion is connected, the front side and dipped

lights, the tail lights and the number plate light will light up to provide assistance.

Coming Home function The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition. When the driver door is opened, the Coming Home lighting comes on.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:

If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the rear lid remain open. If the light switch is turned to position . If the ignition is switched on.

Automatic Leaving Home function The Leaving Home function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:

the light control is in position and the photosensor detects darkness.

The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases:

If the time period for the delay in switching off the headlights has ended If the vehicle is locked again. If the light switch is turned to position . If the ignition is switched on.

139

Operation

Note To activate the Coming/Leaving home function, the rotary light switch must be in position and the light sensor must de- tect darkness.

Fog lights with cornering light func- tion*

The cornering light function is an additional function to the dipped beam headlights to improve lighting of the side of the road when taking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when the dipped beam headlights are already on and it is enabled when driving at speeds below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Forward gear If the steering wheel is turned to the right or the right-hand turn signal switched on, the right-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on. If the steering wheel is turned to the left or the left-hand turn signal switched on, the left- hand fog lamp is gradually switched on. After the turn, the cornering light function is gradually switched off.

Reverse gear When engaging the reverse gear, both fog lights turn on.

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehicles equipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected/disconnected via the corresponding Easy Connect system menu.

Activation: when going above 110 km/h (68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip- ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- er's visibility distance. Deactivation: when reducing the speed of the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dipped beam returns to its normal position.

Headlight range control

Fig. 143 Instrument panel: headlight range control.

The lights range control adapts according to the value of the headlight beam and the vehi- cle load status. This offers the driver optimum visibility and the headlights do not dazzle on- coming drivers .

The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch Fig. 143:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart- ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart- ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart- ment full. With trailer and minimum drawbar load.

140

Lights and visibility

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Driver only, luggage compartment full With trailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.

Dynamic headlight range control The control is not mounted in vehicles with dynamic headlight range control. The head- light range is automatically adjusted accord- ing to the vehicle load status when they are switched on.

WARNING Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that the headlights dazzle and distract oth- er drivers. This could result in a serious ac- cident. Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load status so that it does not blind other driv- ers.

Hazard warning lights

Read the additional information carefully page 32

The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehi- cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; for an automatic gearbox, move the gear lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The simultaneous hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

WARNING The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the haz- ard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle. Due to the high temperatures that the catalytic converter can reach, never park

in an area where the catalytic converter could come into contact with highly inflam- mable materials, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time, even if the ignition is switched off. The use of the hazard warning lights de- scribed here is subject to the relevant stat- utory requirements.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel, screens and controls

Fig. 144 Related video

Depending on the model, the lighting of the instrument panel and controls can be adjus- ted in the Easy Connect system, using the / button and the SETTINGS function

button page 34. 141

Operation

With the ignition on and without light activa- tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting remains activated in daytime light conditions. The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di- minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving through a tunnel without the function ac- tive, the instrument panel lighting may even switch off. The objective of this function is to provide the driver with a visual indication that he or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in- strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the following message will appear Turn on the lights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights

Read the additional information carefully page 33

Luggage compartment lighting The light is activated when the rear lid is open, even when the ignition and lights are turned off. For this reason, ensure that the rear lid is always closed.

Ambient light* The ambient light lights up the area of the centre console and the footwell area and, depending on the version, the front door pan- els as well.

It will be switched on at full brightness when the doors are opened and the lights will be dimmed during driving, when the light selec- tor is in , or .

The brightness of the ambient light* can be adjusted through the Easy Connect menu, as can colour, in versions with lighting on the front door panel (the / button and the function button SETTINGS > background lighting page 34).

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off after ap- prox. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has been removed and the courtesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Visibility

Heated rear window

Fig. 145 With the air conditioning controls: heated rear window.

The heated rear window only works when the engine is running. When it is switched on, a lamp lights up on the switch.

After approximately 8 minutes, the heating device of the rear window switches off auto- matically.

For the sake of the environment The heated rear window should be switch- ed off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.

Note To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on

142

Lights and visibility

when normal operating conditions are re- established.

Sun visors

Fig. 146 Sun visor on the driver side.

Options for adjusting driver and front pas- senger sun visors: Lower the sun visor towards the wind- screen. The sun visor can be pulled out of its mounting and turned towards the door Fig. 146 1 . Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi- tudinally backwards.

Vanity mirror There is a vanity mirror, with a cover 2 , on the rear of the sun blind.

WARNING Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use.

Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems

Windscreen wiper and window wip- er

Read the additional information carefully page 33

WARNING Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visi- bility and safety levels while driving. In cold conditions you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road. Always note the corresponding warnings page 60.

WARNING The rain sensor* may not detect enough rain to switch on the wipers. If necessary, switch on the wipers man- ually when water on the windscreen ob- structs visibility.

CAUTION In icy conditions, always check that the windscreen wipers and the window wiper are not frozen. If you switch on the wind- screen wipers when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could dam- age both the wiper blades and the wiper motor.

Note The wipers and washers will work only when the ignition is switched on. The heat output of the heated jets* is controlled automatically when the ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature. In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only work in interval/rain sensor mode when the igni- tion is on and the bonnet closed. When the interval wipe function is on, the intervals are directly proportional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the intervals.

143

Operation

If you stop the vehicle with the wind- screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto- matically change to a lower position speed. The set speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls away. The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once the au- tomatic wash/wipe system has been acti- vated, provided the vehicle is moving (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than 3 seconds after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without per- forming the last wipe. For the drip func- tion to work again, you have to turn the ig- nition off and then on again. Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sensor disruption or faults. Depending on the version of the model, when you engage reverse gear and with the headlight wiper activated, this can start a wipe.

Rear view mirrors

Interior mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the rear window.

Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle function* The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- matically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- led if reverse gear is engaged.

Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects preventing light from reach- ing the interior rear vision mirror. If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti- dazzle function from working well or even from working at all.

Folding in the exterior mirrors man- ually

The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol- ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to- wards the vehicle.

Note Before washing the vehicle with an auto- matic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid damage.

Electric exterior mirrors*

Fig. 147 Exterior mirror controls.

Read the additional information carefully page 20

The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in the driver door.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors 1. Turn knob Fig. 147 to position L (left ex-

terior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exterior mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle.

144

Lights and visibility

3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior mirror).

4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the exte- rior mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle .

Heated exterior mirrors* Press the demisting button Fig. 145

The mirrors demist for some minutes to pre- vent draining the battery unnecessarily.

If necessary, press the button again to re- peat the function.

The exterior mirror heating is not activated in temperatures above approximately +20C (+68F).

Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically* Turn the control Fig. 147 to position to

fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al- ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are driving through an automatic car wash. This will help prevent damage.

Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex- tended position* Turn the knob to position L or R to return the

exterior mirrors to their original position .

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the vehicle* The Easy Connect system, the / but- ton and the function buttons SETTINGS > Mirrors and windscreen wipers can be used to have the exterior mirrors fold in when the vehicle is parked and locked page 34.

When the vehicle is locked with the remote control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au- tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with the remote control, the exterior mirrors are deployed automatically.

WARNING Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the dis- tance to vehicles behind you when chang- ing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident. If possible, use the rear vision mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you. Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!

For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass. In vehicles with retractable external rear- view mirrors, the following must be consid- ered: if, due to an external force (e.g. being knocked while manoeuvring), the adjust- ment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be fully folded electri- cally. Do not readjust the rear vision mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function. The fold-in function on the exterior mir- rors will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h (25 mph).

145

Operation

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seat and head restraints

Adjusting the front seats

Read the additional information carefully page 19

WARNING The safe driving chapter contains impor- tant information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and observe for your own safety and the safety of your passengers page 62.

WARNING Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an in- correct sitting position. Risk of accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is stationary. To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger in case of a sudden braking or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted towards the rear. The maxi- mum protection of the seat belt can be achieved only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and front passenger have properly adjusted their

seat belts. The further the backrests are til- ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to improper positioning of the belt web! Exercise caution when securing the seat height into forwards/backwards position. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention. To move the seat forwards and back- wards, pull upwards and not sideways on the lever, as the force exerted on it in that direction could damage it.

Adjusting the front head restraints

Read the additional information carefully page 19

Adjust the head restraint page 19 so that as far as possible the top of the head re- straint is level with the top of your head. When this is not possible, try to get as close as pos- sible to this position.

WARNING Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury. After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly for height to achieve optimal protection. Please observe the safety warnings in Correct adjustment of front head re- straints on page 66.

Note When fitting the head restraints again, in- sert the tubes as far as possible into the guides without pressing the button.

Adjustment of the rear head re- straints

Fig. 148 Rear centre head restraint: release point.

When transporting people in the back seat, place the head restraints of the occupied seats at a minimum of the next socket up .

Adjusting the head restraints To set the head restraint higher, grasp the

sides with both hands and move it upwards, until you see it engage.

146

Seats and head restraints

To set the head restraint lower down, press the 1 Fig. 148 button and move it down- wards.

Removing the head restraint To remove the head restraint, the corre- sponding backrest must be partially folded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 148.

Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- rives to the top.

Press button 1 , while simultaneously pressing on the security hole 2 with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head restraint.

Move the backrest until it engages properly .

Fitting the head restraint To mount the external head restraints, the corresponding backrest must be partially fol- ded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 148.

Insert the head restraint bars into the guides until they perceptibly engage. It should not be possible to remove the head restraint from the backrest.

Move the backrest until it engages properly .

WARNING Please observe the general notes page 67. Remove the rear head restraints only when it is necessary for the placement of a child seat page 79. After removing a child seat, remount the head restraint im- mediately. Travelling with the head re- straints removed or improperly adjusted in- creases the risk of severe injuries.

Seat functions

Introduction

WARNING Inappropriate use of the seat functions can cause severe injuries. Assume the proper sitting position before your trip and remain in it throughout. This also applies to the other occupants. Always keep hands, fingers, feet and oth- er parts of the body away from the operat- ing radius and the adjustment of seats.

Heated seats*

Fig. 149 On the centre console: front seats heating switch : version with Climatronic. : version with manual air conditioning.

The seat cushions can be heated electrically when the ignition is switched on. The backrest is also heated in some versions.

The seat heating should not be engaged in any of the following conditions:

The seat is unoccupied. The seat has a covering. There is a child seat installed in the seat. The seat cushion is wet or damp. The indoor or outdoor temperature is great- er than 25C (77F).

147

Operation

Activate Press the button or . Seat heating is switched on fully.

Adjusting the heating output Press the button or repeatedly until the desired temperature is reached.

Deactivating Press the button or until all the warning lamps switch off.

WARNING Children and people who cannot perceive pain or temperature because of medica- tions, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a limited perception of these, may suffer burns to the back, but- tocks or legs when using seat heating, an occurrence that may entail a very lengthy recovery period or from which it may not be possible to recover fully. Seek medical ad- vice if you have doubts regarding your health. People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating. If an abnormality in the device's temper- ature control is detected, have it checked by a specialist workshop.

WARNING If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can adversely affect the operation of the seat heating, increasing the risk of burns. Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to using the seat heater. Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp. Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat. Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest. Liquids, sharps objects and insulating materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating. In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces- sary fuel waste.

Fold down the rear seats

Fig. 150 On the rear seat backrest: release button 1 ; red mark 2 .

Folding the backrest forwards Completely lower the rear headrests page 146. Press the unlock button Fig. 150 1 for- wards and at the same time fold the backrest down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the button 2 is visi- ble.

Converting the table to a seat Raise and lock in the back rest. The red marking on the tab 2 should no longer be visible when the backrest is properly secured.

On split rear seats*, the backrest can be low- ered in two sections.

148

Seats and head restraints

WARNING Please be careful when folding back the backrest! Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and at- tention. Do no trap or damage seat belts when raising the backrest. After raising the backrest, check it has engaged properly in position. Do this by pulling on the central seat belt or directly on the backrest and check that the position lever is in the neutral position. The three point automatic seat belt only works correctly when the backrest of the central seat is correctly engaged.

Removable seat covers

Fig. 151 Remove the covers. Left front seat; Rear seats

Fig. 152 Label on the covers: washing instruc- tion symbols

Seasonal seats are seats with removable, re- versible, exchangeable and washable covers.

Removing the cover It is suggested to move the rear seats to their rearmost position so it is easier to remove and put the covers.

Move the seat backwards until the handle of the zip is completely accessible Fig. 151 1 1). Move the handle of the zip in the direction indicated by the arrow Fig. 151. The remov- able cover is released. Pull the cover off. Move the seat back to driving position1).

1) Only in font seats. 149

Operation

Putting the cover Move the seat backwards until the anchor point of the zip is completely accessible1) . Place the removable cover on the anchor of the zip (the pillows have 2 anchor points). Move the handle of the zip against the di- rection indicated by the arrow Fig. 151. Insert the excess fabric in the joint between pillow and backrest, ensuring that the remov- able cover is firm1) . Move the seat back to driving position1) .

CAUTION Washing instructions for removable cov- ers Fig. 152: Wash the covers in a washing machine

using a delicate program, with water at 30C and separately.

Do not use bleach, centrifuge or dry- clean.

Hang out the covers horizontally. Iron the covers with steam, placing a

piece of fabric between cover and iron. Avoid contact between the iron and the

Alcantara leather parts.

Note If using the seats without removable cov- ers, the handle of the zip must be at the start of the zip. To clean the upholstery of the seats, see the fabric cleaning section page 334.

Transport and practical equipment

Practical equipment

Glove compartment

Fig. 153 Passenger side: glove compartment.

The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever Fig. 153.

This compartment can hold documents in A4 format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD player is located in the glove compartment. Separate operating instructions are enclosed for this equipment in the corresponding In- struction Manual.

1) Only in font seats. 150

Transport and practical equipment

WARNING Always keep the storage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or by an accident.

Storage compartment under the front seats*

Fig. 154 Storage compartment under the right front passenger seat.

To open The compartment is opened by pulling on

the lever and guiding it with your hand.

To close Press the cover inwards until the closed

drawer clicks into position.

Note The storage drawer will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.

Storage pocket in the seat*

Fig. 155 Storage pocket.

There is a storage pocket on the rear of the front seats.

Storage compartment in front door panel*

In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot- tle, etc. can be stored.

Front drink holder*

Fig. 156 Front drink holders in the centre con- sole.

In the central console, next to the hand brake, there are two drinks holders Fig. 156.

WARNING Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. During sudden or normal driving manoeu- vres, when braking suddenly or in case of an accident, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scalding. Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), since they could cause injury in the case of an accident. When travelling, the drinks holder should always be closed to prevent risk in the event of sudden breaking or accident.

151

Operation

Front ashtray*

Fig. 157 Ashtray in the centre console.

Opening and closing the ashtray To open the ashtray, lift the cover Fig. 157. To close, push the cover down.

Emptying the ashtray Extract the ashtray and empty it.

WARNING Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a fire.

Electrical power socket

Fig. 158 Front power socket.

The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can also be used for other electrical components with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When the engine is switched off, however, the vehi- cle battery will discharge. For further informa- tion see page 304.

WARNING The power sockets and the connected ac- cessories will only operate when the igni- tion is on or when the engine is running. Im- proper use of the sockets or electrical ac- cessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, nev- er leave children alone inside the vehicle.

CAUTION Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a battery discharge. Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions in page 304.

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 159 Lighter.

Press on the cigarette lighter Fig. 159 to activate it .

Wait for the lighter to spring out.

Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the glowing coil.

WARNING Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start a fire.

152

Transport and practical equipment

Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns and serious inju- ries. The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children alone inside the vehicle.

Luggage compartment

Loading the luggage compartment

Fig. 160 Position heavy items as far forward as possible.

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in the luggage compartment. Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could affect safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.

Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.

Place heavy objects as far forward as pos- sible in the luggage compartment Fig. 160.

Place the heavy objects first.

Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings* page 155.

Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or with non-elastic straps secured to the fas- tening* rings.

WARNING Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could cause serious injuries. Always stow objects in the luggage com- partment and secure them on the fastening rings*. During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injur- ing vehicle occupants or even third parties. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag. If this happens, objects may shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fa- tal injury. Always keep all objects in the luggage compartment and use appropriate grips to secure them, particularly in the case of heavy objects.

Never exceed the allowed axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If said weights are exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to acci- dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle. Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style ac- cordingly, to avoid accidents. Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- pecially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death. Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehi- cle. Please observe the notes on the page 62.

CAUTION Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the heated rear window and cause dam- age.

153

Operation

Note The tyre pressure must be adjusted ac- cording to the load. When necessary, check the tyre pressures on the adhesive label stuck to the back of the front left door frame page 321. Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compartment. Ensure that the ventilation slots are never covered. Straps for securing the load to the fas- tening rings* are commercially available from accessory shops.

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 161 In the boot: removing and installing the shelf.

Fig. 162 In the boot: removing and installing the shelf.

Removing Detach the cord loops Fig. 161 B from their hooks A . Remove the rear shelf from the side sup- ports Fig. 162 by pulling it upwards and then take it out.

Storing the rear shelf Depending on the equipment, once the lug- gage compartment shelf has been removed, it can be stored under the boot's variable floor page 155.

Remove the side cover sliding it upwards and place the shelf in the bottom. Replace the side cover.

To remove it proceed in reverse order.

Fitting Insert the cover horizontally so that the re- cess fits onto the axis of the supports Fig. 162 and press down until it engages. Hook the loops Fig. 161 B to the rear lid.

WARNING Do not place heavy or hard objects on the rear shelf, because they will endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden brak- ing.

CAUTION Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted. An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not cor- rectly seated and it may be bent or dam- aged. If the luggage compartment is overloa- ded, remove the tray.

Note Ensure that, when placing items of cloth- ing on the luggage compartment cover, rear visibility is not reduced.

154

Transport and practical equipment

Fastening rings*

Fig. 163 Location of fastening rings in luggage compartment.

There may be some fastening rings included in the luggage compartment for fastening luggage and other objects Fig. 163 (ar- rows).

Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the lug- gage compartment on page 153.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col- lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this ob- ject generates a force corresponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the object increases to approxi- mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries which might be sustained if this object strikes an occupant as it flies through the interior of the vehicle. This increased risk

of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappro- priate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the event of braking ma- noeuvres or accidents. Never secure a child seat on the fasten- ing rings.

Luggage compartment variable floor

Fig. 164 Variable boot floor: raised position; lowered position.

155

Operation

Fig. 165 Variable boot floor: tilted position.

Variable floor in high position Lift the floor using handle Fig. 164 1 and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . Move the floor forward over the supports as far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position Lift the floor using handle 1 and pull it back until the supports 2 have fully passed the front part of the floor. Now match the front part with the lower grooves of the supports and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and lower the floor at the same time with the han- dle 1 .

Variable floor in the tilted position When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

Lift the variable floor in the high position us- ing handle 1 , pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until the floor folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself. Rest the floor on its housings Fig. 165 (ar- rows).

WARNING During a sudden driving or braking ma- noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob- jects could be flung though the interior and cause serious or fatal injuries. Always secure objects, even when the luggage compartment floor is properly lif- ted. Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- ried between the rear seat and the raised luggage compartment floor. Only objects that do not weigh than ap- proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between the rear seat and the raised luggage com- partment floor.

CAUTION The maximum weight that can be loaded on the luggage compartment variable floor in the top position is 150 kg. Do not let the luggage compartment floor fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the luggage compartment could be damaged.

Note SEAT recommends the use of straps to se- cure objects to retaining rings.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in the roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof carrier system should be disassembled. When they are not used.

156

Transport and practical equipment

When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING When heavy or bulky loads are transported on the roof carrier system, car driving per- formance is affected, as the centre of grav- ity shifts and there is greater wind resist- ance. Always secure the load properly using belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition. Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen- tre of gravity and driving performance. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

CAUTION Remove the cross bars and the roof carri- er system before entering a car wash. Vehicle height is increased by the instal- lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system and the load secured on them. For this pur- pose, check that your vehicle's height does not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- ple, for underpasses or for entering garage doors.

Any cross bars, roof carrier systems or loads secured to them must not interfere with the roof aerial or block the path of the rear lid. On opening the rear lid make sure that it does not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environment When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Attach the cross bars and the roof carrier system

Fig. 166 Attachment points for the roof railings for the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of special roof carrier systems. For safety rea-

sons, special fixtures must be used to safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly. Always take the as- sembly instructions that come with the cross- bars and the roof carrier system in question into account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- ings. The distance between cross bars Fig. 166 A should be 75 cm and the dis- tance between the cross bars and the brack- ets of the roof railings B should be 5 cm.

WARNING Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- bars and the roof carrier system may cause the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries. Always take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account. Use only crossbars and the roof carrier system when they are in perfect condition and are properly secured. Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly. Check threaded joints and attachments travelling and if necessary tighten them af- ter you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threa- ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.

157

Operation

Always fit the special roof carrier sys- tems correctly for wheels, skis and surf- boards, etc. Do not modify or repair the crossbars or roof carrier system.

Note Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carri- er system carefully and keep them in the vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly in- stalled .

Maximum authorised roof load The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. This figure comes from the combined weight of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on the roof .

Always check the weight of the roof carrier system, the cross bars and the weight of the load to be transported and weigh them if necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you will not be

able to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load Distribute loads uniformly and secure them correctly .

Check attachments Once the cross bars and roof carrier system have been installed, check the bolted con- nections and attachments after a short jour- ney and subsequently with a certain frequen- cy.

WARNING Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load can result in accidents and considera- ble vehicle damage. Never exceed the maximum authorised load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- hicle's maximum authorised weight. Never exceed the load capacity of the cross bars and the roof carrier system, even if the maximum authorised roof load has not been reached. Secure heavy items as far forward as possible and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.

WARNING If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall from the roof carrier system or cause accidents and injuries. Always use belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition. Secure the load properly.

158

Air conditioning

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and cooling

General notes

Read the additional information carefully page 41

Pollution filter The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar- rier against impurities in the outside air, in- cluding dust and pollen.

For the climate control system to work with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must be replaced at the specified intervals in the Maintenance Programme.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas reaching very high pollution lev- els, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than stated in the Service Sched- ule.

WARNING Reduced visibility through the windows in- creases the risk of serious accidents. Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-

ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev- erything outside. The maximum heat output required to de- frost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Only drive when you have good visibility. Always ensure that you use the heating system, fresh air system, air conditioner and the heated rear window to maintain good visibility to the outside. Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

WARNING Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly re- sulting in a serious accident. Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.

CAUTION If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch it off with the A/C button

to prevent further damage and have it checked by a specialised workshop. Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- cialist knowledge and special tools. There- fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a specialised workshop.

Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak. Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not im- paired, and to prevent the windows from misting over. The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in the luggage compartment designed for this purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob- structing these slots with any kind of ob- ject. The air conditioner operates most effec- tively with the windows closed. However, if the temperature inside the vehicle is exces- sive because of the sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by opening the windows for a short time. Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air conditioning system leaves residue on the

159

Operation

evaporator, producing a permanent un- pleasant odour. At low outside temperatures, the com- pressor switches off automatically and cannot be switched on even with the AUTO button. It is advisable to turn on the air condition- ing at least once a month, to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consulted to check the system.

To ensure correct operation, the grilles on both sides of the screen must not be ob- structed. When the engine is under extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a moment.

Economic use of the air condition- ing

When the air conditioning is switched on, the compressor consumes engine power and has

influence on fuel consumption. Consider the following points in order to have the system operating in the minimum possible time.

If the vehicle interior has overheated due to an excessive solar radiation, it is best to open the windows or doors to allow the hot air to escape. While in motion, the air conditioning should not be switched on if the windows are open.

Air outlets

Fig. 167 Air vents.

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- lation in the vehicle interior, air vents Fig. 167 1 should remain open.

The outlets can be closed or opened sepa- rately using the slats and the air flow directed according to need.

There are other additional, non-adjustable air vents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell and in the rear area of the interior.

160

Air conditioning

Note Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- sitive objects should never be placed in front of the air outlets as they may be dam- aged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the air vents.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic, from entering the interior.

If the air distribution is in the thaw position, the recirculation flap will always be open (indica- tor light off).

If the air distribution is switched from any po- sition to the thaw position, recirculation will be automatically deactivated.

Connecting the recirculation In any air distribution position except thaw:

Press the button, the buttons lamp will light up, indicating that air recirculation inside the vehicle has been activated.

Disconnecting the recirculation In any air distribution position except thaw:

Press the button again and the button's lamp will go off, indicating that air entry from the outside has been activated.

In the thaw position the entry of air into the vehicle interior is always from the outside.

WARNING In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioner is switched off, the windows

can quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Note Activating air recirculation automatically activates the button (to prevent the win- dows from misting up). If the temperature regulator is turned to the coldest setting (blue point), the air recirculation function and the button are automatically acti- vated. If the function is not deactivated by pressing the button, it will deactivate after approximately 20 minutes.

161

Operation

Heating and fresh air

Controls

Fig. 168 Heating controls on the dash panel.

Temperature regulator page 162. Blower control. There are four speed set- tings for the blower. The blower should al- ways be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly. Air distribution regulator. Heated rear window.

Air distribution Control 3 for setting the flow of air in the re- quired direction.

Air distribution towards the windscreen in order to demist.

1

2

3

Air distribution to upper body.

Air distribution to footwell.

Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell.

WARNING For your safety, the windows should nev- er be fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is essential to ensure good visibili- ty. Please familiarise yourself with the cor- rect operation of the heating and ventila- tion system, including the demist/defrost functions for the windows.

Note Please consider the general notes page 159.

Functions

Ventilating the vehicle interior The desired temperature inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient tempera- ture.

Turn the temperature selector Fig. 168 1 anti-clockwise.

162

Air conditioning

Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels 1-4. Set the airflow to the desired direction using air distribution control 3 . Open the relevant air outlets.

Interior heating Maximum heat output, which is needed to de- frost the windows quickly, is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.

Turn the temperature selector Fig. 168 1 clockwise to select the re- quired temperature. Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels 1-4. Set the airflow to the desired direction using air distribution control 3 .

Open the relevant air outlets.

Defrosting the windscreen Turn the temperature regulator Fig. 168 1 clockwise to reach the maxi- mum temperature. Turn the blower switch 2 to level 4. Turn air distribution control to . Close the central outlets. Open and turn the side outlets towards the windows.

Keeping the windscreen and the side win- dows demisted Turn the temperature regulator Fig. 168 1 to the heating zone.

Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels 2-3. Turn air distribution control to . Close the central outlets. Open and turn the side outlets towards the windows.

Once the windows are demisted and as a preventive measure, the control 3 can be set in position greater comfort while prevent- ing the windows from misting again.

Note Remember that the temperature of the en- gine coolant should be optimum to ensure that the heating system functions correctly (except in vehicles fitted with additional heating*).

163

Operation

Manual air conditioning*

Controls

Fig. 169 Air conditioning controls on the dash pan- el.

Temperature selector page 164 Blower control. There are four speed set- tings for the blower. At low speed, it is rec- ommended to set the blower to a mini- mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh air. Air distribution regulator. Air recirculation button page 161. When the function is activated, a warning light on the button is turned on. Heated rear window. Button to switch on air conditioning page 164. The air conditioning system only works when the engine is running and the fan is switched on.

1

2

3

WARNING For your safety, the windows should never be fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the demist/defrost func- tions for the windows.

Note Please consider the general notes.

Functions

Interior heating Maximum heat output, which is needed to de- frost the windows quickly, is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.

Turn off the cooling system using the button Fig. 169 (the button light turns off). Turn the temperature regulator 1 to set the desired temperature inside the vehicle. Turn the blower switch to any of the settings 1-4.

164

Air conditioning

Set the air distribution regulator 3 to the air flow configuration desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest), (to- wards the footwell) and (towards the wind- screen and footwell).

Interior cooling When the air conditioning is switched on, the temperature and the air humidity go down. This way, if the outside humidity is extreme, the air conditioning prevents the misting of the windows and therefore, comfort is im- proved.

Turn on the cooling system using the button (the button light turns on). Turn the temperature control switch until the desired interior temperature is reached.

Turn the blower switch to any of the settings 1-4. Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration desired: (towards the wind- screen), (towards the chest), (towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and footwell).

Demisting the windscreen Turn air distribution to . Turn the fan control to one of the two levels depending on the speed required. Rotate the temperature control to the de- sired level of comfort. Close the central outlets.

Open and turn the side outlets towards the windows.

If the air conditioning does not work, this may be due to the following reasons:

The engine is stationary. The fan blower is switched off. The outside temperature is lower than +3C (+37F). The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched off because of an increased engine coolant temperature. The air conditioner fuse is faulty. Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a specialised work- shop.

165

Operation

Climatronic*

General notes

Fig. 170 Climatronic: controls.

Read the additional information carefully page 42

Climatronic automatically maintains a com- fortable temperature. To do so, it automati- cally regulates the supplied air temperature and the blower and air distribution levels. The system also allows for the effect of sunlight, so there is no need for manual adjustment.

Automatic operation guarantees maximum comfort any time of year page 167.

Climatronic description Cooling only works if the following conditions are met: The engine is running the outside temperature is above +2C (+36F); ignition.

Starting the Climatronic When a button is pressed, the corresponding function will be activated (except for the re- circulation button), switching on the air condi- tioning if it was switched off.

Switching off the Climatronic Adjust fan power to zero Fig. 170 2 or press the button.

In order to ensure engines subject to heavy loads are cooled, the air conditioning com- pressor is switched off in the event of high coolant temperatures.

Recommended setting for all seasons of the year Set the required temperature. We recom- mend +22C (+72F). Press the button Fig. 170.

166

Air conditioning

Adjust the vents so that the air flow is direc- ted slightly upwards.

Change between degrees Centigrade and degrees Fahrenheit The units of degrees can be changed via the Easy Connect system using the / but- ton and the function button SETTINGS > Units > Temperature.

Automatic mode Automatic mode is used to maintain a con- stant temperature and demist the windows inside the vehicle.

Set a interior temperature between +16C (+64F) and +29C (+84F). Adjust the vents so that the air flow is direc- ted slightly upwards. Press the button, AUTO is displayed on the screen.

Automatic mode is switched off by pressing the air distribution buttons or increasing or decreasing the blower speed. However, the temperature remains regulated.

Adjusting the temperature When you switch on the ignition, control 1 Fig. 170 can be used to set the required in- terior temperature.

It is possible to select interior temperatures from +16C (+64F) to +29C (+84F). In this range the temperature is regulated automati- cally. If a temperature below +16C (+64F) is selected, LO is displayed on the screen. If a temperature above +29C (+84F) is selec- ted, HI is displayed on the screen. At both extremes, Climatronic works at maximum cooling or heating power, respectively. The temperature is not regulated.

In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu- tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu- larly the footwells) and significant differences in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive people may catch cold.

Fan regulation Climatronic automatically regulates blower speed according to the interior temperature. It is possible, however, to set the blower speed to suit requirements.

Press the 2 buttons to increase or reduce fan speed.

Climatronic will switch off when the blower switches off.

Turn on windscreen defrost Press the button Fig. 170.

Switching off windscreen defrosting Press the button several times or press the button.

The temperature is regulated automatically. The air output from the vents Fig. 167 2 is increased.

WARNING Read and observe the safety warnings in General notes on page 159.

Note A visit to the specialised service once a year is recommended to clean the Clima- tronic system. The interior temperature sensor is at the bottom. Do not cover it with stickers or the like, as this could have a negative effect on Climatronic operations.

167

Infotainment System

Infotainment System

Introduction Infotainment system safety in- structions

Travelling on today's roads requires the driv- er's full attention at all times.

Only operate the radio and its various func- tions when the traffic situation really permits this.

WARNING Before starting the trip, you should famili- arise yourself with the different radio func- tions. High audio volume may represent a dan- ger to you and to others. Adjust the volume in a way that you can distinguish surrounding noise, for example, horns and sirens, etc. Changes to the Infotainment system set- tings should be made when the car is stop- ped, or by a passenger.

WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Operat-

ing the Infotainment system can distract your attention from the traffic. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow you to easily hear signals from outside the vehicle at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens and horns). Hearing may be impaired if using too high a volume setting, even if only for short peri- ods of time.

WARNING The volume level may suddenly change when you switch audio source or connect a new audio source. Lower the base volume before connect- ing or switching audio sources.

WARNING The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the navigation system may differ from the current traffic situation. Traffic signs and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and dis- plays provided by the navigation system. Adjust your vehicle speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

WARNING Connecting, inserting or removing a data medium while driving can distract your at- tention from the traffic and cause an acci- dent.

WARNING Connecting leads for external devices may obstruct the driver. Arrange the connecting leads so that they do not obstruct the driver.

WARNING External devices that are loose or not prop- erly secured could move around the pas- senger compartment during a sudden driv- ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident and cause damage or injury. Never place or fit external devices to the doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or near the area marked AIRBAG or between these areas and the occupants. External devices can cause serious injury in an acci- dent, especially when the airbags inflate.

WARNING The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause an acci- dent and severe injuries.

168

Introduction

Always keep the armrest closed while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING Opening a CD player's housing can lead to injuries from invisible laser radiation. Have CD players repaired only by a qualified workshop.

CAUTION The Infotainment system can be damaged by the incorrect insertion of a data storage device or the insertion of an incompatible data storage device. When inserting a data storage device, make sure it is correctly positioned page 189. Applying force may irreparably damage the memory card slot locking mechanism. Only use compatible memory cards. When inserting and removing CDs, al- ways hold them at right angles to the front of the CD drive without tilting so as not to scratch them. If a CD is inserted while another is al- ready in the unit or being ejected, the CD drive may be irreparably damaged. Always wait until the data medium is completely ejected.

CAUTION Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage device and non-round media may damage the CD player. Only clean, standard 12-cm CDs should be used. Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel off and damage the drive.

Do not use printable data media. Prin- ted labels and coverings may peel off and damage the CD drive.

Do not insert 8-cm single CDs or ir- regularly shaped CDs.

Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker than normal CDs.

CAUTION The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam- aged if the volume is too high or the sound is distorted.

Note For the proper functioning of the Infotain- ment system it is important that the date and time set in the vehicle are correct.

169

Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media System Touch and Media System Colour

Fig. 171 Overview of the controls (this configura- tion depends on the version).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency page 188 Touchscreen page 173 Vehicle settings page 34, page 206 Media mode (audio sources) page 189

1

2

3

4

Phone Mode page 206 Full Link page 177 Selecting the main menu page 172 Volume. Off/on page 172 Slot for memory cards page 192 Settings button (search and selection) page 172

5

6

7

8

9

10

170

Introduction

Media System Plus / Navi System

Fig. 172 Overview of the controls (this configura- tion depends on the version).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency page 188 Touchscreen page 173 Navigation Mode page 196 Media mode (audio sources) page 189 Full Link page 177 Volume. Off/on page 172 Settings button (search and selection) page 172

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Phone Mode page 206 Vehicle settings page 34, page 206 Voice control Proximity sensor page 176 Selecting the main menu page 172

8

9

10

11

12

171

Infotainment System

General instructions for use

Introduction

Fig. 173 Related video

If the setup is changed, this may change the display on the screen and in some cases, the Infotainment system may behave in a manner different to that described in this manual.

Note Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly pressing the touchscreen is sufficient to operate the Infotainment system. Not all listed function buttons and func- tions described may be available due to the device software used in your market. The equipment is not faulty if a function button is missing from the screen. Due to country-specific legislation, cer- tain functions may not be available on the screen when the vehicle is travelling above a certain speed. Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle may cause noise from the vehicle loud- speakers.

Restrictions on the use of devices using Bluetooth technology may apply in some countries. For further information, contact the local authorities. On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol- ume of the audio source is automatically lowered when reverse gear is selected. The volume can be lowered in the menu Sound > Volume.

Diagram of the menus

The Infotainment system touchscreen can be used to select the different main menus.

Press the infotainment button Fig. 171 7 , or button Fig. 172 12 to open the menu summary.

The display of the touchscreen's main menu can be switched between grid and carou- sel via the Settings/System > Display menu.

Infotainment rotary/push knobs

Rotary/push knobs The left-hand rotary knob is the volume control or the on/off button.

The right-hand rotary knob is the setup but- ton.

Infotainment buttons The buttons on the unit are shown in this manual with the word infotainment button and their function within a rectangle, for ex- ample, the infotainment button .

The Infotainment buttons are used by press- ing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

To manually switch the Infotainment system on and off, briefly press the rotary knob Fig. 171 8 , Fig. 172 6 .

When switching on, the system starts-up with the last set volume, provided that this does not exceed the preset maximum start-up vol- ume. Select Sound > Volume.

The unit will switch off automatically when the key is removed from the ignition or when the on/off button is pressed (depending on the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In- fotainment system is switched on again, it will switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note The Infotainment system is a part of the vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi- cle.

172

Introduction

If the battery has been disconnected, the ignition must be activated before switching on the Infotainment system.

Changing the basic volume

Increasing or decreasing the volume or muting the sound Raise the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel upward .

Lower the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel downward .

Changes in volume are indicated by a vol- ume bar on the screen. The volume can be controlled using the steering wheel controls. In this case, the changes in volume are dis- played on the instrument panel by a volume bar.

It is possible to preset certain volume settings and adjustments. Select Menu > Sound > Volume.

Muting the Infotainment system sound Turn the volume control anti-clockwise until it displays .

Muting the Infotainment system sound stops the media source that is playing The screen displays .

Note If the base volume has been considerably increased to play a certain audio source, lower the volume again before switching to another audio source.

Handling the function buttons and display instructions

Fig. 174 View of some of the function buttons on the screen.

Fig. 175 Sound setup menu

The Infotainment system comes equipped with a touchscreen.

Active areas of the screen that call up a cer- tain function are called function buttons. These buttons are operated by briefly press- ing the screen or by pressing and holding.

The function buttons appear in the instruc- tions with the label function button and a button symbol inside a rectangle .

Function buttons start functions or open sub- menus. The currently selected menu is dis- played in the title bar Fig. 174 A of the submenus.

Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se- lected.

Increase or decrease the size of the im- ages displayed on the screen The size of the navigation map image page 196 and, for example, photos when

173

Infotainment System

viewing images page 189 can be en- larged or reduced. To do so, enlarge or re- duce the image displayed by moving two fin- gers.

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operation and effect

A The title bar shows the selected menu and, where applicable, other function buttons.

B Press it to open another menu.

C

The scroll bar is shown on the right and its size depends on the entries in the list. Move the bar on the screen by pressing lightly and without lifting the finger, see page 174, Opening list entries and searching in lists.

D

Movable cursor: Move the cursor around the screen by pressing lightly and without lifting the finger.

OR: To move the cursor to a particular po- sition, press that spot on the screen.

Fixed crosshair: Press the up, down, left and right arrows to move the sound ac- cording to preference. The cursor D will move.

OR: Press the central button to centre the stereo sound in the centre of the passen- ger compartment

Display and function buttons: operation and effect

Press it on some lists to move up a level, one by one.

BACK

Press to return from the submenus one at a time to the main menu or to undo the entries made.

When pressed, a pop-up window opens (options window) which displays other setup options.

/

Some functions or messages are accom- panied by a check box and are activated or deactivated by pressing said check box.

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

Press to close a pop-up window or an in- put window.

/ Press them to change the setup adjust- ments one at a time.

Move the slider around the screen by pressing it lightly and without lifting your finger.

Opening list entries and searching in lists

Fig. 176 Entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated by pressing them on the screen directly or by us- ing the adjustment button Fig. 171 10 , Fig. 172 7 .

Mark list entries using the setup button and open them Turn the setup button to mark the entries on the list with a rectangle one by one and con- tinue searching the list in this manner. Press the setup button to activate the marked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen) The scroll bar is shown on the right and its size depends on the entries in the list Fig. 176 1 .

174

Introduction

Briefly press the screen above or below the scroll marker. OR: Place a finger over the scroll marker and without lifting it, move it around the screen. Lift your finger off the screen when you reach the desired position. OR: Place your finger in the centre of the screen and without lifting it, move it around the screen. Lift your finger off the screen when you reach the desired position.

Input masks with on-screen keypad

Fig. 177 Input window with on-screen keypad.

Input windows with on-screen keypad are used for functions such as entering an entry name, selecting a destination address or en- tering a search term for searching long lists.

The function buttons listed below are not available in all countries or for all topics.

Subsequent chapters only explain those functions that differ from those in the screen shown in the figure.

The input line with cursor is located in the top bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed here.

Input windows for free text input In the input masks for open text, you may en- ter letters, numbers and special characters in any combination.

Input windows for selecting a saved entry (e.g. selection of a destination address) It is only possible to select a sequence of let- ters, numbers and special characters that matches a stored entry.

Suggestions for matching destinations ap- pear depending on the characters entered in the input line Fig. 177 4 . In the case of compound names, it is necessary to enter a space.

If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries, the number of remaining entries is displayed after the input line 3 . Pressing this function button displays these remaining entries in a list.

Overview of the function buttons

Function icon and text: operation and ef- fect

Letters and dig- its

Press them to copy them into the input line.

1

Press to change the keypad to another language. Keypad languages can be se- lected from the menu System set- tings > Language.

2 Press to show symbols on the keypad.

3 Displays the number and opens the list of remaining selectable entries that match the entered text.

4 Scroll bar, the size of which depends on the number of matching entries.

5

Hold and press to display a pop-up win- dow with the special characters based on said letter. Press the desired character to enter it. Some special characters can be written out instead (e.g. AE for ).

Press to enter a space.

Press to delete characters in the input line from right to left.

Press and hold to delete several charac- ters.

BACK

Press to close the input window.

175

Infotainment System

Proximity sensors 3 Valid for: Media System Plus/Navi System

The Infotainment system is equipped with an integrated proximity sensor Fig. 172 11 .

The image on the screen changes from dis- play mode to automatic operation when your hand moves toward it. In operation mode, the function buttons are automatically highligh- ted to facilitate their use.

Additional information and display options

The displays appearing on the screen may vary depending on the settings, and may dif- fer from those described here.

The status bar on the screen can display, for example, the current time and outside tem- perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com- pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 178 Initial configuration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help you to set up your Infotainment system the first time you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainment system, the initial setup screen will appear Fig. 178 if any parameters have not been set or if the NEVER function button has not been pressed.

Function button: function

CLOSE

Closes the Configuration Wizard, and the main menu or last mode in which you used the Infotainment system will appear. The next time you switch on the system, the Configuration Wizard will start up again.

Function button: function

NEVER

Disables the possibility of changing the settings of the Infotainment sys- tem. If you want to perform the initial system setup, you must enter via Sys- tem setup and select Configura- tion Wizard.

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

A

Press to configure the time and date (if it has a navigation system it will be configured automatically with the GPS).

B

Press to search and store to memory the radio stations that have the best reception at that moment on all avail- able bands (AM, FM and DAB).

C Press to link your mobile telephone to the Infotainment system.

D a) Press to select your home address us- ing your current position or by man- ually entering an address.

PREVIOUS NEXT

To go to the previous or next parameter to set. When a parameter has been set, the only way to reset it is from the main menu, clicking on it, and not using the Previous/Next buttons. When setting any parameter, a confir- mation mark will appear on it .

176

Connectivity

Function button: function

FINISH

Once one or more settings have been applied, click on this in the main menu of the wizard to confirm and finalize the settings. If there are any parameters you have not set, the next time you connect the Infotainment system, the Initial Config- uration Wizard will start up.

a) Only valid for Navi System.

Connectivity Data transfer

This communication can allow data to be read and/or written.

From the SETTINGS menu > Data transfer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to acti- vate/deactivate the function and a dropdown menu called Operation via apps which controls the level of interaction between the apps and the system.

Full Link*

Full Link technology description

Fig. 179 Related video

The Full Link system provides a way of bring- ing together technologies that allow commu- nication between the Infotainment System and mobile devices:

MirrorLink

Android Auto Apple CarPlay

Interfaces To access the Full Link system, press the info- tainment button / or press the infotain- ment button / and then press Full Link .

The connection to Full Link is made through a USB interface.

WARNING If a mobile terminal is not secured or is in- correctly secured in the vehicle, it could move around the passenger compartment in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre, emergency stop or accident, resulting in in- jury. While driving, mobile terminals must be securely fastened in position, outside the airbag deployment zones, or safely stowed away.

WARNING Any applications that are not suitable or execute incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. SEAT recommends the use of the Apps that SEAT provides for this vehicle. To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must activate the option , Settings/System > Data transfer for SEAT apps.

177

Infotainment System

The interaction level of the Apps on the system must be: ALLOW. Protect the mobile terminal with its appli- cations from improper use. Never make modifications to the applica- tions. Consult the instruction manual for the mobile terminal.

WARNING The use of applications while driving can distract your attention from the traffic. Dis- tracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile terminals is forbidden, the mobile terminal must be switched off at all times. The radiation produced by the mobile terminal when switched on may in- terfere with sensitive technical and medi- cal equipment, possibly resulting in mal- function or damage to the equipment. SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam- age caused to the vehicle as a result of the use of applications that are of poor quality or are defective, the inadequate program- ming of the applications, the insufficient coverage of the network, the loss of data

during transmission or the improper use of mobile terminals.

Note Use of Full Link technology may result in high consumption of your 3G/4G data plan. SEAT recommends having a high battery charge on the device when connected to Full Link. SEAT recommends that to use Full Link, the Date and time should be correctly configured. Select Menu > Settings/Sys tem > Date and Time. SEAT applications are designed to com- municate with the vehicle and interact with it via the Full Link connection, therefore its functionality is linked to the mobile device being connected via USB. You can find further information on the technical requirements, compatible devi- ces, suitable applications and availability at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 180 Message on Infotainment system screen.

To unblock this feature, you must obtain the accessory from your SEAT dealer. Otherwise, a message like this will appear on the screen whenever you select the feature Fig. 180.

178

Connectivity

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 181 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not have Full Link in your vehicle you can acquire it as an accessory at your Authorised Serv- ice. Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror- Link, Android Auto or Apple CarPlay

1

2

websites to confirm whether your phone is compatible with the system. Mirror Link Check smartphone compatibility:

www.mirrorlink.com/phones MirrorLink 1.1 or higher Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de- vice.

Android Auto Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto: www.android.com/auto/ Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher Install Android Auto app Apple CarPlay Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay:www.apple.com/ios/carplay iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone: use the USB cable approved and sup- plied by the phone's official distributor.

3

179

Infotainment System

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 182 Full Link Setup

Fig. 183 Full Link menu

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not necessary to establish the connection be- tween the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces- sary to enable all of the app features1).

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

Switch on the Infotainment system Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's USB port using a USB cable page 212. In the main menu for the Full Link setup, se- lect Activate data transfer for SEAT apps Fig. 182:

Finally, a message will appear stating that data transfer will commence when the device is connected. Please note that data is trans- ferred over connections between your vehi- cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec- ted, the technology compatible with your de- vice can be used.

Note Depending on your smartphone, it may have to be unlocked for the connection to occur.

What should I do if it does not con- nect?

Restart the mobile device

Check the USB cable visually. Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Check that both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam- aged or worn.

Visually check that the USB ports are properly con- nected. Check that the ve- hicle and device USB connections are not damaged and/or worn.

Clean the USB ports (device and vehicle).

Try another compatible mo- bile device.

Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT Authorised Service.

Have the mobile device re- paired or replace it.

Try another compatible mobile device.

1) Using the data connection to transfer the smartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi- tional charges. Please check the charges with your operator.

180

Connectivity

Pairing of portable devices sup- porting the MirrorLink, Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay technologies

Fig. 184 Full Link menu

Carousel When you enter the Full Link context for the first time, the technologies available for pair- ing the portable device are displayed.

Once the device connects via USB, the sys- tem will offer you the technologies available for establishing a connection with your mo- bile phone.

In the event of simultaneous connections be- tween two devices with different operating

systems, a choice will be presented for which one to make the connection with Fig. 184.

View of the device list iPhone devices only support Apple Car- Play.

There are some Android devices that support MirrorLink and Android Auto.

Bear in mind that once the device is connec- ted it will not be available as an audio source.

Full Link setup

Function button: function

Activating data transfers for SEAT applications : allows the exchange of information between the vehicle and applications authorised by SEAT.

Last Mode If a session using one technology ends with- out the disconnection being made from the Infotainment system (simply by disconnect- ing the cable) then when the device is next connected to it, the session will start without the user being required to take any action1).

Information Consult the mobile device manual.

Depends on each technology:

Availability in a country Third party applications

For further information:

MirrorLink: www.mirrorlink.com

Apple CarPlay: www.apple.com/ios/carplay

Android Auto: www.android.com/auto

Note In order to use Android Auto technology it is necessary to download the Android Auto application, located on Google Play. Only compatible applications can be used, in accordance with the technology connected.

1. 2.

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be un- locked in order to establish the connection.

181

Infotainment System

MirrorLink

Fig. 185 Function buttons in the general view of compatible applications.

Fig. 186 Other MirrorLink function buttons.

MirrorLink is a protocol which enables com- munication between a portable device and the Infotainment system via USB.

Using it makes it possible to display and man- age the content and functions displayed on

the portable device on the Infotainment sys- tem screen.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving, only specially adapted applications can be used in Full Link technology descrip- tion on page 177.

Requirements In order to use MirrorLink, the following re- quirements must be met:

The mobile device must be compatible with MirrorLink. The mobile device must be connected to the Infotainment system via USB. Depending on the mobile device used, a suitable application must be installed for the use of MirrorLink on the device.

Initiating the connection In order to initiate the connection with the mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB connection. A pop-up screen will appear, which will re- quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages

Function button: function

Full Link To return to the Full Link main menu.

Function button: function

CLOSE APPS Press to close the open apps. Then press the apps to be closed or the Close all function button to close all the open applications.

1 : 1 Press to change to the mobile de- vice screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

Fig. 186 1 Press to return to the MirrorLink

main menu.

Fig. 186 2 Press to display all the function buttons in the lower or upper right-hand margin of the screen.

Fig. 186 / Allows buttons 1 and 2 to be

hidden or shown. Fig. 172 12

MirrorLink setup

Function button: function

Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows : Allows Mirror- Link pop-up windows in applications that support it.

182

Connectivity

Apple CarPlay* 3 Valid for compatible iPhone mobile tele- phones. Also, iPhone mobile telephones only support Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay is a protocol which enables communication between a mobile telephone and the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operate the mobile telephone on the Infotainment system screen.

Requirements In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following requirements must be met:

Make sure that you do not have Apple CarPlay restricted on your device, at: Set- tings > General > Restrictions > CarPlay > ON. The mobile device must be compatible with Apple CarPlay. The mobile device must be connected to the Infotainment system via USB.

Initiating the connection In order to initiate the connection with the mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB connection.

A pop-up screen will appear, which will re- quest that you accept the device.

If you start the session using Apple CarPlay technology, it will not be possible to pair another device via Bluetooth. The fol- lowing message will appear in the main Phone menu:

Please disconnect Apple CarPlay first, before you can connect an- other mobile telephone.

Holding down the button will start the Apple voice engine.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- ment system, press the SEAT icon.

Android Auto* 3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.

Android Auto is a protocol which enables communication between a portable device and the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operate the mobile telephone on the Infotainment system screen.

Requirements In order to use Android Auto, the following requirements must be met:

The mobile device must be compatible with Android Auto.

The mobile device must be connected to the Infotainment system via USB. The Android Auto application should al- ready be downloaded and installed on the mobile device.

Initiating the connection In order to initiate the connection with the mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB connection, and to be sure to follow the in- structions of the device being paired.

The first connection to Android Auto must be done while the vehicle is stationary. Once the first pop-up window about ac- cepting data transfer between the car and the device has been accepted, a message will appear requesting that you check your mobile device for the confirmations needed to pair it with the Infotainment system. If you are initiating the session using Android Auto technology via USB, the mo- bile telephone connects automatically via Bluetooth to the Infotainment system tele- phone and it will not be possible to pair an- other mobile telephone via Bluetooth.

Holding down the button will start the Android voice engine.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- ment system, press the Return to SEAT button.

183

Infotainment System

Note Some mobile devices require a change in the USB connection mode in order to use Android Auto. Make sure that your mobile is in Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) mode before it is connected by USB to the Infotainment sys- tem.

Note Android Auto requires the use of Google services, as well as certain basic applica- tions of the Android system. Make sure that you always have Google services updated in order to use this tech- nology.

Frequently asked questions about Full Link

What is the connection method? USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? No. The USB cable supplied with the device should be used.

Is there a navigation option? Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link technologies if the technology is available in your country and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Link system navigator (via telephone) instead of an- other navigator? Advantages: Daily updates. Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages? With certified apps, such as SEAT ConnectApp, you can answer but not send voice messages.

What apps are visible while driving? Depending on the technology: for MirrorLink: SEAT-certified apps and CCC, for Android Auto: Apps selected by Google, for Apple CarPlay: Apps selected by Apple.

Where can I find compatible apps? Compatible apps can be found on the following links: www.mirrorlink.com/ www.android.com/auto/ www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

Where can I download apps? On Google Play for Android Auto/MirrorLink and on Apple Store for Apple CarPlay.

If Full Link stops working, where can I have it re- paired? If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal- er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should see your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified? This depends on the technology.

Is MirrorLink available in my country? Yes, MirrorLink is available in all the countries and regions where SEAT operates.

What are the differences between MirrorLink, Android Auto and Apple CarPlay? MirrorLink is not compatible with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay, as they are different technologies. They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto is designed for mobile devices with the Android oper- ating system, and Apple CarPlay for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink be installed in a previous SEAT model? No, this is not possible.

Where can I find more information about Full Link? If you have any questions, please see our Innova- tion/Connectivity sections on our website: www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re- sponde@seat.es

184

Connectivity

SEAT Media Control*

Introduction 3 Not available for model: Media System Touch / Colour

Fig. 187 Related video

The SEAT Media Control1) app can be used to remotely operate some partial functions in Radio mode, Media mode and Navigation mode. Information can be exchanged be- tween a device and the Infotainment System.

Each one of the functions is operated by means of a Tablet or partially by means of a mobile phone.

Operating requirements: A tablet or mobile phone. The app must be available on the corre- sponding device. There must be a WLAN connection between the Infotainment System and the device. Se- lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN >

Share connection via WLAN > Configu- ration.

Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti- vated:

From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans- fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to activate/deactivate the function and a drop- down menu called Operation via apps which controls the level of interaction be- tween the apps and the system. Select Menu > Settings/System > Transfer data from mobile devices.

You can obtain information about technical requirements on the SEAT website or at SEAT dealerships.

Telephone functions are not part of the func- tions of this app.

Data transmission and control functions

Fig. 188 SEAT Media Control Main menu

The Infotainment System can be operated from other seats in the vehicle as follows, with the help of SEAT Media Control:

Radio remote control. Multimedia playback remote control.

The following information can be exchanged between a device and the Infotainment Sys- tem, depending on the country and the equipment:

Navigation destinations. Traffic information. Social media contents. Audio transmission.

1) Availability depends on the country. 185

Infotainment System

Vehicle data. Location-specific information, for example, POIs.

WLAN access point*

Introduction 3 Not available for model: Media System Touch / Colour

The Infotainment System can be used to share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi- ces page 186, Setting up WLAN connec- tion sharing.

The Infotainment System can also use the WLAN hotspot of an external wireless device to provide Internet to the devices connected to the hotspot (WLAN client) page 187, Setting up Internet access.

Note Data transmission may incur charges. Due to the high volume of data exchanged, SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate mobile phone deal for data transmission. Mobile phone operators can provide the relevant information.

The exchange of data packages over the internet may generate additional costs, de- pending on your mobile phone rate, partic- ularly if you are abroad (for example, roaming rates).

Setting up WLAN connection shar- ing

The Infotainment System can be used to share a WLAN connection with 8 wireless de- vices.

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Press the Infotainment button and then press the Settings / System menu. Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the Infotainment System. To do so, press the WLAN function button. Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the wireless device that is to be connected. If necessary, refer to the manufacturers in- struction manual. Activate the mobile device assignment on the Infotainment System. To do so, press the Enable WLAN connection button and activate

the checkbox.

Enter and confirm the network key dis- played on the wireless device.

The following settings can also be made on the menu Share connection:

WPA2 encryption automatical- ly generates a network key.

Network key automatically gen- erated. Press the function button to manually change the network key. The network key must have a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63.

WLAN Network name (maximum of 32 characters).

Activate the checkbox to deactivate the visibility of the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the wire- less device.

Repeat this process to connect other wireless devices.

Security level:

Network key:

SSID:

Do not send network name (SSID):

186

Connectivity

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)1)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create a ciphered local wireless network quickly and simply.

Establish the connection with the wireless network (WLAN) page 195. Press the WPS button on the WLAN router2)

until the warning light on the router starts flashing. OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router starts flashing. Press the WPS button on the WLAN device. The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed.

Repeat this process to connect other wireless devices.

Setting up Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLAN hotspot of an external wireless device to es- tablish an internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Activate and check the wireless hotspot on the external device. If necessary, refer to the manufacturers instruction manual. Press the Infotainment button and then press the Settings menu; OR access Media or SEAT Media Control mode and press the SET-

TINGS menu. Press the WLAN menu and then enter Inter- net access settings on your phone and acti- vate the checkbox. Press the Find function button and select the wireless device you want from the list. If necessary, enter the network key of the wireless device in the Infotainment System and confirm with OK.

To manually enter the net- work settings of an external wireless (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the wire- less device.

Manual settings:

Note Due to the large number of different wire- less devices in existence, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions.

1) This function depends on the equipment and the country in question. 2) If the WLAN router does not support WPS the network must be configured manually.

187

Infotainment System

Operating modes

Radio

Related video

Fig. 189 Radio mode

Radio main menu

Fig. 190 Radio main menu.

Fig. 191 Radio mode: station list (FM).

Press the infotainment button / Fig. 171 1 , Fig. 172 1 to open the Ra- dio main menu Fig. 190.

Radio main menu function buttons

Function button: function

1 To change the group of memory but- tons slide a finger over the memory buttons from left to right or vice-versa

BAND Allows you to select the frequency band.

STATION LIST

Opens the list of currently receivable radio from the active frequency band.

MANUAL Allows you to select the frequency manually.

VIEW Allows you to select the information shown on the screen. Only available in DAB mode.

Function button: function

SETTINGS Opens the setup menu of the active frequency band (FM, AM or DAB).

/

Selects the previous or next stored sta- tion or of the station list. This setting can be changed in the Radio settings menu (FM, AM, DAB).

1 to 18 Memory buttons page 189.

SCAN Stops the scan function (only visible when the function is under way). It can be activated in the settings menu (FM, AM and DAB).

Information and possible icons

Display: Meaning

A

View the frequency or the name of the station and, where applicable, the radio text. The name of the radio station and the radio text will only be displayed if equipped with RDS and if it is active.

RDS Off

The RDS radio data service is deactiva- ted.

TP Traffic information can be retrieved: se- lect Radio > Settings > Traffic station.

No stations with traffic news are availa- ble.

The radio station is stored on a memory button.

188

Operating modes

Display: Meaning

AF off The tracking of alternative frequencies is disabled.

Note The availability of AM and DAB bands de- pends on the country and/or equipment. In the event that the AM and DAB bands are not available, the BAND function button text will not be shown. Bear in mind that being underground, in tunnels, in areas with tall buildings or mountains can interfere with radio signals. Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehi- cles with a window aerial.

Memory buttons

Fig. 192 Radio main menu.

In the Radio main menu, you can store sta- tions from all available frequency wave- lengths on the numbered function buttons. These function buttons are called memory buttons.

Functions of the memory buttons

Selecting the station from the memory buttons

Press the memory button corre- sponding to the desired station.

The stored stations can only be played by pressing the corre- sponding memory button provided it can be received at your current location.

Change mem- ory bank

Move your finger over the screen from left to right or vice-versa.

OR: Press one of the function but- tons Fig. 192 A

The memory buttons are displayed in three memory banks.

Storing the station on the memory but- tons

Keep and hold the desired memory button until an audible signal is heard, the station will be stored on this memory button. You can also store a station from a station list.

Functions of the memory buttons

Storing the station logo on the memory buttons

A station logo can be assigned to the stations stored on the memory buttons. A logo is automatically assigned from the database if the Advanced radio settings option is enableda). A logo can also be assigned man- ually from an external data source (USB/SD card).

a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour model.

Media

Introduction

Fig. 193 Related video

Media sources are audio sources contain- ing audio files on various different data stor- age devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external MP3 player). These audio files can be played

189

Infotainment System

by the Infotainment system via their corre- sponding drives or audio input sockets (inter- nal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN multi- media socket etc.).

Copyright Audio and video files on data storage devices are usually protected by intellectual property rights, as per the corresponding national and international laws. Be aware of the current le- gal provisions!

Note Do not use memory card adapters. SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio- ration or loss of files on data storage devi- ces.

Media main menu

Fig. 194 Media main menu.

Using the Media main menu, different media sources can be selected and played.

Press the infotainment button / Fig. 171 4 , Fig. 172 4 to open the Me- dia main menu Fig. 194.

It will continue playing the last media source selected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicated on the dropdown list when pressing the SOURCE function button Fig. 194.

If there is no available media source, the Me- dia main menu is displayed.

Function buttons of the main Media menu

Function button: function

SOURCE

Indicates the media source being played. Press to select another media source page 191.

CD : Internal CD drive page 192.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memory card page 192.

USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data storage device connected to the USB port page 193.

AUX : External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multimedia socket page 193.

BT AUDIO : Bluetooth audio page 194.

SELEC- TION

Opens the track list. Depending on the level, track list, folders or source.

/ Changes track in Media mode or fast forward/rewind Fig. 194.

Playback stops. The function button changes to .

Playback is resumed. The function button changes to .

SET- TINGS Opens the Media Settings menu.

190

Operating modes

Function button: function

REPEAT

Repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are on the same memory level as the track being played at that moment. If in the Media Settings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the subfold- ers.

REPEAT

The current track will be repeated.

MIX

Random play.

Includes all the tracks that are on the same memory level as the track being played at that moment. If in the Media Settings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the subfold- ers.

Messages and symbols on the Media main menu

Display: Meaning

A

Displays information about the artist name, album name and song title (CD text , ID3 tag on compressed audio files).

Audio CD: displays track information. If no data is available, it only displays Track and the number corresponding to the position it occupies on the data stor- age device.

B

Album cover display: If there are various covers within the same folder/album, the system only displays one of them. It prioritizes displaying the covers in the following manner: 1. Cover embedded in the file(s). 2. Image in file folder. 3. Default icon of the connected device.

C

The playing time so far and time remain- ing in minutes and seconds. In the case of audio files with variable bit rates (VBR) the remaining time may vary.

TPa) The TP function is active and can be used: select Radio > Settings > Traffic programme (TP).

a) There are no traffic stations available: select Radio > Settings > Traf- fic programme (TP).

a) Depends on the market and unit in question.

Note When the media source is inserted, play- ing will not start automatically; it is neces- sary for the user to select the source. Nor will the media source change when it is ejected.

Changing the Media source

Fig. 195 MEDIA mode: change media source.

From the Media main menu, press the / Fig. 171 4 , Fig. 172 4 Info-

tainment button repeatedly to cycle through the available media sources. OR: From the Media main menu, press the SOURCE function button Fig. 195 and se-

lect the desired media source.

In the pop-up window, the Media sources not selected are shown as deactivated (in grey).

191

Infotainment System

When a Media source that has already been played is selected again, playback is re- sumed from the point at which it was stop- ped.

Optional Media playback sources

Function button: media source

CD Internal CD drive page 192.

SD CARD 1 SD memory card page 192.

SD CARD 2 *

USB 1 External data storage device con- nected to the USB port page 193.USB 2 *

AUX External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multimedia socket page 193.

BT AUDIO Bluetooth audio page 194.

WLAN *a) External audio source connected by WLAN page 195

a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour model.

Note The Media source can be changed in the Track list view: select Media > View.

Insert or eject a CD 3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi System

Fig. 196 Slots for data storage devices in the glove compartment.

The driver should refrain from operating the unit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert or change the data storage device before mov- ing off!

The CD drive can play audio CDs and audio data CDs.

Inserting a CD Hold the CD with the printed side facing up. Push the CD into the slot Fig. 196 3 to the point where it is drawn in automatically.

Ejecting a CD Press button 1 .

The CD in the drive will be ejected and must be removed within approximately 10 seconds.

Insert or eject a memory card

Depending on the features and the country, the vehicle may have one or two slots for SD cards.

Inserting a memory card Insert the compatible memory card, bevelled edge first and with the label face up (con- tacts face down), into slot Fig. 196 2 , until properly inserted.

If a memory card cannot be inserted, make sure it is positioned correctly and is compati- ble with the unit.

Removing a memory card The inserted memory cards must be pre- pared for removal.

From the main Media menu, press the SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- tings menu or press the infotainment button / Fig. 171 7 , Fig. 172 12 and

then press Settings / System , to open menu System settings. Press the Remove safely function button. A dropdown menu appears with the following options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and

192

Operating modes

USB2*. After correctly ejecting the memory card from the system, the function button be- comes inactive (grey colour). Press the inserted memory card. The mem- ory card jumps to the eject position. Remove the memory card.

Unreadable memory card If a memory card is inserted and the data cannot be read, the relevant warning ap- pears.

External data storage device con- nected to the USB port

Depending on the features and the country, the vehicle may have one or two USB con- nections page 212.

Audio files on an external data storage device connected to the USB port can be played and controlled via the Infotainment system.

Where this manual refers to external data storage devices, this means USB mass stor- age devices containing supported audio files, such as MP3 players, iPods and USB sticks.

Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored.

Instructions and restrictions Compatibility with Apple devices and other media players depends on the unit.

The USB port supplies the usual USB volt- age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

External hard disks with a capacity greater than 32 GB must be reformatted for the FAT32 file system in some circumstances. You will find the necessary software and information on the Internet.

Take into account all other instructions and limitations regarding requirements for media sources.

Disconnecting Any connected data storage devices must be prepared before their disconnection in or- der to remove them.

From the main Media menu, press the SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- tings menu or press the infotainment button / Fig. 171 7 , Fig. 172 12 and

then press Settings / System , to open menu System settings. Press the Remove safely function button. A dropdown menu appears with the following options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and USB2*. After correctly ejecting the data stor- age device from the system, the function but- ton becomes inactive (grey colour).

Now the data storage device can be dis- connected.

Note Do not connect an external media player at the same time to play music via Blue- tooth and via the USB port with the In- fotainment system, as this could cause playback limitations. If the external player is an Apple device, it cannot be simultaneously connected by USB and by Bluetooth. If a connected device is not recognised, disconnect all the connected devices and try connecting the device again. Do not use memory card adaptors, USB extension cords or USB hubs!

External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multimedia socket

Depending on the equipment and country there may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket page 212.

The connected external audio source is played over the vehicle speakers and cannot be controlled via the Infotainment system controls.

The connection of an external audio source is indicated by AUX on the screen.

193

Infotainment System

Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN multimedia socket Lower the base volume on the Infotainment system. Connect the external audio source to the AUX-IN multimedia socket. Start playback on the external audio source. In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE function button and select AUX .

Connecting an external audio source via Bluetooth

Bluetooth Audio mode allows you to listen to audio files being played on a Bluetooth au- dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec- ted via Bluetooth (audio playback by Blue- tooth) over the vehicle speakers.

Conditions The Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP Bluetooth profile. In the Bluetooth Settings menu the Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must

be on. Select Phone > Settings > Blue- tooth.

Starting Bluetooth audio transfer Activate Bluetooth visibility on the external Bluetooth audio source (e.g., mobile tele- phone). Lower the base volume on the Infotainment system. In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE function button and select BT audio . Press Search for new device in order to con- nect an external Bluetooth audio source for the first time page 208. OR: Select a Bluetooth external audio source from the list. Please refer to the instructions on the screen of the Infotainment system and on the Bluetooth audio source regarding the rest of the procedure.

You may still need to manually start playback on the Bluetooth source.

When playback on the Bluetooth audio source is stopped, the Infotainment system remains in Bluetooth Audio mode.

Controlling playback The extent to which the Bluetooth audio source can be controlled via the Infotainment system depends on the connected Blue- tooth audio source.

The available functions will depend on the Bluetooth Audio profile that the connected external player supports.

With media players that support the AVRCP Bluetooth profile, playback on the Blue- tooth audio source can be automatically started or stopped when the unit is switched to Bluetooth Audio mode or to a different au- dio source. In addition, it is possible to view or change the track via the Infotainment system.

Note Due to the large number of possible Blue- tooth audio sources, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all de- scribed functions. Do not connect an external media player to play music via Bluetooth and via the USB port page 193 at the same time with the Infotainment system, as this could cause playback limitations. If the external player is an Apple device, it cannot be simultaneously connected by USB and by Bluetooth.

194

Operating modes

Connecting an external audio source through WLAN*

3 Not available for model: Media System Touch/Colour

WLAN allows wireless connection between an external audio source (for example a smart phone) and the Infotainment system.

To use this connection, the device being con- nected must have an app compatible with the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi- cation protocol, allowing the app to provide the system with the available media content.

Conditions Having a compatible (UPnP) app installed on the mobile device. Having the Enable WLAN connection op- tion active, which can be found in the wireless connection configuration. Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain- ment system using a password generated by the system. The pairing must be done from the mobile device that you wish to connect to the Infotainment system.

Starting the WLAN audio transfer Lower the base volume on the Infotainment system. Start the UPnP app or the app for the play- back of the WLAN audio source.

In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE function button and select WLAN . Please refer to the instructions on the screen of the Infotainment system and on the WLAN audio source regarding the rest of the procedure.

Controlling playback The extent to which the WLAN audio source can be controlled via the Infotainment system depends on the connected WLAN audio source and the application used.

Note The Infotainment system does not pro- vide an internet connection, it only estab- lishes a wireless connection between the mobile device and said system. Via the WLAN, only the connection be- tween the device and the Infotainment sys- tem can be guaranteed, its operation de- pends on the application itself.

Images 3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi System

Using the Images menu, image files can be viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide- show.

The image files must be stored on a compati- ble data storage device (e.g., a CD or an SD card).

Press the Infotainment button Fig. 172 12 and then press the Images function button. Press the SOURCE function button to select the source where the pictures in question are located.

Function button: function

SOURCE Viewing and selecting the source.

SELEC- TION Opens a list of image files.

The image viewed was obtained via GPS localisation and upon pressing this func- tion button, the navigator menu opens to start a route to this destination.

/ Rotate the view of the image to the left or the right.

Reset the view of the image.

To stop the playback of a slideshow. The function button changes to .

To continue the playback of a slideshow. The function button changes to .

195

Infotainment System

Function button: function

/

To change to the PREVIOUS or NEXT im- age.

The same function can be performed by sliding your finger horizontally across the screen.

SET- TINGS Open the Image settings menu.

Enlarging or reducing the view To enlarge or reduce the view of the image displayed:

Turn the adjustment knob. OR: Stretch or reduce the image on the screen using 2 fingers.

Rotating the view/image To rotate an image, in addition to the buttons provided for this ( / ), you can also press on the screen (e.g. with your thumb) and, while continuing to press with your thumb, slide another finger (e.g. your index finger) around it like a compass either clockwise (to rotate the image to the right) or anti-clock- wise (to turn the image to the left). This will ro- tate the image 90 with respect to its current position.

Requirements for viewing images

Image files Maximum resolu- tion

BMP 4MP

JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)

JPG 64MP

GIF 4MP

PNG 4MP

Navigation1)

Introduction

Fig. 197 Related video

General information Using all the data available, the Infotainment system calculates the optimum route to the destination.

The destination is defined by entering an ad- dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta- tion or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also be taken into account in the route calculation (dynamic route guidance page 204).

Spoken instructions and visual guidance on the navigation unit and on the instrument panel will direct you to your destination.

CAUTION The navigation announcements played may be inaccurate (e.g. due to out-of-date navigation data).

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re- ceive any data from GPS satellites (due to a dense tree canopy, underground car park), navigation can still continue using the vehicle sensors.

Possible limitations in navigation In areas that are not or are only partially digi- tised on the data storage device, the Infotain- ment system will still attempt to provide route guidance.

1) Only available for the model: Navi System 196

Operating modes

Navigation area and updating navigation data Roads and streets are subject to constant change (e.g. new roads, changes to street names and building numbers). Therefore, if the navigation data is not updated, then er- rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid- ance.

SEAT recommends updating navigation data on a regular basis. Up to date navigation data can be downloaded from www.seat.com or acquired at a SEAT dealer.

Updating and using navigation da- ta from an SD card

The Infotainment system always requires the navigation data that is currently valid for this unit in order to allow all functions to be used in full. Using an old version may lead to errors during navigation.

Updating navigation data The current navigation data can be downloa- ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor- ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet at www.seat.com.

Using navigation data Insert the memory card page 192. Do not remove the memory card while test- ing. Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the inserted memory card contains valid navigation data, the following message ap- pears: The source contains a valid navigation database. It is now possible to navigate with the memory card data. When the memory card is no longer needed by the hardware, it will be prepared for removal page 192.

Note The inserted memory card must be pre- pared before it is ejected page 192. Press the Infotainment button Fig. 172 12 ; then press Settings/System to open the System settings menu. Navigation is not possible without the SD card. Do not remove the memory card while the navigation data is in use. This could damage the memory card! The navigation memory card may not be used as memory for other files. The info- tainment system will not recognise the files saved. SEAT recommends only using original SEAT memory cards to use navigation data. The use of other memory cards could limit its operation.

Navigation main menu

Fig. 198 Navigation main menu

The Navigation main menu allows you to se- lect a new destination, call up a previously used or stored destination and search for points of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu Press the Infotainment system button Fig. 172 3 to open the last menu that was open in navigation.

Function buttons and messages on the main Navigation menu

Function button: function

A The split screen is displayed page 202.

B Messages and function buttons on the map display page 203.

197

Infotainment System

Function button: function

NEW DESTINATION : To enter a new destination page 198.

ROUTE : During route guidance page 199.

MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina- tions page 200.

POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta- tions and restaurants) within a particular search area page 201.

VIEW : To modify or activate or deactivate the split screen and show POI Fig. 198 A page 202.

SETTINGS : Open the Navigation Settings menu Fig. 198.

New destination (enter destina- tion)

Fig. 199 Search screen.

In the Navigation main menu, press the New destination function button. Press the Options function button and se- lect the required type of destination (Search, Address, POI on the route or On map). Using voice control*, if you say Town, street and number, without pauses, and then the in- struction Start Route Guidance a route to the given destination will start.

Search Search for addresses and Points of Interest using the keypad to enter them Fig. 199.

For cities, post codes and points of interest, the full details must be entered. You can also search for points of interest by names or cat- egories. When necessary, enter the name of the city to refine the search.

Fig. 199

A Press to open the cursor buttons (, ), which allow you to move within the text.

Address After entering a country and a town, you can start navigating towards the centre of the se- lected town.

When narrowing down the destination ad- dress, please note that every entry restricts the available range of subsequent selections. For instance, if the street you are looking for is

not in the postcode area you have selected in a previous window, you will not be able to find the street at the street selection stage.

Function button: function

Country : To select the desired country.

City : To enter the desired city or postcode.

Street : To enter the desired street name.

House number : To enter the desired house number.

Junction : To select the desired intersection.

Last destinations : Open the My destinations menu page 200.

Start : Start route guidance to the selected address.

On the map Select the destination on the map or enter it using GPS coordinates and confirm with OK .

Function button: function

Save : To save the selected point of interest in the destination memory page 200.

Edit : To edit a destination or to enter another desti- nation.

Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga- tion Settings > Route options.

Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point of interest.

198

Operating modes

After starting route guidance

Fig. 200 Route calculation.

After starting route guidance, the route to the first destination will be calculated.

The calculation will be performed in accord- ance with the data selected in the Route options menu.

After starting route guidance, three alterna- tive routes will be suggested depending on the selected setup Fig. 200. These 3 routes correspond to the selectable route op- tions: Economical, Fast and Short.

Route criteria: Meaning

Blue route: Economical route, the route is calculated by taking into consideration economic factors.

Red route: Fastest route to the destination, even if it is necessary to make a deviation.

Route criteria: Meaning

Orange route: Shortest route to the destination, even if it results in longer travelling time. The route may have unconventional sections such as secon- dary roads.

Select the desired route by pressing it.

Once the route has been calculated, the sys- tem gives the first navigation announcement. Before turning, up to 3 navigation announce- ments will be heard.

Press the adjustment knob Fig. 172 7 to listen to the last audible navigation instruc- tion.

A navigation announcement informs you when you have reached your destination.

A navigation announcement informing you that you have reached the destination area is given if the exact destination cannot be reached because it is located in a non-digi- tised area.

During dynamic route guidance, you re- ceive information about reported traffic con- gestion on the route. An additional navigation announcement is given if the route is recalcu- lated due to traffic congestion.

During a navigation announcement, you can change its volume using the button Fig. 172 6 .

For other adjustments to the navigation rec- ommendations, select Navigation > Set- tings > Navigation announcements settings.

Note If you miss a turning during route guid- ance and are currently unable to turn back, keep on driving until the navigation system offers a new route. The quality of the navigation recommen- dations given by the Infotainment system depends on the navigation data available and any reported traffic problems.

Route

In the Navigation main menu, press the Route function button.

The Route function button is only displayed with route guidance activated.

Function button: function

Stop route guidance : Aborts current route guidance.

Enter destination : To enter a new destination or a new stopover page 198.

Congestion ahead : To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10 km in length) from the current route, e.g. to avoid congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route function button and then Cancel congestion .

199

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Route details : View route information for current route.

My destinations (destination mem- ory)

The stored destinations can be selected from the My destinations menu.

Press the My dests. function button in the main Navigation menu. Select the desired function button. Store position , Routes , Destinations , Last destinations or Home address .

Store position By pressing the Store position function but- ton, the vehicle's current position is stored as a Flagged destination in the destination memory. Mark the Flagged destination in the destination memory. Press the Store function button.

The name can be changed in the following input window. Press the function button to store the destination.

Routes In the Route mode, you can define various destinations (final destination and stopovers).

The starting point of a route is always the current vehicle position determined by the In- fotainment system. The destination is the end point of a route. Stopover destinations are driven to before the destination.

In the Navigation main menu, press the My Dests. function button. Press the Routes function button. The routes stored previously will appear.

If you have not stored any routes or want to create a new route, press the New route func- tion button and then follow the instructions as for a new destination, before pressing Store .

Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol- lowing function buttons:

Function button: function

Delete : To delete a stored route.

Edit : To edit and store a route.

Start : To start route guidance.

Function buttons and indications in the New route or Edit route menu

Function button or message: function or meaning

Stopover.

Destination.

... Estimated time of arrival at destina- tion.

... Calculated distance to destination.

... Travelling time.

... Distance to the next stopover.

Press on the destination to display the function buttons.

Delete destination.

To start guidance direct to the selec- ted destination. Destinations that come before the selected destination are ignored.

To open the detailed view of the desti- nation in question.

Available function buttons.

New dest. To add a new destination to the tour.

Destina- tions

To add a new destination from My destinations to the tour.

Storing To store the created tour in the tour memory.

Start To start route guidance.

Calculate To update calculated distance and es- timated arrival time.a)

200

Operating modes

Stop To stop route guidance to the active destination.b)

To move a stopover or a destination to another position on the list. Press and drag to move the destination.

a) This function button is only displayed with route guidance activated and when a destination has been added to the tour. b) This function button is only displayed with route guidance activated.

Last destinations View of destinations for which a route has al- ready been started.

My destinations Press the Options function button and se- lect the desired function button.

Function button: function

Destination memory : View of destinations stored man- ually and from imported vCards page 205, Im- porting vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites : View of destinations stored as favourites.

Contacts : View of entries in the phonebook that have a stored address (postal address).

Home address Only one address or position can be stored as the home address at any one time. The

stored home address can be edited or over- written.

If a home address has already been stored, route guidance will be started to the stored home address.

If a home address has not yet been stored, an address can be assigned as the home ad- dress.

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Position : Press to store the vehicle's current posi- tion as the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manual- ly.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga- tion settings > Manage memory menu.

Points of interest (POI)

Fig. 201 Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the navigation data memory are divided into different point of interest categories. Each point of interest category is assigned a symbol for display on the map.

If a database of points of interest has been imported into the Infotainment system, page 205, Importing Personal POI the category Personal POI is also shown.

In the Map settings menu, the categories of points of interest to display on the map can be configured. Up to 10 categories of points of interest can be selected.

201

Infotainment System

Selecting a point of interest on the map

Function button: function

1 There are several points of interest in the area. Press this symbol to open a list of points of in- terest.

2 The only point of interest in this zone. Press the symbol to open the detailed view of the point of interest.

Quick POI search In the Navigation main menu, press the POI function button and the three main catego- ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the name of the point of interest to be searched using the new destination keypad, or press Search nearby on the map table on

page 203.

View

In the Navigation main menu, press the View function button.

Function button: function

2D Map display in two dimensions (con- ventional).

Function button: function

3D

Map display in three dimensions (bird's eye view).

Buildings are also displayed in three dimensions. The places of interest and well-known buildings are shown in de- tail and in colour.

a) To display the destination on the map.

a) To display the route on the map.

Auto / Day / Night

To change between day and night for- mat.

Split screen Press to display the split screen page 202.

POI Display points of interest on the map.

a) This function button is only displayed with route guidance activated.

Split screen

Fig. 202 Split screen displayed.

The split screen Fig. 202 A may display any of the information described below:

Press on the name of the split screen to se- lect a display option.

Function button: function

Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.

Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav- elling direction and indicates the current position of the vehicle (street name).

Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres, POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them brings up additional information

Most frequent routes a): Information on the user's most frequent routes.

202

Operating modes

Function button: function

Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and GPS status (satellite reception).

a) This function button is only shown when route guid- ance is not active or when predictive route guidance is active.

Press the function button to close the split screen.

At any moment during navigation, pressing inside the map will make a pop-up menu ap- pear with the following functions:

Function button: function

Street name or coordinates : shows the details of the point selected on the map.

Only when you press on an icon on the map:

POI : name of the point of interest (when only one appears on the map).

Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you press on the map on various POIs grouped to- gether).

Favourite : name of the favourite.

Home : Home address.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

Add stopover destination : only when you have an ac- tive route.

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but only for the area around the point selected on the map.

Function button: function

Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active)

Map display

Fig. 203 Messages and function buttons on the map display.

Function buttons and messages on the map display. To activate function buttons and , press function button .

Function button: function

To select automatic scaling. If the func- tion is active, the symbol is displayed in blue.

Current altitude indicator.

Function button: function

View map scale. Turn the setup button or move your fingers together/apart on the touchscreen to change the scale of the map.

It can mute or repeat the last announce- ment, or can change the announcement volume.

To change the orientation of the map (north-facing or direction of travel). This function is only available in 2D mode.

To centre the vehicle position on the map.

To centre the destination on the map. This function button is only displayed if either Display destination on map or Display route on the map is selected page 202.

Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few seconds, it automatically returns to the last selected scale.

Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip- ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are displayed. Select Navigation > Settings > Map > Show road signs.

203

Infotainment System

Traffic reports and dynamic route guidance to the destination (TRAF- FIC)

Fig. 204 Traffic reports

The Infotainment system constantly receives traffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back- ground, provided a TMC traffic news station can be received at the current location. The station being listened to does not have to be the traffic news station.

List of available traffic reports Press the Infotainment button Fig. 172 12 and then press the TRAFFIC function button.

Dynamic route guidance In order for dynamic route guidance to func- tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the route options.

If during route guidance a traffic report is re- ceived that affects the route being travelled, an alternative route will be searched for if the Infotainment system calculates that time can be saved.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning

: Slow traffic

: Traffic jam

: Accident

: Slippery road surface (ice or snow)

: Slippery road surface

: Danger

: Road works

: Strong wind

: Road closed to traffic

During route guidance, traffic congestion that does not affect the route calculated is dis- played in grey.

Predictive navigation

Fig. 205 Predictive navigation

When you activate Predictive navigation, the system detects and stores in the background routes that are frequently followed, without them being active destination routes. This function has no navigation announcements unless the user requires them, getting them by pressing the adjustment knob Fig. 172 7 .

On the main screen of the Navigation menu, in the pop-up window, press the Frequent routes button. To display frequently

followed routes press the Show on map button Fig. 205.

204

Operating modes

Importing vCards (electronic busi- ness cards)

Importing vCards to the destination mem- ory Insert the data storage device with the stor- ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainment system page 189. Press the SETTINGS function button in the main Navigation menu. In the Navigation settings menu, press the Import destinations function button. Select the data carrier with the vCards saved in the list. Press Import all vCards from this folder . Confirm the import notice with the OK function button.

The saved vCards will now be in the destina- tion memory page 200 and may be used for navigation.

Note Only one address per vCard can be impor- ted. In the event any vCards have multiple addresses, only the main address will be imported.

Importing Personal POI

Importing the Personal POI to a points of interest destination memory Insert the data storage device with the stor- ed Personal POI or connect it to the Infotain- ment system page 189. Press the Infotainment button Fig. 172 3 and then select Settings . In the Settings menu, press the Manage memory function button. Press Update my POIs and then press Update and Next to import the Personal

POIs. Confirm the import notification with the OK function button.

The stored Personal POI are now in the points of interest destination memory page 201 and can be used for navigation purposes.

The stored Personal POI can be deleted in the Navigation Settings > Manage Storage menu.

Navigation with images

Fig. 206 Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting route guidance Bear in mind the requirements and formats of the compatible images.

Insert the data storage device with the stor- ed images or connect it to the Infotainment system. Press the Infotainment button Fig. 172 12 and then select Images . Press the SOURCE Fig. 206 function but- ton and select the data storage device where the images are stored. Select the desired image. If the image displayed was taken using GPS localisation, the function button will appear. Press to start guidance to a destination.

205

Infotainment System

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the Navigation Settings menu, an additional pop-up win- dow opens when you start route guidance.

Pressing the Demo mode function button starts a virtual route guidance to the desti- nation you have entered. If you press the Normal function button, a real route guidance starts.

Vehicle Menu

Introduction to using the Vehicle menu

By pressing button / Fig. 171 3 , Fig. 172 9 of the infotainment system you will access its main menu with the following options:

VIEW MINIPLAYER, in the top right corner (Radio or Media function) PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen) SETTINGS page 34

With the function button View you can ac- cess the following information:

Consumers By pressing the Consumers button, informa- tion on the status of the vehicle's main con- sumption devices is obtained. It is shown via a consumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h).

Driving data The onboard computer is equipped with 3 memories that work automatically. In these memories you can see the distance travelled, average speed, time passed, average con- sumption and autonomy of the vehicle.

Ecotrainer* If the corresponding equipment is available, the ECOTRAINER will provide information on driving style. The information on driving style is only evaluated and displayed when moving forward.

Vehicle status Press the Vehicle status button to access information on the Vehicle status mes- sages and Start-Stop system. The Vehicle status messages are displayed, in addition to being specified on the corresponding button.

Telephone

General information

Fig. 207 Related video

The Telephone functions described below can be used through the Infotainment system if there is a mobile telephone connected to it via Bluetooth page 208.

In order for the mobile telephone to be able to connect to the Infotainment system the tel- ephone must be equipped with Bluetooth.

If there is no mobile telephone connected to the Infotainment system, the telephone man- agement system will not be available.

The instructions shown on the screen for the telephone menus will depend on the mobile telephone used. There may be variations.

Only use compatible Bluetooth devices. For further information on compatible Bluetooth

products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or check on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele- phone and of any accessories.

206

Operating modes

If you detect any operating issues between your mobile telephone and the Infotainment system, restart your mobile by switching it off and on again.

WARNING General, mandatory, legal and country- specific instructions and laws for the use of mobile phones inside the vehicle must al- ways be considered.

WARNING Speaking by telephone and using the mo- bile telephone management system whilst driving can distract you from the road and cause an accident. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow you to easily hear signals from outside the vehicle at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens and horns). In areas of little or no coverage or, in some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under- pass, your call may be cut off and you may not be able to make even emergency calls.

WARNING If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in- correctly secured in the vehicle, it could move around the passenger compartment in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre or emergency stop, resulting in injury.

While the vehicle is in motion, always se- cure the mobile telephone properly outside the airbag deployment zone.

WARNING Mobile telephones may interfere with and alter the correct operation of pacemakers if they are carried directly over them. Maintain a minimum distance of at least 20 centimetres between the aerials of the mobile telephone and the pacemaker. Do not carry your switched-on mobile telephone in your breast pocket directly over the pacemaker. If you suspect interference, switch off the mobile telephone immediately.

CAUTION High speeds, poor weather or road condi- tions and the quality of reception can all affect the audio quality of a telephone con- versation in the vehicle.

Note Restrictions on the use of devices using Bluetooth technology may apply in some countries. For further information, contact the local authorities. If you wish to connect a device to the tel- ephone management system via Blue- tooth technology, consult the safety

warnings in its instruction manual. Only use compatible Bluetooth devices.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the mo- biles Bluetooth function in places with a risk of explosion. In the majority of cases, these places are signposted, but not always clearly in General information on page 207. They include, for example:

the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks The lower decks of boats and ferries. In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid gas (such as propane or butane). places where the air is laden with chemi- cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal powder. all other places where the vehicle engine must be switched off.

WARNING Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a risk of explosion! The mobile telephone can automatically connect to the mobile tele- phone network again if it loses the Blue- tooth connection to the telephone man- agement system.

207

Infotainment System

CAUTION In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile telephones is prohibited, both the telephone and the telephone management system must be switched off. The radiation produced by the mobile tele- phone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in a malfunction or dam- age to the equipment.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth technology allows a mobile tele- phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele- phone management system. In order to use the telephone management system with a mobile telephone with Bluetooth technolo- gy, it is first necessary to pair them.

Some Bluetooth mobile telephones detect and automatically connect when turning on the ignition if a connection has been previ- ously established. For this to take place the telephone must be switched on and its Blue- tooth function activated, and there must be no active Bluetooth connection with other devices.

Bluetooth connections are free.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth profiles

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel- ephone management system, a data ex- change takes place via one of the Bluetooth

profiles.

Hands-Free Profile (HFP): When connect- ing a mobile telephone to the phone manag- er through the HFP the calls can be managed via the Infotainment system. Audio profile (A2DP): This profile makes it easier to transmit audio to the infotainment system with stereo quality. This function may require connecting additional profiles for managing and controlling audio playback. Phone book access profile (PBAP): Serves to download phone book contacts from the mobile telephone to the Infotainment system. Message profile (MAP):1) Serves the download and synchronise short messages (SMS) of the mobile telephone to the Infotain- ment system.

Note To prevent them from being heard through the speakers, the button and mobile tele- phone alert tones must be disconnected. Where necessary, disconnect the headset from the mobile telephone you wish to con- nect to the system.

Pairing and connecting a mobile telephone to the Infotainment sys- tem

In order to manage a mobile telephone via the Infotainment system, it is necessary to pair both devices once.

For your safety, we recommend you make the link when the vehicle is stationary. In some countries it is not possible to perform the pair- ing with the vehicle running.

Conditions You must guarantee the following setup in the mobile phone and the Infotainment system:

The ignition must be switched on.

1) Not available for the Media System Touch/Col- our model.

208

Operating modes

The Bluetooth function of the mobile tel- ephone and the Infotainment system must be active as well as visibility. The keypad lock on the mobile telephone must be deactivated.

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo- bile telephone.

During the pairing process, it is necessary to enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

Pairing a mobile telephone Make sure the mobile device's Bluetooth

function is activated and visible. Press the infotainment button / Fig. 171 5 , Fig. 172 8

Press the Find telephone function button and then Results .

OR: Press the infotainment button / Fig. 171 5 , Fig. 172 8

Press the SETTINGS function button. Press the Select mobile phone function but- ton and then Results .

OR: Press the infotainment button / Fig. 171 5 , Fig. 172 8

Press the SETTINGS function button. Press the Bluetooth function button.

Press the Find devices function button and then Results .

The name of the Bluetooth function of your Infotainment system will be displayed on the main Telephone screen and you can edit this name via the Bluetooth settings menu

The search process can take up to 1 minute. On the screen, the system will dynamically update the names of the Bluetooth devices found.

As soon as the search is completed, the names of the Bluetooth devices found are displayed on-screen.

Select the Bluetooth device you want to connect on the infotainment system. In cer- tain circumstances, it is possible that to finish the connection between the two devices, you must enter additional data in the mobile tele- phone and Infotainment system. Use your mobile telephone to enter and confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis- play of the infotainment system. If more Bluetooth profile pairing requests are received on the mobile telephone, make sure to reply to them.

OR: Compare the PIN code shown on the dis- play of the Infotainment system with that shown on the mobile telephone. If they match, confirm on both devices.

When the pairing has been finalized correct- ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The phone book, call list and SMS messages stor- ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once the requests have been accepted in the mo- bile phone. The duration of the loading proc- ess depends on the amount of data stored on the mobile telephone. After downloading, the data will be available on the Infotainment system.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele- phones You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to the Infotainment system, but the number of si- multaneous connections varies:

Media System Touch / Colour: a phone connected to the hands-free profile and the same or a different device connected to the Bluetooth audio profile. Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo- bile phones simultaneously connected to the hands-free profile and one of them is also connected Bluetooth audio profile.

When the Infotainment system is switched on, it automatically connects to the last connec- ted mobile telephone. If it is not possible to connect to this mobile telephone, the tele- phone management system will try to auto- matically connect to the next mobile tele- phone on the list of paired devices.

209

Infotainment System

The maximum range of the Bluetooth con- nection is approx. 10 meters. The active Bluetooth connection disconnects if this dis- tance is exceeded. The connection is auto- matically re-established as soon as the de- vice is once again within Bluetooth range.

WARNING Do not perform the pairing and connection process while driving. This may cause an accident!

Note It may be necessary to confirm the phone book data and SMS transfer request on the mobile telephone. Check that there are no requests pend- ing acceptance in your mobile phone. If there are, this could block some of the functions in the Telephone menu.

Telephone main menu

Fig. 208 Telephone main menu (view of the 8" screen).

Assign a user profile The data from the phonebook, the call lists and the stored speed dial buttons are as- signed to a user profile and remain stored on the telephone management system. This in- formation will be available every time the mo- bile telephone is connected to the telephone management system.

After the first connection, it will take a few mi- nutes for the data from the phonebook of the linked mobile phone to be available in the In- fotainment system. The next time that the mobile telephone is connected (e.g. on the next journey) the phonebook is updated au- tomatically.

If any entries in the mobile phonebook have been modified while connected, a manual update of the phonebook data can be initi-

ated from the User profile settings menu.

Telephone management can store a maxi- mum of 4 user profiles for mobile telephones. If you wish to link/connect another mobile phone, the oldest user profile will automati- cally be replaced.

Telephone management system function buttons Press the infotainment button / Fig. 171 5 , Fig. 172 8 to open the Tele- phone main menu.

Function button: function

1 Name of connected mobile telephone. Press the icon to the left to connect or pair with another mobile telephone.

2 Speed dial buttons, to which telephone numbers from the phonebook may be assigned respectively.

3

To change to another telephone con- nected to the hands-free profile. This button will only be visible when there are two telephones connected as hands-free. The active user profile cor- responds to the telephone appearing on the screen.

DIAL NUMBER

To open the number pad and enter a telephone number page 211.

CONTACTS To open the phonebook of the connec- ted mobile telephone.

210

Operating modes

Function button: function

SMSa) To open the menu for SMS messages.

CALLS To open call lists of the connected mo- bile telephone page 212.

SETTINGS To open the Telephone settings menu.

a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour model.

Display and symbols of the tele- phone management system

Fig. 209 Active call.

Display: Meaning Fig. 209

A Name of the mobile network operator (pro- vider) to which the mobile telephone is con- nected.

Display: Meaning Fig. 209

B

View of stored telephone number or name. If the name stored in the phonebook has an assigned photo, it can be displayed: select Telephone > Settings > User profile > Show pictures for contacts*.

Press to accept a call.

Press to end a call.

OR: Press to reject an incoming call.

Press to mute or to reactivate the ring tone during an incoming call.

Press to mute the microphone during an ac- tive call and to reactivate it.

This button keeps the call active. While the call is on hold the listener will not hear the conversation. To reactivate it, press the call accept button . To reject it, press the reject button .

Press to add a participant to the active call.

Charge status of a mobile telephone con- nected via Hands-free profile (HFP) Blue- tooth.

Strength of coverage signal received by the mobile telephone.

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 210 Enter telephone number menu.

Open the Enter telephone number menu Press the DIAL NUMBER function button from the PHONE main menu.

Possible functions

Enter telephone number

Entering a phone number with the keypad.

Press the function button to make a call.

Select a con- tact from the list

Enter the first letters of the con- tact to find using the keypad. The available entries appear in the phonebook.

Select the desired contact from the phonebook to make the call.

211

Infotainment System

Possible functions

Enter the coun- try code

To enter a country code, instead of the first two digits (interna- tional access code e.g. 00) you can enter the character +.

Press the function button 0 for approx. 2 seconds to add the +.

Assistance call

Press the function button to ob- tain help in the event of break- down. For this the network of SEAT dealerships is available to you with their Mobile Service.

Information call

Press the function button to ob- tain information on the SEAT brand and the additional serv- ices contracted related to traffic and travel.

Call mailbox

Press the Voicemail function button to make the call.

OR: Press the function button for about 2 seconds to make a call.

If the number for the mailbox has not yet been stored, enter it and confirm with OK .

Note Breakdown service and information calls can incur an additional cost on your tele- phone bill. The Roadside Assistance and Information services might not work properly, for exam-

ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the connected mobile telephone are in differ- ent countries. If you are not able to use these services contact an authorised SEAT workshop.

Call Menu (call lists)

Possible displays in the Calls menu

Display: Meaning

Missed calls : Displays the numbers of missed

and unanswered calls.

Dialled numbers : Indicates the numbers dialled

on the mobile telephone and on the Infotain- ment system telephone management system.

Received calls : Indicates the numbers of the calls received on the mobile telephone and on the Infotainment system telephone manage- ment system.

Note The availability of the call lists will depend on the mobile phone used.

Multimedia

USB/AUX-INPort

Fig. 211 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the special characteristics and the country, the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the storage compartment area of the centre console Fig. 211.

The operating description is located in page 189.

212

Operating modes

Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger*

Fig. 212 Related video

Fig. 213 Centre console: Connectivity Box

The Connectivity Box includes different func- tions that will help to use your mobile device.

They are the Wireless Charger and the Mobile Signal Amplifier.

The Wireless Charger only features the Wireless Charger function.

Wireless Charger The Wireless Charger allows mobile devi- ces with Qi1) technology to be charged with- out a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

Place your mobile device with Qi technolo- gy1 ) in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up Fig. 213.

When you do so, make sure there are no ob- jects between the pad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto- matically. For further information about whether your mobile device uses Qi technol- ogy, please check your mobile phone's user manual or visit the SEAT website.

Mobile Signal Amplifier The Mobile Signal Amplifier allows you to reduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoy better reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended that you pair the radio and the mobile device us- ing Bluetooth and place the mobile phone on the Connectivity Box pad, so as to have better reception without having to handle the mobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle's external aerial:

Place your mobile device in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up Fig. 213.

When you do so, make sure there are no ob- jects between the pad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically be ready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNING The mobile phone may heat up due to the wireless charging. Think about the temper- ature of your device before you pick it up, and take care when removing it.

Note Your mobile device must support the Qi wireless inductive charging interface standard for proper operation. If your mobile phone has a cover or a pro- tective casing, this may affect the Connec- tivity Box functions. There must be no metallic objects be- tween the pad and the mobile device that might affect the wireless charging or the connection with the external aerial.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo- bile phone wirelessly.

213

Infotainment System

The charging time and the temperature vary in accordance with the device used. To avoid malfunction, ensure that the mo- bile phone is correctly placed on the pad. The maximum charging capacity is 5 W. Qi technology does not allow you to charge more than one mobile device simul- taneously. No improvement in the transmission qual- ity can be guaranteed if there is more than one mobile phone on the pad. You are advised to keep the engine run- ning to guarantee proper wireless charging of your device. When a telephone with Qi technology is connected by USB, the charging will be performed through the medium specified by each mobile device manufacturer.

214

Start and driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition key positions

Fig. 214 Ignition key positions.

Read the additional information carefully page 31

Ignition switched off, steering lock In this position Fig. 214 1 the ignition and the engine are off and the steering may be locked.

For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it

locks with an audible sound. You should al- ways lock the steering wheel when you leave your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle theft .

Switching the ignition or the glow plug system on Turn the ignition key to this position and re- lease it 2 . If the key cannot be turned or it is difficult to turn from position 1 to position 2 , move the steering wheel from one side to the other; this will release it.

Starting The engine is started when the key is in this position 3 . Electrical devices with high pow- er consumption are switched off temporarily at the same time.

Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig- nition key must be turned to position 1 . The repetitive start prevention lock of the igni- tion prevents possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.

WARNING The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident! Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a short period. This is especially important if

children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equip- ment such as the electric windows, result- ing in an accident. Unsupervised use of the key could start the engine or any electrical system, such as the electric windows. This could result in serious injury.

CAUTION The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key position 3 ).

Starting petrol engines

The engine can only be started using a genu- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- tion and depress the clutch pedal thor- oughly and hold it in this position for the starter to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to the starting position Fig. 214 3 .

Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en- gine starts; the starter motor must not run on with the engine.

After starting a very hot engine, you may need to slightly press down the accelerator.

215

Driving

When starting a cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.

If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 90, Fuses.

WARNING Never start or run the engine in unventila- ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness and result in death. Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running. Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

CAUTION When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage. The vehicle should not be pushed or tow- ed more than 50 metres to start the engine.

Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic con- verter and damage it. Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Please observe and follow the notes on the page 58, How to jump start.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Starting diesel engines

The engine can only be started using a genu- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- tion and depress the clutch pedal thor- oughly and hold it in this position for the starter to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to position Fig. 214 2 . The warning lamp will light for en-

gine pre-heating.

When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition key to position 3 to start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.

Release the ignition key as soon as the en- gine starts. The starter motor should not turn at the same time.

When starting a cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.

If there are problems starting the engine, see the page 58.

Glow plug system for diesel engines To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat- tery, do not use any other major electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre- heating.

Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp goes out.

Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank has run dry If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal (up to one mi- nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. This is because the fuel system must elimi- nate air first.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Start- ing petrol engines on page 216.

216

Start and driving

CAUTION When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage. The vehicle should not be pushed or tow- ed more than 50 metres to start the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the particulate fil- ter and damage it. Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Please observe and follow the notes on the page 58, How to jump start.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. You should drive off as soon as you start the en- gine. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

SAFE electronic immobiliser1)

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser automatically when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be started using a genu- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

If the following message* is shown on the in- strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle cannot be started.

The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.

Note A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur- ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Switching off the engine

Switching off the engine Stop the vehicle.

Turn the ignition key to position Fig. 214 1 .

Engaging the steering wheel lock In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni- tion key can only be removed when the se- lector lever is in position P2).

Remove the ignition key in position Fig. 214 1 .

Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en- gage.

Possible vehicle theft is prevented with the steering lock engaged.

After switching the engine off, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also pos- sible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine compart- ment or due to its prolonged exposure to so- lar radiation.

WARNING Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is completely stationary. The brake servo works only when the en- gine is running. With the engine switched off, more strength is needed to brake. As normal brake operation cannot be per- formed, risk of accidents and serious injury may exist.

1) Available depending on the market 2) Depending upon country.

217

Driving

The steering lock can be immediately blocked once the key is removed from the ignition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident. Power-assisted steering does not work when the engine is off, and more strength is needed to turn the wheel. If the key is removed from the ignition lock the steering lock could be engaged and vehicle steering would not work.

CAUTION When the engine has been running under a heavy load for a long period, heat can accumulate in the engine compartment and cause engine damage. For this reason, idle the engine for approximately 2 minutes before switching it off. If the vehicle is stopped and the Start- Stop system* switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on. Make sure that the ignition is switched off before leav- ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could discharge.

Starter button*

Fig. 215 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: start button.

Fig. 216 On the right of the steering column: emergency start.

The vehicle engine can be started with a starter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the area of the front or rear seats.

Opening the driver's door when exiting the vehicle activates the electronic lock on the steering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually Briefly push the starter button without touch- ing the brake or clutch pedal .

For vehicles with both manual and automatic transmission, the starter button text START ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat

when the system is preset for switching the ignition on and off.

Automatic ignition switch-off If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve- hicle key with them but leaving the ignition on, the ignition is not switched off automatically. The ignition is switched off automatically by pressing the lock button on the remote con- trol or manually by pressing the sensor sur- face on the door lever Fig. 138

Emergency starting function If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, an emergency start-up will be required. The relevant message will appear in the dash panel display. This may happen when, for ex- ample, the battery of the vehicle key button is very low or flat:

Immediately after pushing the starter but- ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right trim

218

Start and driving

of the steering column Fig. 216, as close as possible to the Kessy logo. The ignition connects and the engine starts automatically.

Emergency disconnection If the engine does not switch off after briefly pressing the starter button, an emergency disconnect will be required:

Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- ond . The engine turns off automatically.

Engine restart feature If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle after the engine stops, you will only have 5 seconds to restart it. A warning will display on the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on vehicles with the Start-Stop system The ignition is switched off automatically when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- matic engine shutdown is active, if:

The driver's seat belt is not fastened, the driver does not step on any pedal,

the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, if the dipped beam is on, the side light re- mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat- tery has enough charge). If the driver locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out.

WARNING Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury. When switching on the ignition, do not press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine could start immediately.

WARNING If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- out due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury. Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau- thorised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition and, in this way, operate electronic equip- ment (e.g. the windows).

Note Before leaving the vehicle, always dis- connect the ignition manually and, if ap- propriate, take into account the instruc- tions on the screen of the dash panel.

If the vehicle is stationary for a long time with the ignition on, the vehicle battery might be discharged and it might not be possible to start the engine. In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in the engine starting if it requires preheating. If during the STOP phase you press the START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes. If the indication is displayed on the in- strument panel display Start-Stop system deactivated: Start the engine manually, the START ENGINE STOP button will blink.

Starting the engine 3 Applies to vehicles with start button

Step Starting the engine with the start- er button page 218.

1.

Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 is performed. In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press and hold the clutch down until the engine starts.

2. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se- lector lever in position P or N.

219

Driving

Step Starting the engine with the start- er button page 218.

3.

Briefly press the starter button Fig. 215 without pressing the accelerator. For the engine to start there must be a valid key in the vehicle. After starting the engine, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button changes to a

fixed light indicating that the engine has started.

4. If the engine does not start, stop and wait for approx. 1 minute before trying again. If necessary, carry out an emergency start page 218.

5. Disconnect the hand brake when you are about to start driving page 222.

WARNING Never leave the vehicle with the engine running, especially if a gear or gear range is engaged. The vehicle could then sudden- ly move or something strange could hap- pen that would cause damage, fire or seri- ous injury.

WARNING Cold start sprays could explode or cause a sudden increase in the engine speed. Never use sprays to cold start the engine.

CAUTION The starter motor or the engine may be damaged if you try to start the engine while driving or if you restart it immediately after switching it off. If the engine is cold, avoid high engine speeds, pushing the engine too hard and rapid acceleration. Do not start the engine by pushing the vehicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could en- ter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Note Do not wait until the engine warms up with the vehicle stationary; if you have good visibility through the windows, start driving immediately. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and re- duces emissions. Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts. When starting with a cold engine, noise levels may briefly increase. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. When the outside temperature is below +5C (+41F), if the engine is diesel, some smoke may appear under the vehicle when the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Stopping the engine 3 Applies to vehicles with start button

Step Switch off the engine with the starter button page 218.

1. Stop the vehicle completely .

2. Press and hold the brake pedal until the step 4 is performed.

3. If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place the selector lever in position P.

4. Apply the handbrake page 222.

5.

Briefly press the start-up button Fig. 215. The START ENGINE STOP button blinks again. If the engine fails to switch off, perform an emergency disconnect page 219.

6. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, put it into 1st or reverse.

WARNING Never switch off the engine while the vehi- cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- jury. The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off. The brake servo does not work with the engine off. Therefore, you need to press the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

220

Start and driving

Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. You need more strength to steer when the engine is switch- ed off. If the ignition is switched off, the steering column could be locked, making it impossi- ble to control the vehicle.

CAUTION If the engine is made to work hard for a long time, it may overheat after being switched off. To prevent damage to the engine be- fore switching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 minutes in neutral.

Note After switching off the engine, the cooling fan may continue to operate in the engine compartment for a few more minutes, even with the ignition off. The radiator fan is au- tomatically switched off.

My Beat Function

For vehicles with a convenience key there is the My Beat function. This feature provides an additional indication of the vehicle ignition system.

When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening the doors with the remote control, the

START ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling at- tention to the relevant starter system button.

Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. With the engine switched off, after a few seconds, the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashing and goes out.

With the engine running, the START ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi-

cating that the engine is running. The time that lapses between the moment the user starts the engine with the START ENGINE STOP button and the lighting changes from flashing to fixed will depend on specific engine size characteristics. Upon switching the ignition off with the START ENGINE STOP button, it starts flashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the My Beat function also offers additional in- formation:

When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but- ton stays on, since, even though the engine is off, the Start-Stop system is active. When the engine cannot be stated again with the Start-Stop system, page 245, and needs to be started manually, the START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate

this fact.

Braking and parking

Braking capacity and braking dis- tance

The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. This wear depends to a great extent on the conditions under which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi- cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by technical services more frequently than recommended in the Maintenance Programme.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af- ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef- fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in this case, press the brake pedal several times un- til the brakes are dry.

WARNING Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk of acci- dents. New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced braking capacity may be compensated for by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder,

221

Driving

which also applies when the brake pads have to be changed further on. If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have been salted, braking power may be lower than normal. On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively used, they will overheat. Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and change down into a low- er gear or range (depending on the type of transmission). Thus, make use of engine braking and relieve the brakes. Never let the brakes drag by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the brak- ing distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately. Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is in- creased considerably when the brake ser- vo is not active. If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the efficiency of the brakes. Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please observe the relevant instructions page 304, Technical modifi- cations. If a brake system circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased considerably.

Contact a specialised workshop immedi- ately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low page 316 or fault in the brake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Parking brake engaged page 222. The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re- leased.

It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn.

WARNING If the brake warning lamp does not go out or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low so there is a risk of an accident page 316, Brake fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Ob- tain technical assistance. If the brake warning lamp lights up to- gether with the ABS lamp this could be due to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away.

Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

Handbrake

Fig. 217 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling away. Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake Pull the handbrake lever up firmly

Fig. 217.

Releasing the handbrake Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-

lease knob in the direction of the arrow Fig. 217 and guide the handbrake lever down fully .

222

Start and driving

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so there is less risk of driving off with it still en- gaged .

WARNING Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi- cle when it is in motion. The braking dis- tance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of accident! If the handbrake is only partially re- leased, this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an ac- cident. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake pads.

CAUTION Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, place the gear lever in position P.

Parking

The handbrake should always be firmly ap- plied when the vehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when park- ing the vehicle:

Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

Apply the handbrake.

Put it in 1st gear.

Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.

Always take you keys with you when you leave the vehicle .

Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients: Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point towards the kerb. If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away from the kerb. Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.

WARNING Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended. Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc. Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the in- side, and could become trapped in the ve- hicle in an emergency. In the event of an

emergency, locked doors will delay assis- tance to vehicle occupants. Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex- ample, by releasing the handbrake or the gearbox lever. Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

Braking and stability sys- tems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or disconnection caused by the sys- tem. As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, the ESC light will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

Fault in the ASR or disconnection caused by the sys- tem.

223

Driving

Flashes

ASR working.

It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Alternatively: ESC in Sport mode.

It lights up page 227

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when the ignition is switched on and should turn off af- ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

This Electronic Stability System reduces the risk of skidding and improves the vehicle's stability and ability to hold the road.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) con- tains the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the traction control system (ASR). The ESC works together with the ABS. Both control lamps will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are faulty. It also includes emergency braking assistance (HBA).

The ESC system is started automatically when the engine is started.

The ESC system is always active and cannot be switched off. With the Easy Connect sys- tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASR or else select Sport mode.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin is desirable page 225.

For example:

When driving with snow chains. When driving in deep snow or on loose sur- faces. When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back- wards and forwards.

Press the button to switch the ASR back on when you no longer need wheel spin.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak- ing the wheels individually.

The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the changes of direction desired by the driver, and constant- ly compares them with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automatically.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end slides out), the system will act on the front wheel on the outside of the turn.

Control lamp There are two control lamps for the electronic stability control. The lamp provides infor- mation concerning function and discon- nection status.

If the ESC control lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started, this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then on again. If the control lamp goes out, this means the system is fully func- tional.

WARNING Do not forget that the electronic stability control ESC cannot defy the laws of phys- ics. Bear this in mind, particularly on slip- pery and wet roads and when towing a trailer. Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. The greater safety provided by the ESC should not encourage you to run any risks.

CAUTION To ensure that the ESC works correctly, all four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to re- duce engine power when this is not desired.

224

Start and driving

Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine, brake system, running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may affect the operation of the ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.

Traction control system (ASR)

The traction control system prevents the driv- en wheels from spinning when the vehicle is accelerating.

Description and operation of the traction control system during acceleration (ASR) The ASR system intervenes by reducing en- gine power and preventing the driven wheels from slipping during acceleration.

TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

The ASR automatically switches on when the engine is started. If necessary, it could be switched on or off using the Easy Connect system*.

When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights up . The ASR should normally be left on. On- ly in exceptional cases can it be disconnec- ted, i.e. when you want the wheels to slide; this done through the Easy Connect system, by means of the / button and the func-

tion button SETTINGS> ESC system, for ex- ample:

With compact temporary spare wheel. When using the snow chains. When driving in deep snow or on soft ter- rain. When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking it.

The ASR should be switched on again as soon as possible.

Control lamp There are three control lamps for the traction control system: (for vehicles equipped with M-ABS), (for vehicles equipped with ESC) and .

If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp or will remain lit. The warning lamp will also light up if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ASR op- erates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see page 225.

WARNING Remember that not even the ASR can de- fy the laws of physics. Bear this in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer. Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic

situation. The greater safety provided by the ASR should not encourage you to run any risks.

CAUTION To ensure that the ASR works correctly, identical tyres should be fitted on all four wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to re- duce engine power when this is not desired. Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine, brake system, running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may affect the operation of the ABS and ASR.

Connecting/disconnecting ESC and ASR*

The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started, and only works when the engine is running and includes the ABS, EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR and ESC function should only be switched off in situations in which traction is insufficient, among others:

When driving in deep snow or on surfaces that are not very firm. To free the vehicle if it gets stuck.

225

Driving

Then switch the ASR and ESC function back on.

Depending on finishes and versions, it is pos- sible either to disconnect only the ASR or else activate ESC Sport mode.

ESC in Sport mode Sport mode can be connected via the Easy Connect page 34 system menu. The ESC and the traction control system (ASR) have only a limited ability to stabilise the ve- hicle.

The control lamp lights up. For vehicles with a driver information system*, the driver will be shown the electronic stability control (ESC) option: sport. Warning! Limited stability.

Disable ESC Sport mode Through the Easy Connect system menu page 34. The warning lamp will switch off. For vehicles with a driver informa- tion system*, the driver will be shown the electronic stability control (ESC) op- tion: on.

Disable ASR The Easy Connect system menu is used to switch off the ASR page 34. The trac- tion control system will be disabled.

The control lamp lights up. For vehicles with a driver information system* the driver will be informed that ASR is disabled.

Activate ASR The Easy Connect system menu page 34 is used to switch on the ASR. The traction control system will be enabled.

The control lamp switches off. For vehicles with a driver information system* the driver will be informed that ASR is enabled.

Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func- tion in the Easy Connect system using the / button and the SETTINGS > ESC System function buttons.

WARNING You should switch on the ESC Sport mode only if the traffic conditions and your driv- ing ability allow you to do so safely: risk of skidding! With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising function will be limited to allow for a sporti- er drive. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could skid.

Note If the ASR is disconnected or the ESCs Sport mode is selected, cruise control* will be switched off.

Electronic differential lock (EDS)*

The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi- cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con- trol (ESC)*.

EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel- erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi- tions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed of the driven wheels.

At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h (50 mph), it is able to balance out differences in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi- mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially slippery road surface. It does this by braking the wheel which has lost traction and distrib- uting more driving force to the other driven wheel via the differential.

To prevent the disc brake of the braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au- tomatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that the EDL has been switched off.

The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

226

Start and driving

Control lamp A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ESC control lamp . Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the ac- celerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability. Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driv- ing, this can cause accidents.

CAUTION Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en- gine, the brake system, running gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the EDL page 304.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents the wheels from locking during braking and is an important part of the vehicle's active safe- ty system.

How the ABS works If one of the wheels turns too slowly in relation to the vehicle's speed, and is close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure to this wheel. The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has intervened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully de- pressed so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is retained as the wheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all conditions. Braking distance could even be further if you brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip- pery surface.

The ABS system is faulty if: The control lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. The control lamp does not go out again af- ter a few seconds. The control lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.

The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way, without the ABS function. Take the vehi-

cle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the tyre pressure control lamp will also light up.

Brake system fault If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp , there is a fault in the ABS function and in the brake sys- tem .

WARNING The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The effectiveness of ABS is also deter- mined by the tyres fitted page 320. If the running gear or brake system is modified, the effectiveness of the ABS could be severely limited.

WARNING Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- serve the warnings page 310, Working in the engine compartment.

227

Driving

If the brake system warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warn- ing lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reser- voir page 316, Brake fluid. If the brake flu- id level has dropped below the MIN mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. Ob- tain technical assistance. If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehi- cle and seek technical assistance.

Hydraulic Brake Assist*

The Hydraulic Brake Assist is only included in vehicles with ESC.

In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force. This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.

This is when the brake assist system comes into action. When pressing the brake pedal rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer- gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing braking distance.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped- al, since the brake assist system switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.

Automatic hazard warning lights activa- tion The brake lights flash automatically to indi- cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in an emergency situation. If the emergency braking continues until the vehicle comes to a standstill, the hazard warning lights will then come on and the brake lights will remain on permanently from that moment. The warning lights will automatically switch off when the vehicle begins to move again or when the "warning" light button is pressed.

WARNING The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep your distance from the vehicle in front, and when the road surface is slippery or wet. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist system. The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist sys- tem! Therefore, it is essential that you ad- just your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea- tures tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

Electronic torque management (XDS)*

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than the in- ner wheel. This may mean that in certain sit- uations the torque delivered to the inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiv- ing a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer or lengthening of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct this effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess driving torque of that wheel. This means that the driver's de- sired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination with the ESC and is always active, even when ASR traction control is disconnected or the ESC is in Sport mode.

Multi-collision Brake*

In an accident, the multi-collision brake can help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of

228

Start and driving

skidding during the accident, which could lead to further collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, side or rear accidents, when the airbag control unit records its activation level and the acci- dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h (6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam- aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on- board network

The following actions control automatic brak- ing during the accident:

When the driver presses the accelerator, the automatic braking does not take place. When the braking pressure through press- ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- tems braking pressure the vehicle will brake automatically. Multi-collision braking will not be available if ESC is malfunctioning.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works only when the engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being tow- ed, you will have to press the brake pedal

considerably harder to make up for the lack of servo assistance.

WARNING The braking distance can also be affected by external factors. Never let the vehicle coast with the en- gine switched off. Failure to follow this in- struction could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active. If the brake servo is not working, for ex- ample when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal consid- erably harder than normal.

Hill driving assistant*

Fig. 218 Related video

This function is only included in vehicles with ESC.

The hill driving assistant helps the driver to move off and upward on a hill when the vehi- cle is stationary.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap- proximately two seconds after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from lurching backward when it is started. During these 2 seconds, the driver has enough time to release the clutch pedal and accelerate without the vehicle moving and without having to use the handbrake, making start-up easier, more comfortable and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

being on a ramp or hill/slope, driver door closed, vehicle completely stationary, engine running and foot on the brake, besides having a gear engaged or being in neutral for manual gear change and with the selector lever at position S, D or R for an au- tomatic gearbox.

This system is also active when reversing up- hill.

WARNING If you do not start the vehicle immediate- ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions. Depress the brake ped- al or use the hand brake immediately. If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

229

Driving

When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal down for a few seconds before starting off.

Note The Official Service or a specialist work- shop can tell you if your vehicle is equip- ped with this system.

Manual gearbox

Driving with a manual gearbox

Read the additional information carefully page 40

Certain versions of the model may include a 6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is shown on the gearbox lever.

The reverse gear can only be engaged when the car is stationary. When the engine is run- ning and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gear- box.

The reverse lights switch on when the reverse gear is selected and the ignition is on.

WARNING When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is en- gaged and the clutch released. Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident.

Note Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure of your hand could cause premature wear on the selec- tor forks in the gearbox. When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid unneces- sary wear and damage. Do not slip the clutch to hold the vehi- cle on a hill. This causes premature wear and damage to the clutch. Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped- al; although the pressure may seem insig- nificant, it can cause the premature wear of the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do not need to change gear.

Automatic gearbox/DSG au- tomatic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- mitted via two independent clutches. They replace the torque converter found on con- ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- hicle.

The tiptronic system allows the driver to change gears manually if desired page 233, Engaging gears with the tip- tronic mode*.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake pedal is not engaged. To select a range of gears, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The interlock button on the selector lever is not pressed. Movement of the vehicle is prevented. Engage the se- lector lever lock.

230

Start and driving

Selector lever positions

Read the additional information carefully page 40

The selector lever position engaged is high- lighted on the display in the instrument clus- ter. With the selector lever in the manual gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged gear is also indicated on the display.

P Parking lock When the selector lever is in this position, the driven wheels are locked mechanically. The parking lock must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary .

The interlock button (the button on the selec- tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si- multaneously the brake pedal must be de- pressed before moving the selector lever ei- ther in or out of position P.

R Reverse gear Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling .

To move the selector lever to position R, the interlock button must be pressed in and at the same time the brake pedal must be de- pressed. The reverse lights come on when the selector lever is in the R position with the igni- tion on.

N Neutral (idling) With the selector lever in this position, the gear is in neutral.

D/S Permanent drive (forward) position The selector lever in the D/S position enables the gears to be controlled in normal mode (D) or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S), move the selector lever backwards. Moving the lever again will select normal mode (D). The selected driving mode is shown on the in- strument panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox automati- cally selects the best gear ratio. This de- pends on the engine load, the road speed and the dynamic gear control programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty driving style. This setting makes use of the en- gine's maximum power output. When accel- erating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal to move the selector lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta- tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) .

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv- ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to tiptronic mode page 233, in order to manually select gear ratios to suit the driving conditions.

WARNING Take care not to accidentally press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stop- ped. The vehicle could otherwise start moving immediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an accident. Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident. With selector lever in any position (ex- cept P) the vehicle must always be held with the foot brake when the engine is run- ning. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tends to creep. The ac- celerator pedal must on no account be pressed inadvertently when a gear is en- gaged with the vehicle stationary. The ve- hicle could otherwise start moving immedi- ately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an accident. While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in- struction could result in an accident. As a driver you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine is running, you must apply the handbrake and engage the parking lock (P).

231

Driving

To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake and put the selector lever in position P be- fore opening the bonnet and working on the vehicle with the engine running. Please al- ways observe the important safety warn- ings page 310, Working in the engine compartment.

Note If the selector lever is moved accidental- ly to N when driving, release the accelera- tor and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting gear range D or S again. Should the power supply to the selector lever be interrupted in position P, the selec- tor lever will be locked. If this should hap- pen the manual release can be used page 40.

Selector lever lock

Fig. 219 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve- hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

Switch the ignition on.

Press the brake pedal and, at the same time, hold the lock button in the direction of the arrow Fig. 219.

Automatic selector lever lock With the ignition switched on, the selector lever is locked in the positions P and N. The brake pedal must be pressed to release the lever while pressing the release button if the selector lever is in the position P. As a remind- er for the driver, with the lever in positions P or N the following message will be shown on the display:

When stationary, apply footbrake while selecting a gear.

Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta- tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h (3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) the lever lock is automatically deactivated in po- sition N.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly through posi- tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to rock the ve- hicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck. The selector lever lock engages automatical-

ly if the brake pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about two seconds.

Interlock button The interlock button on the selector lever handle prevents the driver from inadvertently engaging certain gears. Press the button in to disengage the selector lever lock.

Safety interlock for ignition key Once the ignition has been turned off, the key may be removed only if the gear selector is in position P. While the key is not in the ignition, the selector lever is locked in position P.

Note If the selector lever lock does not en- gage, there is a fault. The transmission is in- terrupted to prevent the vehicle from acci- dentally moving. Follow the procedure be- low in order for the selector lever lock to engage again: With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again. With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the selector lever to position P or N and subsequently en- gage a gear.

Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi- cle does not move forwards or back. Pro- ceed to the next mode:

232

Start and driving

When the vehicle does not move in the required direction, the system may not have the gear range correctly engag- ed. Press the brake pedal and engage the gear range again.

If the vehicle still does not move in the required direction, there is a system malfunction. Seek specialist assistance and have the system checked.

Engaging gears with the tiptronic mode*

Fig. 220 Centre console: changing gear with tiptronic

Fig. 221 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox levers

The tiptronic gives the driver the option to change gears manually.

Changing gear manually with the selector lever It is possible to change to tiptronic mode, both when the vehicle is stopped and while driving.

To switch to tiptronic mode, move the selec- tor lever from position D/S to the right. As soon as the change is made the selector level will be shown in the position M on the instrument panel display (for example M4 means that the fourth gear is engaged).

Move the selector lever forwards + to se- lect a higher gear Fig. 220.

Move the selector lever backwards to select a lower gear.

Changing gear manually with the gear- shift paddles* The gearshift paddles can be used when the selector lever is in the position D/S or M.

Press the gearshift paddle + to select a higher gear Fig. 221.

Press the gearshift paddle to select a lower gear.

With the selector lever in position D/S, if no paddle is operated during a short period of time, the gearbox control system switches back to automatic mode. To switch to per- manent manual gear change using the gearshift paddles, move the selector lever from position D/S to the right.

When accelerating, the gearbox automati- cally shifts up into the next gear shortly be- fore the maximum engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automatic gearbox will not shift down until there is no risk of over-revving the engine.

When the kick-down feature is used, the gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend- ing on road speed and engine speed.

Driving tips

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- cally as the vehicle moves.

233

Driving

The engine can only start with the selector lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, below -10C (+14F), the engine can only start with the selector lever in position P.

Starting the vehicle Press and hold the brake pedal.

Press and hold the interlock button (the button on the selector lever handle), move the selector lever to the desired position, for instance D page 231, and release the in- terlock button.

Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a slight movement can be felt).

Release the brake and press the accelera- tor .

Stopping briefly Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle

briefly when stationary (for instance at traf- fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.

Stopping/Parking If the driver door is opened and the selector lever is not in position P, the vehicle could move. The driver message will be: Gear change: selector lever in the drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

Press and hold the brake pedal .

Apply the handbrake.

Move the selector lever to position P.

Holding the car on a hill Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving backwards; if necessary, apply the handbrake . Do not try to stop the vehicle rolling back by increasing the engine speed when a gear is engaged (pressing the accelerator) .

Starting off uphill Apply the handbrake.

Once you have engaged a gear press the accelerator carefully and disengage the handbrake.

Driving downhill: in some situations (on mountain roads or when towing a trailer or caravan) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to the manual gearbox pro- gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec- ted manually to suit the driving conditions .

On level ground it is sufficient to move the se- lector lever to position P. On slopes, first en- gage the parking brake and then put the se- lection lever into the P position. This avoids overloading the locking mechanism and it will be easier to move the selector lever from po- sition P.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Selec- tor lever positions on page 231. Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often or for long periods. Constant braking causes over- heating in the brakes. This could signifi- cantly reduce braking power, increase braking distance or even result in the total failure of the brake system. To avoid rolling back on gradients always hold the vehicle with the footbrake or handbrake if you have to stop.

CAUTION If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- pressing the accelerator when a gear has been selected. This could cause overheat- ing and damage the automatic gearbox. Apply the handbrake firmly or press the brake pedal in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling back. If you allow the car to roll with the selec- tor lever in position N with the engine switched off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged as it will not be lubricated. In certain driving situations or traffic con- ditions, such as frequently starting, pro- longed creeping of the vehicle or traffic jams with continuous stoppages, the gear- box could overheat causing damage! If the warning lamp lights up, stop the vehicle

234

Start and driving

as soon as possible and wait for the gear- box to cool page 237.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- celeration to be reached.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resistance at full throt- tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNING Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

Launch control program 3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6- Speed DSG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and petrol engines superior to 140 kW.

The Launch control programme enables maximum acceleration.

Condition: the engine must have reached op- erating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned.

The engine speed for launch-control is differ- ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the launch-control you must disconnect the anti- slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con- nect system menu page 34. The warning lamp will stay switched on or will flash slowly depending on whether or not the vehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys- tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and the corresponding text message Stability control deactivated (temporary) appears on the instrument panel to indicate the deac- tivation status.

When the engine is running, switch off the traction control (ASR)1).

Turn the selector lever to the position S or tiptronic, or else select the sport driving mode from the SEAT Drive Profile* page 272.

Press the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and hold it down for at least one sec- ond.

With your right foot, press the accelerator down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- tion. The engine speed will stabilise at about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about 2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

Take your left foot off the brake pedal.

WARNING Always adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Only use the launch control programme when road and traffic conditions permit, and make sure your manner of driving and accelerating the vehicle does not incon- venience or endanger other road users. Make sure that the ESC remains switched on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of accident!

1) Vehicles without driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver information system: the warning lamp stays on.

235

Driving

After moving off, the ESC sport mode should be deactivated by briefly pressing the button.

Note After using the Launch control pro- gramme, the temperature in the gearbox may have increased considerably. In this case, the programme could be disabled for several minutes. The programme can be used again after the cooling phase. Accelerating with the Launch control pro- gramme places a heavy load on all parts of the vehicle. This can result in increased wear and tear.

Downhill speed control*

The downhill speed control function helps the driver when driving down steep gradients.

Downhill speed control is activated when the selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto- matically engages a lower gear that is suita- ble for the slope. The downhill speed control function attempts to maintain the speed at which the vehicle was travelling when the foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of physics and technical drive limitations). It may be necessary to adjust the speed again using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv- en that the downhill speed control can only

change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de- scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to 2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and reduce the charge on the brakes.

Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon as the road levels out again or you press the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system* page 248, downhill speed control is acti- vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING The downhill speed control cannot defy the laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be maintained constant in all situations. Al- ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy of the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer- tain stretches to be driven without using the accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved. Use the inertia mode to let the vehicle roll before, for example, arriving in a town.

Switching on inertia mode Condition: selector lever must be in position D, gradients below 12 %.

Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode page 272.

Take your foot off the accelerator.

The driver message Inertia will be dis- played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12 mph), the gearbox will automatically disen- gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi- cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To make use of the braking force and switch off the engine again, simply press the brake pedal briefly.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged section with less energy) and the switching off using inertia (= shorter section without the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption and emission balance.

WARNING If the inertia mode has been switched on, take into account, when approaching an obstacle and releasing the accelerator pedal, that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usual manner: risk of accident! When using inertia mode while travelling down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: risk of accident!

236

Start and driving

If other users drive your vehicle, warn them about inertia mode.

Note Inertia mode is only available in eco (SEAT Drive Profile*) driving mode. The driver message Inertia is only dis- played with the current consumption. In in- ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis- played (for example E will appear instead of E7). On downhill sections with gradients above 15 %, the inertia mode will automati- cally be switched off temporarily.

Emergency program

A backup programme is in place if a fault should occur in the control system.

If all the positions of the selector lever are shown over a light background on the instru- ment panel display, there is a system fault and the automatic gearbox will operate in with the backup programme. When the back- up programme is activated, it is possible to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and within a selected range of gears. In some ca- ses driving in reverse gear may not be pos- sible.

CAUTION If the gearbox operates with the backup programme, take the vehicle to a special- ised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay.

Indications on the instrument panel display

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and could be damaged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gearbox to cool with the engine at idling speed and the selector lever in position P. When the warning lamp and the driver mes- sage switch off, have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay. If the warning lamp and the driver message do not switch off, do not continue driving. Seek spe- cialist assistance.

Gearbox malfunctions Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle and place the lever in the posi- tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You may continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving with restric- tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving in D until switching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- tance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your driving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. When the warning lamp switches off, you can con- tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en- gage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a high temperature, this driver message will be displayed when the gearbox has cooled again.

237

Driving

Gear-change indicator

Selecting the optimal gear

Fig. 222 Instrument panel: gear-change indi- cator (manual gearbox).

While driving, and depending on vehicle equipment, the instrument panel display may show a recommendation with the gear num- ber that would be advisable to save fuel.

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be in the tiptronic position page 233.

No recommendation will appear if the opti- mal gear is already engaged. The current gear will be displayed.

Display Meaning

The optimal gear is selected.

Changing to a higher gear is rec- ommended.

Changing to a lower gear is rec- ommended.

Information regarding the cleanliness of the particulate filter The exhaust system manager detects that the particulate filter is nearly saturated and contributes to self-cleaning by recommend- ing the optimal gear. For this reason, it might be necessary to drive for a short time at a high rpm.

WARNING The gear change indicator is only an auxili- ary function and in no case should be a substitute for careful driving. The responsibility of choosing the correct gear depending on the situation (e.g. over- taking, driving up or down a slope or towing a trailer) lies with the driver.

For the sake of the environment Selecting the correct gear can help to save fuel.

Note The recommended gear indication turns off when the clutch pedal is pressed in vehi- cles with manual gearbox or when the se- lector lever is removed from the tiptronic position in vehicles with an automatic gear- box.

Steering

Introduction

The power steering is not hydraulic but elec- tromechanical. The advantage of this steer- ing is that it foes not need flexible hydraulic pipes, hydraulic oil, pump, filter or other parts. The electromechanical system saves fuel. Whereas a hydraulic system needs continu- ous oil pressure, electromechanical steering only needs power when it is used.

In vehicles with electromechanical steering, the assisted steering function automatically adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering wheel torque and wheel orientation. The power steering only works when the engine is running.

WARNING If the power steering does not work, you will need much more strength to turn the

238

Start and driving

wheel. This has a considerable effect on vehicle safety. The power steering only works when the engine is running. Never allow the vehicle to move when the engine is switched off. Never remove the key from the ignition while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock could be engaged and vehicle steer- ing would not work.

Note The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

Control lamp

It lights up red

The electromechanic steering is faulty. Have the steering checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

It lights up yellow

The operation of the electromechanical steering is limited. See a specialised workshop immediately and have the steering checked. If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again af- ter the engine is restarted and the vehicle has travel- led a short distance, you do not need to take it to a specialised workshop.

Alternatively: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and has been connected again. Drive for a short time at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).

It flashes yellow

The steering column is tight. Turn the wheel a little to both sides.

Alternatively: Not unlocked or blocked steering col- umn. Remove the key from the ignition and then switch the ignition back on. If necessary, check the messages displayed on the instrument panel display. Do not drive on if the steering column remains locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek specialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.

WARNING If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- sages. Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.

Note Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- responding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Information relating to different ve- hicle processes.

In order to make the vehicle more difficult to steal, you should always lock the steering be- fore leaving the vehicle.

Mechanical steering lock The steering column is locked when the key is removed from the ignition lock and the vehi- cle is stationary.

Activating the steering lock Park the vehicle page 221. Remove the ignition key. Turn the steering wheel slightly until the steering lock has engaged.

239

Driving

Deactivating the steering lock Turn the steering wheel slightly to release the lock. Insert the key in the ignition lock. Hold the steering wheel in this position and switch on the ignition.

Electromechanical steering In vehicles with electromechanical steering, the assisted steering function automatically adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering wheel torque and wheel orientation. The power steering only works when the engine is running.

You should take into account that you will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the power steering is not working correctly or at all.

Power-assisted steering Power-assisted steering helps the driver in critical situations. In counter-steering, it as- sists by applying additional torque .

WARNING Power-assisted steering, together with the ESC, helps the driver to control vehicle steering in critical situations. However, the driver is ultimately responsible for steering the vehicle at all times. Power-assisted steering does not remove this responsibili- ty.

Run-in and economical driv- ing

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1500 km (900 miles).

For the first 1,000 kilometres (600 miles) Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the

maximum speed.

Do not accelerate hard.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1,000 kilometres (600 miles) to 1,500 kilometres (900 miles) Speeds can be gradually increased to the

maximum road speed or maximum permis- sible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the inter- nal friction in the engine is greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption reduced.

Running in tyres and brake pads

New tyres should be run in carefully for the first 500 km (300 miles) and new brake pads should be run in carefully for the first 200 km (125 miles).

During the first 200 km (125 miles) you have to compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying more pressure to the brake ped- al. In case of a sharp braking, the braking dis- tance will be longer with new brake pads than with brake pads which have been run-in.

WARNING At first, new tyres do not give maximum grip, and require running-in. This may cause an accident. Drive particularly care- fully in the first 500 km (300 miles). New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction properties dur- ing the first 200 km (125 miles). However, the reduced braking capacity may be com- pensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufac- ture of your new SEAT.

240

Start and driving

Constructive measures to encourage re- cycling Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling. Modular construction to facilitate disman- tling. Increased use of single-grade materials. Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.

Choice of materials Use of recycled materials. Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated. Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources. Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials. Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities. Use of plastic film as protection during vehi- cle transport.

Use of solvent-free adhesives. Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- tems. Recycling and energy recovery from resi- dues (RDF). Improvement in the quality of waste water. Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, etc.). The use of water-soluble paints.

Economical and environmentally- friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- pends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an economical driving style and an- ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu- tion while saving money are listed below.

Active cylinder management (ACT)* Depending on vehicle equipment, the active cylinder management (ACT) may automati- cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders if the driving situation does not require too much power. When it is switched off, no fuel is injected into these cylinders, hence total fuel consumption may be reduced. The number

of active cylinders can be seen on the instru- ment panel display. page 105.

Drive anticipating the traffic situation A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate situations, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear en- gaged, for example, if you see a red light ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are re- duced to zero (disconnection due to inertia).

Change gear early to save energy An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears. Running the en- gine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary amount of fuel.

Manual transmission: shift up from first to second gear as soon as possible. We recom- mend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Fol- low the recommended gear indication that appears on the instrument panel page 238.

Avoid driving at high speed We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,

241

Driving

exhaust emissions and noise levels all in- crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idling It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the engine.

The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- tant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the en- gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you will not con- sume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi- mum reliability and an enhanced resale val- ue.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the

exhaust gas filtration systems should reach the optimum operating temperature.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is pro- portionally higher. The engine does not warm up and fuel consumption does not normalise until having driven approximately four kilome- tres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend avoiding short trips whenever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ade- quate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pressure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too low, fuel consumption can increase by as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under- inflation also increases tyre wear wear and impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable to always check the luggage compartment to make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- ing transported.

A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is no longer nee- ded. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and

120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind re- sistance caused by the roof rack even when it is not in use.

Save electricity The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need for elec- tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be- cause of this, always turn off electrical devi- ces when you do not need them. Examples of devices that use a lot of electricity are: the blower at high speeds, the rear window heat- ing or the seat heaters*.

Note If your vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not recommended that you switch this function off. It is recommended that you close the windows when driving at more than 60 km/h (37 mph). Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch plate lining, causing a seri- ous fault. Do not hold the car on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consump- tion will be lower and you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.

242

Start and driving

On descents, use the engine brake, changing to the gear that is more suitable for the slope. Fuel consumption will be zero and the brakes will not suffer.

Engine management and emission control system

Introduction

WARNING Because of the high temperatures which can occur in the exhaust purification sys- tem (catalytic converter or particulate fil- ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex- haust can come into contact with flamma- ble materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at the forest edge). Fire hazard! Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle around the area of the exhaust system: Fire hazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system. (e.g. faulty lambda sensor). Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked page 244.

It lights up

Fault in the management of the gasoline engine. Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition is switched on while sys- tem operation is being verified. It should go out once the engine is started.

It lights up

Diesel engine glow plug system. The engine glow plug system has been activated. The engine can be started straight away when the lamp switches off.

Flashes

Fault in the management of the diesel engine. Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

Note While the control lamps are on , , or there might be faults in the engine, fuel consumption may go up and the en- gine might lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en- gines, as lead damages the catalytic con- verter. Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank. For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil page 314, Top- ping up engine oil. Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary page 58.

If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle in- spected at the nearest specialised workshop. In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light up when any of the described symptoms oc- cur page 243. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape in- to the environment. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.

243

Driving

CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- cause the irregularity of the fuel supply may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and dam- age the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be solved by changing to an- other brand of fuel.

Particulate filter

The particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor- mal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. The particulate filter is cleaned automatically without need for indication by the warning lamp . This may be noticed because the engine idle speed increases and an odour may be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car- ried out (because only short trips are taken, for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-

ter and the particulate filter warning lamp will switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc- ess by driving in the following manner:

Drive for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range). Maintain the engine speed at approximate- ly 2,000 rpm.

The rise in temperature causes the soot on the filter to burn. On completion of the clean- ing the warning lamp will switch off. If the warning lamp does not switch off, go immedi- ately to a specialised workshop to rectify the problem.

Driving tips

Driving abroad

To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:

For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is available for the journey. See chapter page 306, Fuel. Automobile organisations will have informa- tion about service station networks selling un- leaded fuel.

In some countries, it is possible that your car model is not sold, and therefore some spare parts are not available or the technical services may only be able to carry out limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the technical prep- aration that your vehicle requires and also about necessary maintenance and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for headlights In countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road to your home country, the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers of oncoming vehicles.

To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur- ther information is available at any Technical Service.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- ing through water, for example, along a floo- ded road, please observe the following:

The water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork. Drive at pedestrian speed.

244

Driver assistance systems

WARNING After driving through water, mud, sludge, etc., the braking effect can be delayed slightly due to moisture build-up on the discs and brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully several times will remove the moisture and restore the full braking effect.

CAUTION Driving through flooded areas may se- verely damage vehicle components such as the engine, transmission, running gear or electrical system. Whenever driving through water, the Start-Stop system* must be switched off page 245.

Note Check the depth of the water before en- tering the flooded zone. Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or stop the engine in any situation. Note that vehicles travelling in the oppo- site direction may splash water that could exceed the maximum permitted water height for your vehicle. Avoid driving through salt water (corro- sion).

Driver assistance systems

Start-Stop system*

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available.

Instructions for the driver on the instru- ment panel display Start-Stop system deactivated. Start the engine manually

This driver message is displayed when cer- tain conditions are not met during the stop- ping phase and the Start-Stop system can- not restart the engine. The engine must be started manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Function not available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re- paired.

Description and operation

Fig. 223 Related video

The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is stopping; for example when stopping at traf- fic lights. The ignition remains switched on during the stopping phase. The engine auto- matically switches back on when required. In this scenario, the light of the button stays lit1).

As soon as the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activa- ted.

Further information about the Start-Stop sys- tem can be found on the Easy Connect sys- tem: by pressing the button / in the Ve- hicle status menu.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access. 245

Driving

Vehicles with a manual gearbox Before stopping the vehicle or when it is stopped, put it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear on the instru- ment panel display. The engine may stop be- fore the vehicle comes to a halt in the decel- eration phase (at 7 km/h). When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- gine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a stop and keep the brake pedal pressed down with your foot. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear in the display. The engine may stop before the vehicle comes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehicles gearbox). When you take your foot off the brake ped- al the engine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode The driver door must be closed. The driver must have their seat belt fas- tened. The bonnet must be closed.

The engine must have reached a minimum service temperature. The reverse gear must not be engaged. The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope.

The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode frequently for different reasons.

The engine does not switch off Before the stopping phase, the system verifies whether certain conditions are met. The en- gine does not switch off, in the following sit- uations for example:

The engine has not yet reached the mini- mum required temperature for the Start-Stop mode. The interior temperature selected for the air conditioner has not yet been reached. The interior temperature is very high/low. Defrost function button activated page 41. The parking aid* is switched on. The battery is very low. The steering wheel is overly turned or is be- ing turned. If there is a danger of misting. After engaging reverse gear. In case of a very steep gradient.

The indication is shown on the instrument panel display, and in addition, the driver infor- mation system* shows, .

The engine starts by itself During a stopping phase the normal Start- Stop mode can be interrupted in the following situations: The engine restarts by itself with- out involvement from the driver.

The interior temperature differs from the value selected on the air conditioner. Defrost function button activated page 41. The brake has been pressed several times consecutively. The battery is too low. High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto- matic gearbox The engine stops when the selector lever is in the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to when in manual mode. With the selector lever in po- sition P, the engine will also remain switched off when you take your foot off the brake pedal. In order to start the engine up again the accelerator must be pressed, or another gear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in position R dur- ing the stopping phase, the engine will start up again.

246

Driver assistance systems

Change from position D to P to prevent the engine from accidentally starting when changing and passing by position R.

Additional information about vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will start up again in certain operating conditions if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle ahead drives off again.

WARNING Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is stationary. The brake servo and pow- er steering functions will not be completely covered under warranty. More force may also be needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. As you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury. Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could lock making it impossible to steer the vehicle. To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Stop system is switched off when working in the engine compartment page 247.

CAUTION The Start-Stop system must always be switched off when driving through flooded areas page 247.

Note In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or increasing the brake force applied. While the vehicle remains stopped, the engine will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting for example. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will stop. In vehicles with manual gearbox, during the stopping phases the brake pedal must remain depressed to prevent the vehicle from moving. If the engine stalls in vehicles with manual gearbox, it can be directly started up again by immediately pressing the clutch pedal. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the selector lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, the vehi- cle must be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6 mph) for the system to return to conditions in which the engine can be stop- ped.

Manually switching on/off the Start-Stop system

Fig. 224 Centre console: Start-Stop system button.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can switch it off manually.

To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop system, press the button Fig. 224.

The symbol on the button remains lit up yellow when the system is switched off, and the following message is displayed on the dash panel:

Start-Stop system deactivated

Note The system is automatically switched on each time the engine is deliberately stop- ped during a stopping phase. The engine will start automatically.

247

Driving

Cruise control system (CCS)*

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and active.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is switched on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Warn- ing symbols on page 117.

Cruise control operation

Fig. 225 Instrument panel display: CCS status indications.

Read the additional information carefully page 38

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking the vehicle .

Displayed on the CCS screen Status Fig. 225:

CCS temporarily switched off. The set speed is displayed in small or darkened figures. System error. Contact a specialised workshop. CCS switched on. The speed memory is empty. The CCS is switched on. The set speed is displayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS mode The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch pedal is pressed, intervening again automati- cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS When travelling down hills the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle down using the brake pedal and reduce gears if required.

Automatic off The cruise control system (CCS) is switched off automatically or temporarily:

If the system detects a fault that could af- fect the working order of the CCS. If you press and maintain the accelerator pedal for a certain time, driving faster than the stored speed. If the dynamic driving control systems inter- vene (e.g. ASR or ESC).

A

B

C

D

248

Driver assistance systems

If the brake pedal is pressed. If the airbag is triggered. If the gear lever of the DSG dual clutch gearbox is removed from the D/S position.

WARNING Use of the cruise control could cause acci- dents and severe injuries if it is not possible to drive at a constant speed maintaining the safety distance. Do not use the cruise control in heavy traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is insufficient, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on floo- ded roads. Never use the CCS when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. Always adapt your speed and the dis- tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi- bility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation. To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise control system, turn it off every time you finish using it. It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions. When travelling down hills, the CCS can- not maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends to accelerate under its own weight. Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

Speed limiter

Control lamp

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee- ded.

It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the speed limiter are active.

Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Warn- ing symbols on page 117.

Display indications

Fig. 226 On the instrument panel display: in- dications of the speed limiter status.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a speed individually programmed upwards of approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in forwards gears Display messages on the speed limiter Fig. 226:

The speed limiter is active. The last speed set is displayed in large figures. The speed limiter is not active. The last speed set is displayed in small or dark- ened figures. The speed limiter is switched off. The total mileage is displayed.

A

B

C

249

Driving

WARNING After use, always switch off the speed limit- er to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes. The speed limiter does not relieve the driver of their responsibility to drive at the appropriate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary. Using the speed limiter under adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning,

snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed limiter when the status of the road and the weather conditions allow it. When driving downhill, the speed limiter cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will increase due to its own weight. In this case, select a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

Note Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. If when switching the ignition off, the cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter

were switched on, then the cruise control system or the adaptive cruise control will automatically switch themselves on when the ignition is back on. However, no speed will be stored. The last set speed of the speed limiter will be stored.

250

Driver assistance systems

Operating the speed limiter

Fig. 227 On the left of the steering column: control and buttons to operate the speed limit- er.

Fig. 228 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the speed limiter.

Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 227 or the third lever Fig. 228 Effect

Switching on the speed limiter Move controller 1 to position and press button 2 of the turn signal lever or move the third lever forward and press button 2 .

The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed limiter is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching between the speed limiter and cruise control (CCS) or the adap- tive cruise control (ACC) (with the speed limiter switched on)

Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third lever It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or the adaptive cruise control (ACC).

Activating the speed limiter Press the button 3 on the turn signal lever or button 1 on the third lever.

The current speed is stored as the maximum speed and the limiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speed limiter limitation

Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position or move the third lever into position .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be stored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiter limitation pressing down the accelera- tor (kick-down)

Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to overtake). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off tem- porarily.

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after re- turning to less than the set speed.

251

Driving

Function Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 227 or the third lever Fig. 228 Effect

Switching the speed limiter on again Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into po- sition .

The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the speed you are driving at is lower than the speed set as maximum.

Increasing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or move the third lever into position to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set valuePress on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or press 1 on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set valuePress on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold down to continuously decrease the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Switching off the speed limiter Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third lev- er into position . The system switches off.

The values shown in the table in brackets, in mph, are displayed only in instrument panels with indications in miles.

Going down slopes with the speed limiter If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee- ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards

the warning and control lamps page 249 flash and an acoustic warning may sound. In this case, use the foot brake to slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low- er gear.

Switching off temporarily If you wish to temporarily switch off the speed limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control Fig. 227 1 of the turn signal lever into po- sition or the third lever into pressure point or press button 2 on any lever.

252

Driver assistance systems

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be switched on with the previously set speed by pressing button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or by moving the third lever into pressure point .

Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by pressing down the accelerator (kick- down) If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick- down) and the set speed is exceeded be- cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is temporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acoustic signal sound once. While the limiter is off, the warning and control lamp flashes.

When the accelerator is no longer pressed down and the speed is reduced below the set value, the limiter switches on again. The con- trol lamp will light up and remain lit.

Automatic off The speed limiter is automatically switched off:

If the system detects a fault that could neg- atively affect the working order of the limiter. If the airbag is triggered.

CAUTION For automatic switching off due to system failures, for security reasons, the limiter is

only completely switched off when the driver stops pressing the accelerator at some point or consciously switches off the system.

Emergency braking assis- tance system (Front Assist)*

Topic introduction

Fig. 229 On the instrument panel display: ad- vance warning indications.

The objective of the emergency braking as- sistance system is to prevent head-on colli- sions against objects that may be in the vehi- cles path or minimise the consequences of such impacts.

Within the limitations imposed by the environ- mental conditions and by the system itself, the function acts in staggered fashion, de-

pending on how critical the situation is. Initial- ly it warns the driver, and if the drivers reac- tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti- vates an independent emergency braking.

The function is intended to prevent collisions with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same lane travelling in the same direction, or with pedestrians crossing the vehicles path. It may fail to activate in other danger situations.

The Front Assist function is active within a range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on speed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour, some of the sub-functions described below are omitted in order to optimise the systems general behaviour.

The Front Assist is a driving assistance function that can never replace the driv- ers attention.

Safety distance warning If the system detects a situation of danger because the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead, it will warn the driver by means of an indication on the instrument panel display .

The timing of the warning varies depending on driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

253

Driving

Advance warning If the system detects a possible collision with the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by means of an audible warning and an indica- tion on the instrument panel display Fig. 229.

The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a possible emergency braking .

Critical warning If the driver fails to react to the pre-warning (advance warning), the system may actively intervene in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger of a collision.

Automatic braking If the driver also fails to react to the critical warning, the system may initiate independent emergency braking by progressively increas- ing the braking effect in accordance with how critical the situation is.

Driver emergency braking assistance sys- tem Faced with an imminent collision, the system may detect that the driver is not braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it will automatically increase the braking effect.

Due to certain driving circumstances and the limitations of its operation, there are some cases in which the system cannot prevent a collision, although it can significantly mini- mise the consequences by reducing the speed and the force of the impact.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Warn- ing symbols on page 117.

WARNING The Front Assist system cannot change the laws of physics or replace the driver in terms of keeping control of the vehicle and reacting to a possible emergency situation.

WARNING Following a Front Assist emergency warn- ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- tion and try to avoid the collision by brak- ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica- ble. If the Front Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- dents and serious injuries.

In complex driving situations, occasional- ly the Front Assist may issue warnings and intervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex- ample at traffic islands. If the operation of the Front Assist is im- paired, for example, by dirt or because the radar sensor has lost its settings, the sys- tem may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inopportunely in the braking. The Front Assist does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or ap- proaching head-on down the same lane. The Front Assist does not react to pedes- trians walking in the same direction or ap- proaching head-on down the same lane. The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle.

Note When the Front Assist is connected, the indications on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by warnings from other functions, such as an incoming call. When the Front Assist causes a braking, the brake pedal is harder. Automatic interventions by the Front As- sist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel. The Front Assist may brake the vehicle until it stops completely. However, the

254

Driver assistance systems

brake system does not halt the vehicle per- manently. Use the foot brake! If the Front Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

Radar sensor

Fig. 230 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- er to determine the traffic situation Fig. 230 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the Front Assist does not work. The instrument panel displays the following message: Front

Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary clean the radar sensor .

When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the Front Assist will automati- cally be available again. The message will disappear from the instrument panel display.

Front Assist operation may be affected by a strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- cur, for example, in a closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re- paired or structural modifications are made to it, for example if the suspension is lowered, Front Assist operation may be affected. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

CAUTION If you have the sensation that the radar sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, disconnect the Front Assist. This will avoid possible dangerous situations caused by a system malfunction. If this occurs have it adjusted. The sensor may become damaged or lose its settings when knocked, for exam- ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may

compromise the system's efficacy or dis- connect it. Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose. A registration plate or plate holder on the front that is larger than the space for the registration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause the ra- dar to malfunction. Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- icer spray.

Operating the Emergency braking assistance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 231 On the screen of the instrument panel Front Assist switched off message.

255

Driving

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so too are the advance warning function (pre warn- ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- ways switched on. Exceptions page 256, Switching the Front Assist off temporarily in the following situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off With the ignition on, Front Assist can be ena- bled or disabled in the Easy Connect system with the / button and the SETTINGS > Driver assistance function buttons page 34.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru- ment panel will inform that it has been switched off with the following indicator Fig. 231.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning (advance warning) The pre-warning function (advance warning) can be switched on or off in the Easy Con- nect system with the / button and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance func- tion buttons page 34.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warning function switched on at all times.

Depending on the infotainment system instal- led in the vehicle, the advance warning func- tion may be adjusted as follows:

Advance Medium Delayed Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in Medium mode.

Switching distance warning on and off If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will appear on the instrument panel display . In this case, increase the safe distance.

The distance warning can be switched on and off in the Easy Connect system using the / and the SETTINGS > Driver as- sistance function buttons page 34.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distance warning switched on at all times.

Switching the Front Assist off tem- porarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist should be deactivated due to the system's limitations:

When the vehicle is to be towed. If the vehicle is on a test bed. When the radar sensor is damaged. If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for example in a rear collision. If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. If the radar sensor is covered temporarily with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- ditional headlight or the like. When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, ferry or train.

System limitations

The Front Assist has certain physical limita- tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certain circumstances, some of the system's reac- tions may be inopportune from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter- vene if necessary.

256

Driver assistance systems

The following conditions may cause the Front Assist not to react or to do so too late: In the first few instants of driving after switching on the ignition, due to the systems initial auto-calibration. On taking tight bends or complex paths. Pressing the accelerator all the way down. If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- aged. If the ASR has been disconnected or the ESC activated in Sport mode manually page 225. If the ESC is controlling. If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged. If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works. If the vehicle is reversing. If the vehicle over-accelerates. In case of snow or heavy rain. In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- bikes. Misaligned vehicles. Vehicles crossing the other's path. Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- tion.

Special loads and accessories of other ve- hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards or over the top.

Adaptive Cruise Control ACC*

Introduction

Fig. 232 Related video

Fig. 233 Detection area.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an ex- tension of the normal cruise control sys- tem (CCS) .

The ACC function allows the driver to pro- gram a cruise speed of between 30 and 210 km/h (18 and 130 mph) and to select the dis- tance required with regard to the vehicle in front.

The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise speed at all times, maintaining a safe dis- tance with the vehicle in front based on its speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, the ACC function reduces speed until it is the same as that of the vehicle ahead and main- tains the set distance between the vehicles. If the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptive cruise control also accelerates, going no higher than the target speed programmed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it stops.

The distance programmed should be in- creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention prompt During driving, the ACC is subject to certain limitations inherent in the system. In other words, in certain circumstances the driver will have to adjust speed him or herself, as well as the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen will warn you to intervene by applying the brake

257

Driving

and a warning tone will be heard page 258.

WARNING The intelligent technology in the ACC can- not overcome the system's inherent limita- tions or change the laws of physics. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads. Never use the ACC when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been designed for use on paved roads only. The ACC does not react on approaching a fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop- ped at the traffic lights. The ACC only reacts to people if a pe- destrian monitoring system is available. In addition, the system does not react to ani- mals or vehicles crossing your path or ap- proaching head-on down the same lane. If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi- ciently, brake the vehicle immediately by applying the pedal.

If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC function could automatically switch off during your journey. Switch off the system when starting off. If the vehicle continues to move involun- tarily after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the pedal. If the dash panel displays a driver inter- vention prompt, adjust the distance your- self. The driver should be ready to accelerate or brake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTION If you have the sensation that the radar sensor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possible damage. If this oc- curs have it adjusted. Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

Note If the ACC system does not work as de- scribed in this chapter, do not use it until it has been checked by a specialised work- shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose. Maximum speed with the ACC activated is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).

When the ACC is switched on, strange noises may be heard during automatic braking cause by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument panel display and control lamps

The speed reduction by the ACC to maintain the distance from the vehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.

The ACC is not currently availa- ble.a)

With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually Fig. 235 (for dirt, ice or knocks). If it is still unavail- able, refer to a specialised workshop to have the sys- tem inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in colour.

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed remains constant.

258

Driver assistance systems

If the symbol is white: the ACC is active.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad- justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac- tive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

It lights up green:

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Warn- ing symbols on page 117.

Display indications

Fig. 234 On the instrument panel display: (A) ACC inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active.

Instructions on the display Fig. 234: Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac- tive and is not regulating your speed. Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is not active and is not regulating your dis- tance. Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active and is regulating your speed.

1

2

3

Distance level 2 set by the driver. ACC is active and is regulating your dis- tance based on speed.

Note When the ACC is connected, the indica- tions on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by warnings from other func- tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 235 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- er to determine the traffic situation Fig. 235 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. The instrument panel displays the following

4

5

259

Driving

message: ACC: No sensor vision! If nec- essary clean the radar sensor .

When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the ACC will automatically be available again. The message on the in- strument panel screen will switch off and the ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for example, in a closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re- paired or structural modifications are made to it, for example, if the suspension is lowered, ACC operation may be affected. In this sce- nario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

CAUTION If you have the sensation that the radar sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possi- ble damage. If this occurs have it adjusted. The sensor may become damaged or lose its settings when knocked, for exam- ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may

compromise the system's efficacy or dis- connect it. Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose. Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- icer spray.

Operating the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC

Fig. 236 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise Control.

Fig. 237 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise Control.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is connected, the green control lamp will light up on the instrument panel, and the pro- grammed speed and ACC status will be dis- played Fig. 234.

What ACC settings are possible? Setting your speed page 261. Setting your distance page 261. Connecting and activating the ACC page 261. Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC page 261. Adjusting the default distance level at the start of your journey page 261. Adjusting the driving profile page 261. Conditions in which the ACC does not re- act page 262.

260

Driver assistance systems

Setting speed To set your speed, move the third lever loca- ted in position 1 upwards or downwards until the desired speed is shown on the instrument panel display. The speed adjustment is made at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.

Once you are driving, if you wish to set the current speed as the vehicles cruise speed and activate the ACC, press the Fig. 237 button. If you wish to increase or reduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position 2 Fig. 236 or press the button, respec- tively.

The set speed can be changed when the ve- hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like. Any modification to the programmed speed will be shown on the bottom left part of the instrument panel display Fig. 234.

Setting your distance level To increase/reduce the distance level, press the rocker switch towards the left/right Fig. 237 A .

The instrument panel display shows the mod- ification of the distance level. There are 5 dis- tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom- mends level 3. The set distance can be changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur- ing driving, as you like .

Connecting and activating the ACC To connect and activate the ACC, the posi- tion of the gearbox selector lever, the vehicle speed and the position of the third level of the ACC must all be taken into account.

With a manual transmission, the gearbox selector lever must be in any gear except first, and the speed must be higher than ap- proximately 30 km/h. With an automatic transmission, the gearbox selector lever must be in position D or S. To activate the ACC, with the third lever in position 1 press the button or move the third lever of the ACC to position 2 Fig. 236. At this point, the image of the ACC on the instrument panel display will switch to Active mode Fig. 234.

When the ACC function is active, the vehicle travels at a set speed and distance from the vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can be changed at any time.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the 0 position Fig. 236 (engaged). An ACC deactivated message appears and the function is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just to switch it temporarily to inactive mode (Standby), move the third lever to position 3 Fig. 236 or press the brake pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby) if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at the start of your journey. In wet road conditions, you should always set a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in front than when driving in dry conditions.

The following distances can be preselected:

Very short Short Media Long Very long

In the Easy Connect system you can adjust the distance level that will be applied when the ACC is connected using the / but- ton and the SETTINGS > Driver assis- tance page 34.

Changing the driving profile In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving profile selected can have an influence on the ACCs acceleration and braking behaviour page 272.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be- haviour of the ACC can also be affected by selecting any of the following drive profiles in the Easy Connect system:

261

Driving

Normal Sport Eco Convenience

In this case, you should access the ACC set- tings using the / button and the SET- TINGS > Driver assistance > ACC page 34.

The following conditions may lead the ACC not to react: If the accelerator is pressed. If there is no gear engaged. If the ESC is controlling. If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged. If the vehicle is reversing. Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages ACC not available

The system can no longer continue to guar- antee safe vehicle detection and will be de- activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

ACC and Front Assist: currently not available. No sensor vision

This message will be displayed to the driver if the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt. Clean the sensor Fig. 235.

ACC: currently not available. Gradient too steep

The maximum road slope has been excee- ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on.

ACC: only available in D, S or M

Select the D/S or M position on the selector lever.

ACC: parking brake applied The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is applied. The ACC is available once again af- ter the parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available. Intervention of stability control

The message for the driver is displayed when the electronic stability control (ESC) inter- venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically switched off.

ACC: Take action! The message for the driver is displayed if, when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even although the ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stop

the vehicle from moving/colliding with anoth- er vehicle.

ACC: speed limit The message for the driver is displayed if, in vehicles with manual gearbox, the current speed is too low for the ACC mode.

The speed to be stored must be at least 30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).

ACC: available as of the 2nd gear

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear (manual gearbox).

ACC: engine speed The message for the driver is displayed if, when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driver does not shift up or down a gear in time, which means exceeding or not reaching the permissible engine speed. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

ACC: clutch applied Vehicles with manual transmission: pressing the clutch pedal for longer abandons control mode.

Door open Vehicles with automatic transmission: the ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle stationary and the door open.

262

Driver assistance systems

WARNING There is a danger of rear collision when the minimum distance to the vehicle in front is exceeded and the speed difference be- tween both vehicles is so great that a speed reduction by the ACC will not suf- fice. In this case the brake pedal should be applied immediately. The ACC may not be able to detect all situations properly. Stepping on the accelerator may cause the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver braking will have priority over inter- vention by the speed control or adaptive cruise control. Always be ready to use the brakes! Observe country-specific provisions gov- erning obligatory minimum distances be- tween vehicles. It is dangerous to activate control and re- sume the programmed speed if the road, traffic or weather conditions do not permit this. Risk of accident!

Note The programmed speed is erased once the ignition or the ACC are switched off. When the traction control system (ASR) is deactivated during acceleration or else the ESC is activated in Sport* Mode ( page 34), the ACC switches off au- tomatically.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the engine switches off automatically dur- ing the ACC stopping phase and restarts automatically to begin driving.

Function for preventing overtaking in an inside lane

Fig. 238 On the instrument panel display: ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a function that helps avoid overtaking while driving in inside lanes at certain speeds.

If another vehicle is detected travelling at a slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed on the multifunction display Fig. 238.

To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside lane the system will gently brake, and in ac- cordance with the speed will prevent the car from overtaking. The driver can override this

function at any time by pressing the acceler- ator pedal. At low speeds the function is inac- tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in city traffic.

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC temporarily in certain situations

In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) should be deactivated due to the system's limitations :

When changing lanes, on tight bends and roundabouts, in acceleration and decelera- tion lanes on motorways or in sections with road works to prevent involuntary accelera- tion to reach the programmed speed. When going through a tunnel, as operation could be affected. On roads with several lanes, when other ve- hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak- ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be overtaken on the right. In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the vehicle in front might not be detected proper- ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be detected at all.

263

Driving

WARNING If the ACC does not switch off in the situa- tions described, serious accidents and inju- ries may occur. Always switch off the ACC in critical sit- uations.

Note If you do not switch off the ACC in the aforementioned situations, you may com- mit a legal offence.

Special driving situations

Fig. 239 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy- clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 240 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One vehicle turning and another stationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has cer- tain physical limitations inherent in the sys- tem. For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in certain circumstances, may be unex- pected or come late from the driver's point of view. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary.

For example, the following traffic situations call for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase (only vehicles with automatic gearbox) After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin driving automatically when the vehicle in front drives off .

When the ACC halts the vehicle (e.g. traffic jam), the instrument panel display shows the ACC ready to start message. If the vehi- cle ahead drives off again, the ACC will also do so automatically.

If the vehicle ahead does not drive off again, the vehicle can be kept indefinitely in the ACC ready to start status by operating the third lever repeatedly towards position 2 Fig. 236 or by pressing the brake pedal. If the Press the brake message is shown on the instrument panel, press the brake. If you do not, an acoustic warning will be heard and the ACC will switch to inactive mode (Stand- by). At this point, the vehicle may begin to move towards the stopped vehicle ahead .

Overtaking When the turn signal lights up before the ve- hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically and thus reduces the distance from the vehi- cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane, if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro- grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted at any time by pressing the brake or moving the third lever backwards page 260.

264

Driver assistance systems

Driving through a bend On entering or exiting bends, the radar sensor may stop detecting the vehicle in front or re- acting to a vehicle in the adjacent lane Fig. 239 A In these situations the vehicle may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to the vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to intervene by accelerating or interrupting the braking process by applying the brake or pushing the third lever backwards page 260.

Driving in tunnels When driving through tunnels the radar sen- sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun- nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehicles The radar sensor can only detect narrow or misaligned vehicles when they are within range Fig. 239 B. This applies particularly to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso- ries Special loads and accessories of other vehi- cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or over the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi- cles with special loads and accessories or

when overtaking them. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanes Vehicles changing lanes a short distance away from your own can only be detected when they are within range of the sensors. Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re- act Fig. 240 C. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Stationary vehicles The ACC does not detect stationary objects while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged vehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a stationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to it Fig. 240 D. In these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite direction and vehicles crossing your path The ACC does not react to vehicles ap- proaching from the opposite direction or ve- hicles crossing your path.

Metal objects Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works, can confuse the radar sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radar sensor operates If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is deactivated temporarily. The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel dis- play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor Fig. 235.

When the radar sensor begins to operate properly again, the ACC will automatically be available again. The message on the in- strument panel screen will switch off and the ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong radar reverse reflection, for example in a closed car park.

Trailer mode When driving with trailer the ACC controls less dynamically.

Overheated brakes If the brakes overheat, for example after abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes, the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivated once brake temperature has cooled suffi- ciently. The message will disappear from the

265

Driving

instrument panel display. If the message ACC not available remains on for quite a long time it means that there is a fault. Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis- iting a SEAT dealership.

WARNING If you do not heed the Press the brake message, the vehicle may initiate an invol- untary movement and could crash into the vehicle ahead. In any event, before driving off, check that the road is clear. The radar sensor may not detect obstacles on the road. This could cause an accident and se- rious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake.

266

Driver assistance systems

Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistance (RCTA)*

Introduction

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect the traffic situation behind the vehicle.

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps the driver when backing out of a parallel parking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developed for driving on paved roads.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistance (RCTA) included cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Accidents and severe injury may occur if the blind spot detection system or the rear cross traffic alert are used negli- gently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions.

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time. Pay attention to the control lamps that may come on in the external rear view mir- rors and on the instrument panel, and fol- low any instructions they may give. The blind spot assistant could react to any special constructions that might be present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high or irregular dividers. This may cause erro- neous warnings. Never use the blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. The blind spot detector with rear cross traf- fic alert has been designed for use on paved roads. Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- roundings. Never use the blind spot detector or the parking assistant if the radar sensors are dirty. The external rear view mirror control lamps may have limited functionality due to solar radiation.

CAUTION The radar sensors on the rear bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. This may result in the system disconnecting itself, or at least possibly having its functionality diminished.

In order to ensure that the radar sensors work properly, keep the rear bumper free of snow and ice and do not cover it. The rear bumper should only be painted with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind spot detector's functions may be limited or work incorrectly if other paints are used.

Note If the blind spot detector with parking as- sistant does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it and contact a speci- alised workshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:

It lights up

It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac- tivated and ready to operate.

It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi- cle in the blind spot.

Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in the direction of the detected vehicle .

Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to

267

Driving

check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

If there are no indications from the control lamp in the external rear view mirror, this means that the blind spot detector has not detected any other vehicles in the area .

If the dipped beam is on, then the control lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be dimmed (night mode).

WARNING If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- sages. Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- responding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 241 On external rear-view mirrors: blind spot detector display.

Fig. 242 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor areas.

The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle Fig. 242. The system does this by measur- ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The blind spot de- tector will not work at speeds of less than ap- prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti- cal signals in the external rear view mirrors to notify the driver.

Indication in the external rear view mirrors The control lamp (expanded view) provides an indication in the corresponding external mirror Fig. 241 regarding the traffic situa- tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex- ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand external mirror indicates the traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

268

Driver assistance systems

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or windows with tinted film, the indications of the external mirrors may not be seen clearly or correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensors The radar sensors are located on the left and right of the bumper and are not visible from

the outside Fig. 242. The sensors monitor both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- hicle Fig. 243, Fig. 244. The range to the sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the width of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually, but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- tween two lanes, the indications may be in- correct. Furthermore, the system can detect vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if

there are any), and can also detect station- ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an incorrect indication.

269

Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 243 Schematic diagram: Passing situa- tion with traffic behind the vehicle. Indication from the blind spot detector in the left-hand ex- ternal mirror.

Fig. 244 Schematic diagram: Situation of passing and then moving into the right-hand lane. Indication from the blind spot detector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will be displayed in the external mirror Fig. 243 (arrow) or Fig. 244 (arrow):

When being overtaken by another vehicle Fig. 243 . When passing another vehicle Fig. 244 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-

erably higher speed, no indication will be dis- played.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon- er an indication will be displayed in the exter- nal mirror, because the blind spot detector takes into account the speed differential with other vehicles. Thus even though the distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indica- tion will appear sooner in some cases and later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the system In some situations the blind spot detector may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ly. E.g. in the following situations:

on tight bends; in the case of lanes with different widths; at the top of slopes; in adverse weather conditions;

270

Driver assistance systems

in the case of special constructions to the side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid- ers.

Parking assistant (RCTA)

Fig. 245 Diagram of the parking assistant: de- tected area around the vehicle that is driving off.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensors on the rear bumper Fig. 242 to monitor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of a parallel parking space or as it is be- ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi- bility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- cle Fig. 245, an acoustic alarm is heard.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, if the vehi- cle is equipped with the park assist system, the driver is also informed by means of a visu- al signal on the radio screen. This signal is displayed in the form of a red strip at the back of the image of the vehicle on the radio screen. This strip displays the side of the vehi- cle towards which traffic is approaching.1)

Automatic braking to reduce damages If the rear cross traffic alert detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehicle and the driver does not step on the brake, the system will engage the brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto- matically engaging the brakes to reduce any damage. The automatic intervention on the brakes takes place when driving in reverse at approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting that the vehicle is stationary, the system keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam- age, the system will not be able to automati- cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking by stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal in order to regain control of the vehicle.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. The system should never be used in limi- ted visibility conditions or complicated traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing multiple lanes. Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- cle's surroundings, since the system often fails to detect things such as bicycles or pedestrians. The rear cross traffic alert itself will not brake the vehicle to a complete stop.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system.

271

Driving

Using the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA)

Activating and deactivating the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA) The blind spot detector with parking assistant can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistance systems menu on the dash panel display using the steering wheel con- trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi- function camera, it can also be accessed by means of the driver assistance systems key located on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu.

Blind spot Exit Assist

If the verification box on the control panel is checked , the functionality will be automat- ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op- erate, the indications in the external mirrors will turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automatically deactivated, it will only be possible to restart the system after turning the vehicle off and restarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spot detector (BSD) The radar sensors of the blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert will be automati- cally deactivated when, among other rea- sons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently covered. This may be the case if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice in front of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display.

Trailer mode The Blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will be automatically deactivated and it will be impossible to activate them if the tow hitch is electrically connected to a trailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with a trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a message will appear on the instrument panel display indicating that the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva- ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you will have to reactivate them in the corre- sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, then the blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated manually when driving with a trailer.

SEAT Drive Profile*

Introduction

SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to choose between four profiles or modes, Nor- mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that modi- fy the behaviour of various vehicle functions, providing different driving experiences.

The Individual profile can be configured according to personal preferences. The other profiles are fixed.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve- hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the following functions:

Engine Depending on the profile selected, the engine responds more spontaneously or more in har- mony with the movements of the accelerator. Additionally, when Eco mode is selected, the Start-stop function is automatically activa- ted.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the gear change points are modified to position them in lower or higher engine speed ranges.

272

Driver assistance systems

Additionally, the Eco mode activates the Iner- tia function, enabling consumption to be fur- ther reduced.

In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco mode cau- ses the gear shift recommendations that ap- pear on the instrument panel to vary, facilitat- ing more efficient driving.

Dual Ride suspension The Dual Ride suspension features a com- fortable suspension in the Eco and Normal profiles, suitable for daily use. Contrasting with this it features a sporty suspension in the Sport profile, suitable for a sporty driving style. In the Individual profile the suspen- sion can be switched between Normal or Sport, depending on personal preference.

In the event of a fault in the Dual Ride sus- pension, the following message is displayed on the instrument panel screen Fault: shock absorber regulation.

Address Power steering becomes more robust in Sport mode to enable a sportier driving style.

Air conditioning In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con- sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The acceleration and braking gradient of the adaptive cruise control varies according to the active driving profile page 257.

Setting driving mode

Fig. 246 Next to the gearbox lever: MODE but- ton.

You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco and Individual.

You can select the required mode either by repeatedly pressing the button MODE Fig. 246, or on the touch screen, in the menu that opens when the above button is pressed.

An icon on the Easy Connect system display informs about the active mode.

The MODE button light remains lit up yellow when the active mode is different to Normal.

Driving profile Characteristics

Normal Offers a balanced driving experi- ence, suitable for everyday use.

Sport Provides a complete dynamic per- formance in the vehicle, enabling the user a more sporty driving style.

Eco Places the vehicle in a particularly low state of consumption, facilitat- ing a fuel-saving driving style that is respectful to the environment.

Individual

Enables some configurations to be modified by pressing the Profile settings button. The functions that can be adjusted depend on the equipment fitted in the vehicle.

WARNING When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at- tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause an accident.

Note When the vehicle is switched off it will store the driving profile that was selected when the ignition key was removed. Never- theless, when the engine is restarted, the engine and the gear will start by default in the Normal setting. For engine and gear to revert to the desired position, select the corresponding drive profile again or press

273

Driving

the Easy Connect system button repeated- ly. Your speed and driving style must always be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf- fic conditions. The Eco profile is not recommended when towing a vehicle.

Kick-down

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- celeration to be reached.

If the eco* page 273 mode has been se- lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the accel- erator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en- gine power is automatically controlled to give your vehicle maximum acceleration.

WARNING Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

Park Assist*

Introduction

The Park Assist system is an additional func- tion of ParkPilot page 282 and helps the driver to:

find a suitable parking space, select a parking mode, park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- dicular and parallel spaces, park driving forwards in suitable perpendic- ular spaces, exit a parking space driving forwards from a parallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- tory radio the front, rear and side areas are represented, and the position of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system and its use requires special attention by the driver .

WARNING The technology used in the park assist sys- tem involves a series of limitations inherent in the actual system and in the use of ultra- sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may

compromise safety. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at least correctly, these objects or people wearing such clothes. Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- ted by external sound sources. In certain circumstances this may prevent them from detecting people or objects. The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not reg- istered. Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the ultrasound sensors do not detect small children, animals or certain objects in all situations.

WARNING Quick turns of the steering wheel when parking or exiting a parking space with Park Assist can cause serious injury. Do not hold the steering wheel during manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space

274

Driver assistance systems

until the system requests it. Doing so disa- bles the system during the manoeuvre, re- sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects such as trail- er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the vehicle. Retrofitting of certain accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter- fere with the operation of the Park Assist system and cause damage. The Park Assist system uses as a refer- ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob- jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not damaged while parking. If necessa- ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma- noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not apply it directly unless very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm. A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the reg- istration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause: false detections,

loss of sensor visibility. cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking. If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- aged, the area corresponding to that group of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot be activated until the fault is cor- rected. However, you can still use the sen- sors of the other bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in the system, consult a spe- cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Note In order to guarantee good system oper- ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other ob- jects. Certain sources of noise, such as rough asphalt or paving stones and the noise of other vehicles can induce the Park Assist system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn- ings. In order to become familiar with the sys- tem and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice operating the Park Assist system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.

Description of the Park Assist sys- tem

Fig. 247 In the centre console: button to switch on the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist system are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, the button Fig. 247 to switch the system on and off and the mes- sages on the instrument panel display.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in- terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space in any of the following cases:

Press the button. The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h (4 mph). The driver takes hold of the steering wheel.

275

Driving

The parking manoeuvre does not end within 6 minutes from the activation of automatic steering. There is a fault in the system (the system is temporarily unavailable). ASR is switched off. ASR or ESC intervene with regulation. The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that none of these things occur and that the button is pressed again.

Special characteristics The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. For exam- ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, a brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to change between forward and reverse gears (depending on the case). In successive ma- noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to change gears, at the latest, when the contin- uous audible signal is given (object present at a distance of 30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in- strument panel also displays the symbol . Keep the brake pedal depressed while the symbol remains on the dash panel display to turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This way, the system will require fewer manoeu- vres to complete the parking action.

Trailer mode The Park Assist system cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket page 293 is electrically connected to a trailer.

After changing a wheel If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops entering and exiting parking spaces correct- ly, the circumference of the new wheel may be different and the system may need to adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes place during driving. Making turns slow- ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) for a few minutes may contribute to this adaptation process in Introduction on page 274.

276

Driver assistance systems

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 248 Overview of reduced displays for park- ing modes: Parallel parking in reverse. Per- pendicular parking in reverse. Perpendicular parking forwards.

Fig. 249 On the instrument panel display: dis- play of the assisted parking system with de- creased visibility.

Selecting a parking mode with Park Assist with prior step in front of the space After activating the Park Assist system and af- ter detecting a parking space, the display on the instrument panel proposes a parking mode. The Park Assist system selects the parking mode automatically. The selected

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- play Fig. 249. The reduced display of oth- er possible parking modes is also shown Fig. 248. If the mode selected by the sys- tem does not correspond to the desired mode, you can select another mode by pressing the button Fig. 247.

Action

1. The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 279.

2.

Press the button.

A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instru- ment panel display and the reduced display shows another parking mode it can be changed to.

Action

3.

Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards the side of the road where you are parking. The instrument panel displays the side corre- sponding to the road. By default, if the turn signal is not on, it parks on the right in the di- rection of traffic.

4.

If necessary, press the button again to change to the next parking mode.

Once you have switched to all possible park- ing modes, if the button is pressed again, the system switches off.

5. Press the button again to switch the system back on.

6. Follow the instructions displayed on the in- strument panel while paying attention to traf- fic and drive the vehicle past the parking space.

277

Driving

Special case of perpendicular parking space to park forwards without driving past first

Action

1. The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 279.

Action

2. Drive forward towards the parking space while paying attention to traffic and stop the vehi- cle.

Action

3.

Press the button once.

A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instru- ment panel display without reduced display.

4. Release the steering wheel in Introduc- tion on page 274.

278

Driver assistance systems

Park with Park Assist

Fig. 250 On the instrument panel display: per- pendicular parking. Finding a parking space. Parking position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 251 On the instrument panel display: paral- lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park- ing position. Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 250 and Fig. 251: Message to move forwards Your vehicle Parked vehicle Parking space detected Message to park Message to press the brake pedal Progress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Progress bars The progress bar Fig. 250 7 and Fig. 251 7 on the screen of the instrument panel displays the relative distance to be covered. The greater the distance, the fuller the progress bar. When driving forward, the content of the pro- gress bar decreases upwards, and when re- versing, it decreases downwards.

Necessary conditions to park with Park As- sist

For parallel parking spaces

For perpendicular parking spaces

The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 225.

279

Driving

For parallel parking spaces

For perpendicular parking spaces

Do not exceed approxi- mately 40 km/h

(25 mph) when driving past the parking space.

Do not exceed approxi- mately 20 km/h

(12 mph) when driving past the parking space.

Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when driving past the parking space.

Length of the space: length of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Width of the space: width of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when parking.

Parking

Do the following:

1. The necessary conditions have to be met to park with Park Assist page 279 and the parking mode must be selected page 277.

2.

Look at the display on the instrument panel to see if the space has been detected as appro- priate and if the correct position for parking has been reached Fig. 250 or Fig. 251 .

The space is considered appropriate if the display on the instrument panel shows the message to park 5 .

3. Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, en- gage the reverse gear.

Do the following:

4. Release the steering wheel in Introduc- tion on page 274.

5.

Please note the following message: Auto- matic steering enabled. Pay at- tention to your surroundings. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).

During the parking manoeuvre, the system on- ly takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessary, change gears and brake.

6.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays the message to go forwards Fig. 250 or Fig. 251 .

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays the message Park Assist finished.

The progress bar 7 indicates the distance to cover page 279.

7.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As- sist system has finished turning the steering wheel.

OR: until the symbol on the instrument pan- el display switches off.

8. Select first gear.

Do the following:

9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig- nal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis- play shows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for- ward and back until it centres it in the space Fig. 250 or Fig. 251 .

10.

For best results, wait at the end of each ma- noeuvre until the Park Assist system has finish- ed turning the steering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre ends when a corre- sponding message is displayed on the instru- ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.

Note If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely during parking, the result may not be the best.

280

Driver assistance systems

Exiting a parking space with Park Assist (only for parallel spaces)

Fig. 252 On the instrument panel display: driving off from perpendicular parking.

Key to the Fig. 252: Parked vehicle Your vehicle in reverse gear Progress bar to indicate the distance left to cover Message giving the proposed manoeuvre to exit the parking space

Necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist Only for parallel parking spaces The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 225. Length of the space: length of the vehicle + 0.5 metres

1

2

3

4

Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Exiting a parking space Do the following:

For parallel parking spaces

1. The necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist have to be met page 281.

2. Switch on the engine page 215.

3. Press the button Fig. 247.

A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on.

4. Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards the road you will enter when exiting the park- ing space.

5. Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R.

For parallel parking spaces

6.

Release the steering wheel in Introduc- tion on page 274.

Please note the following message: Auto- matic steering enabled. Pay at- tention to your surroundings. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).

When exiting the parking space, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessary, change gears and brake.

7.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard.

OR: go backwards until the instrument panel display shows the message to go forward.

The progress bar Fig. 252 3 indicates the distance to cover page 279.

8.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As- sist system has finished turning the steering wheel.

OR: press down the brake pedal until the symbol on the instrument panel display switches off.

281

Driving

For parallel parking spaces

9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig- nal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis- play shows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for- ward and back until it can exit the space.

10.

The vehicle can exit the space when a corre- sponding message is displayed on the instru- ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.

Take charge of the steering with the turning angle set by the Park Assist system.

11. Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parking space.

Automatic braking intervention by Park Assist

Park Assist helps the driver by automatically braking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking in time .

Automatic braking intervention to avoid exceeding the speed limit To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving a parking space, the brakes may activate au-

tomatically. After automatically activating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a parking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activated once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- ing space. If the speed of approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre- sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damages Depending on certain conditions, the Park Assist system can automatically brake the vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly actioning and holding down the brake ped- al . Following this the driver must press the brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reduce damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- ishing.

WARNING The automatic braking intervention by Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The sys- tem is not a replacement for driver aware- ness. The Park Assist system is subject to cer- tain limitations inherent to the system. In certain situations, the automatic braking intervention may only work in a limited way or not work at all.

Always be ready to use the brakes your- self! The automatic braking intervention will end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After- wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma- noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

Assorted assistance systems which vary depending on the equipment fitted in the car will help you when parking or manoeuvring:

Parking System Plus. It assists the driver by visually and audibly warning them about obstacles detected in front and behind the vehicle page 284.

Rear parking aid. It is an audible and visual assistant that warns about obstacles loca- ted behind the vehicle page 288.

WARNING Always pay attention, also when looking straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle surroundings. The assistance systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. When inserting or removing the vehicle from a parking space, or when performing

282

Driver assistance systems

similar manoeuvres the driver always as- sumes the responsibility. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not reg- istered. Pay special attention to children and animals. Always keep visual control of the sur- roundings: use the mirrors for additional help.

CAUTION Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- fected by different factors that may lead to damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- rounds: Under certain circumstances, the system does not detect or display certain objects: Objects such as chains, trailer draw

bars, fences, posts and thin trees. Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall. Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- der snow.

Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- sors' signals. The system cannot detect these objects or people wearing such clothes correctly.

Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- ted by external sound sources. In certain circumstances this may prevent them from detecting people or objects. Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give any further warn- ing. In certain circumstances, objects such as high kerbs that could damage the bot- tom of the vehicle are not detected either. If the first warning from the Parking Aid is ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera- ble damage. The knocks or damage on the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle un- derbody can adjust the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the parking aid function. In this case, have the function checked by a specialised workshop. A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the reg- istration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause: false detections, loss of sensor visibility.

Note In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in the detected area, e.g:

with rough or cobbled floors or ground with long grass;

with external ultrasound sources, such as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles equipped with ultrasound systems;

in downpours, intense snow, hail or dense exhaust gases,

if the number plate is not perfectly se- cured to the bumper surface,

or in locations such as the brow of a hill.

In order to guarantee good system oper- ation, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other objects. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, ap- ply it directly only very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm. Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the operation of the Parking Aid. Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist. In order to familiarise yourself with the system, it is advised that you practice park- ing in an area or car park that is free from traffic. There must be good weather and light conditions.

283

Driving

The volume and tone of the warnings can be modified, in addition to the indications page 289. In vehicles without an infotainment sys- tem, these parameters can be modified in a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised workshop. Please observe information on towing a trailer page 290. The display on the Easy Connect screen shows a slight time delay.

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 253 Represented area.

During parking, Parking System Plus assists the driver by visually and audibly warning

them about obstacles detected in front of and behind the vehicle.

There are ultrasound sensors integrated in the front and rear bumpers. When they de- tect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings and visually on the Easy Connect system.

In case of risk of rear or front collision, an au- dible warning will be emitted. You can tell whether the risk is in front of or behind the ve- hicle by choosing different sound frequencies on Easy Connect.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues and the like, as this could affect the system's opera- tion. Cleaning instructions page 332.

The approximate measurement range of the sensors is:

1.20 m 1.60 m 0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- val between the audible warnings will be re- duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the warning will be constant: do not continue to move forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle, the volume of the warning begins to reduce after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning).

A

B

C

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve- hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me- tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missing areas are screened and obstacles at the sides of the vehicle are displayed Fig. 253 C .

Special features of ParkPilot with Area View In the following situations the screened area on the side of the vehicle is automatically hid- den:

When a vehicle door is opened. When the ASR is switched off. When there is ASR or ESC regulation. If the vehicle remains stationary for more than approximately 3 minutes.

284

Driver assistance systems

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 254 Centre console: parking aid button (depending on the version).

Manual connection of Parking Aid Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid Press the button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- play (the audible sounds remain active) Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system. OR press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle that is in its forwards path at a speed below

15 km/h (9 mph) page 285. The obstacle is detected from a distance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic connection is activated in the infotainment system. A reduced display is shown. OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid Move the selector lever to position P. OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im- age (Rear View Camera RVC) Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard and the button symbol will light up yellow when the system is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 255 Miniature indication of automatic ac- tivation.

When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto- matically, a miniature of the vehicle and the segments will appear on the left of the dis- play Fig. 255.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap- proaching an obstacle located in front of the vehicle. It only operates every time the speed is reduced below approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the button, the following actions must be carried out in order for it to automatically switch on:

Switch off the ignition and switch it on again. OR: accelerate above 15 km/h (9 mph) be- fore reducing speed below this number again.

285

Driving

OR: place the selector lever in position P and then move it from this position. OR: switch on and off the automatic activa- tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aid miniature indication can be switched on and off from the Easy Connect system menu page 34:

Switch the ignition on. Select: Infotainment button SETTINGS > Parking and manoeuvring function but- ton. Select the Automatic activation option. When the function button check box is activa- ted , the function is on.

If the system has been activated automati- cally, an audible sound warning will only be given when obstacles in front are at a dis- tance of less than 50 cm.

CAUTION The automatic connection of the Parking Aid only works when you are driving slowly. If driving style is not adapted to the circum- stances, an accident and serious injury or damage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 256 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- nect system screen.

The distance of separation from the obstacle can be estimated using the segments around the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

they are displayed when the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi- cle or further if it is not within the vehi- cle's trajectory or the direction of travel is in the opposite direction to its location, and also when the electronic parking brake is activated.

obstacles located in the vehicle's trajectory and which are more than 30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

obstacles that are less than 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- played in red.

Moreover, with the Media System Plus, Navi System or Navi System Plus systems, a yellow trail indicates the vehicle's expected trajecto- ry based on the steering angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- cles direction of travel, the corresponding audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta- cles are represented in red, including those out of the path. Do not continue to move for- ward (or backward) in Introduction on page 282, in Introduction on page 283 !

Adjusting the display and audible warnings

The settings for the display and audible warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- nect*.

Automatic activation on activates the Automatic activa- tion option page 285.

Red segments:

286

Driver assistance systems

off deactivates the Automatic acti- vation option page 285.

Front volume* Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness* Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front area.

Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness* Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear area.

Adjust volume With the parking aid switched on, the active audio/video source volume will be reduced to the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is switched on, if a message reporting a Parking aid error is displayed on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the system.

If the fault does not disappear before discon- necting the ignition, the next time that the

parking aid is engaged in reverse, no audible signal of the existence of a fault will be is- sued.

If there is a fault in the parking aid system a message will appear on the instrument panel indicating the error.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is displayed on the Easy Connect display in front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area A are dis- played Fig. 253. If a front sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area B are displayed.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.

Driving with a trailer

Fig. 257 Parking assist display on the screen with trailer attached.

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory, when the trailer is connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear sensors will not be activated when reverse gear is engaged, when the selector lever is turned to position R or when the button is pressed.

The distance to possible obstacles at the rear of the vehicle and at its sides will not be dis- played on the screen and will not be indica- ted by means of audible sound signals.

The Easy Connect system screen will only display objects detected at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Braking while manoeuvring func- tion*

3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency braking function is used to minimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the Parking Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring function activates emergency braking when it detects an obstacle in the vehicles path that could cause a collision, driving forwards or in reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is activated automatically. For the system to operate, manoeuvring speed must be be- tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6

287

Driving

mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and 10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking while manoeuvring function will be inactive in the same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once the gear is changed, or the selector levers position is changed, the function will be ac- tive again. The Parking Aids limitations apply.

The braking while manoeuvring function is controlled in the Easy Connect system with the button and the SETTINGS > Park and manoeuvre function buttons.

on permits the use of the braking while manoeuvring function. off does not permit the use of the braking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency braking When the function is deactivated with the Braking while manoeuvring button that appears

on the Parking System screen of the Easy Connect system. Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or bonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an audible and visual assistant that warns of obstacles located be- hind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rear bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings and visually on the Easy Connect system.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the like, as this could affect the system's op- eration. Cleaning instructions page 332.

The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is:

0.60 m 1.60 m

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid Move the selector lever to position P. OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid Press the function button.

Side area: Central area:

Change from reduced view to full view Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- val between the audible warnings will be re- duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the warning will be constant: Do not continue to move forward (or backward) in Intro- duction on page 282, in Introduction on page 283 !

If you maintain separation from the obstacle, the volume of the warning begins to reduce after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning).

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection Engage reverse (for manual gears) or set the selector lever to R (for automatic gears).

Parking Aid disconnection Place the selector level in position P, N or D (for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re- verse (for manual gearboxes).

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain the system active for approximately 8 sec- onds before switching off. During that time, Parking assist will switch off if:

288

Driver assistance systems

The selector lever is moved to position P. OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- play (the audible sounds remain active) Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system. OR press the BACK function button.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid Press the function button.

Switch from reduced to full-screen view if the rear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera RVC) Press the car icon in the reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im- age (Rear View Camera RVC) Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. OR: press the RVC function button.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 258 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- nect system screen.

The distance to the obstacles can be estima- ted with the help of the segments at the rear of the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

they are displayed when the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi- cle or further if the direction of travel is in the opposite direction to its location, and also when the electronic parking brake is activated.

obstacles located in the vehicle's trajectory and which are more than 30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

obstacles that are less than 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- played in red.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- cles direction of travel, the corresponding audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta- cles are represented in red (including those out of the path). Do not continue to reverse in Introduction on page 282, in Introduction on page 283 !

Adjusting the display and audible warnings

The settings for the display and audible warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- nect*.

Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness* Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear area.

Red segments:

289

Driving

Adjust volume With the parking aid switched on, the active audio/video source volume will be reduced to the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is switched on, if a message reporting a Parking aid error is displayed on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the system.

If the fault disappears before disconnecting the ignition, the next time that the parking aid is engaged in reverse, no audible signal of the existence of a fault will be issued.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is displayed on the Easy Connect display.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.

Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory, when the trailer is connected electrically, the Parking Aid will not be activated when reverse gear is engag- ed (manual gears) nor when the selector lev- er is turned to position R (automatic gears).

Rear Assist Rear View Cam- era*

Operating and safety warnings

Fig. 259 Related video

WARNING The Rear Assist does not make it possible to precisely calculate the distance from obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it overcome the system's own limits, hence using it may cause serious accidents and injuries if used negligently or without due care. The driver should be aware of his/her surroundings at all times to ensure safe driving. The camera lens expands and distorts the field of vision and displays the objects on the screen in a different, vague manner. The perception of distances is also distor- ted by this effect. Due to the screen resolution or insuffi- cient light conditions, some items may be displayed in an unsatisfactory manner or not at all. Take special care with thin posts, fences, railings or trees that might not be

displayed on screen and could damage the vehicle. The rear assist has blind spots where it is not possible to represent people or objects (small children, animals and certain ob- jects cannot be detected in its field of vi- sion). Monitor the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and snow, and do not cover it. The system is not a replacement for driv- er awareness. Supervise the parking oper- ation at all times, as well as the vehicle's surrounding area. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen. The images on the rear assist screen are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa- tial depth, protruding parts or holes in the road, for example, are more difficult to de- tect or may not be seen at all. Vehicle load modifies the representation of the orientation lines displayed. The width represented by the lines diminishes with vehicle load. Pay special attention to the vehicle's surroundings when the inside of the vehicle of the luggage compartment is carrying a heavy load. In the following situations, the objects or other vehicles shown in the navigation sys- tem display appear to be further away or

290

Driver assistance systems

closer than they really are: Pay special at- tention: On moving from a horizontal plane to a

slope. On moving from a slope to a horizontal

plane. If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the

rear. When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface or are jutting out from it. These objects may also be outside the camera's an- gle of vision when reversing.

Note It is important to take great care and pay special attention if you are not yet familiar with the system. Rear assist will not be available if the ve- hicle's rear lid is open.

Instructions for use

Fig. 260 On the rear lid handle: location of the rear assist camera.

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver during reverse parking or manoeuvring Fig. 260. The camera image is viewed to- gether with orientation lines projected by the system on the Infotainment system screen. The bottom of the screen displays part of the bumper, which can be used by the driver as a reference point.

Rear assist settings Rear assist offers the user the possibility to change the image's brightness, contrast and colour settings.

To change these settings:

Park the vehicle in a safe place. Apply the parking brake. Switch the ignition on.

If necessary, switch on the Infotainment system. Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. Press the function button displayed on the right of the image. Make the desired adjustments on the menu by pressing the /+ function buttons or by moving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma- noeuvring with the rear assist The system should not be used in the follow- ing cases:

If the image displayed is not very reliable or is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty lens. If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- played very clearly or is incomplete. If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. If the position and installation angle of the camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- end collision. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system To familiarise yourself with the system, the orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- ommends practising parking and manoeu- vring with the rear assist in a place without

291

Driving

too much traffic or in a car park when there are good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lens Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow and ice:

Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- based glass cleaning product and clean the lens with a dry cloth. Remove snow using a small brush. Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lens. Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could damage the camera.

Parking and manoeuvring with the rear assist

Fig. 261 Display on the Infotainment system screen: guidance lines.

Switching the system on and off The rear assist will switch on when the igni- tion is on or the engine running, on engaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang- ing the selector lever to the R position (auto- matic gearbox). The system switches off 8 seconds after disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) or removing the selector lever from the R po- sition (automatic gearbox). The system will also disconnect immediately after the ignition is switched off.

The camera will stop transmitting images above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- verse engaged.

In combination with the Parking System Plus page 284, the camera image will cease to be transmitted immediately when reverse gear is disengaged or when the selector lever is moved from the R position, and the optical information provided by the Parking Aid sys- tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rear assist image can also be concealed:

By pressing one of the Infotainment system buttons on the display. OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that appears on the left of the screen (which switches to the full-screen mode of the Park- ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist image again:

Disengage reverse, or change the selector lever's position, engage reverse again or move the selector lever to position R. OR: Press the RVC function button1)

1) WARNING: the RVC (Rear View Camera) func- tion button will only be activated and available when the reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to position R.

292

Towing bracket device

Meaning of the orientation lines Fig. 261

Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the approximate width of the vehicle plus the rear view mirrors) on the road surface. End of the side lines: the area marked in green ends approximately 2 m behind the vehicle on the road surface. Mid line: indicates a distance of approxi- mately 1 m behind the vehicle on the road surface. Horizontal red line: indicates a safe dis- tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre Place the vehicle in front of the parking space and engage reverse gear (manual gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi- tion (automatic gearbox). Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel so that the side orientation lines lead towards the parking space. Guide the vehicle into the parking space so that the side orientation lines run parallel to it.

1

2

3

4

Towing bracket device

Towing bracket device*

Introduction

The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi- cle, be it factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac- cessory, meets all the national technical and legal requirements for towing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip- ped with a 7-pin connector you can use the corresponding adaptor, which is available as a genuine SEAT accessory.

The maximum authorised towing load is 55 kg.

WARNING Before each journey, make sure that the detachable ball joint is properly fitted and secured in its housing. If the detachable ball joint is not properly fitted and secured, do not use it. Do not use the towing bracket device for towing if it is damaged or has missing parts. Do not modify or adapt the towing device connection. Never unhook the detachable ball joint when the trailer is hitched.

CAUTION Handle the detachable ball joint with care in order to avoid damaging the bumper paintwork.

Note Towing the vehicle with the detachable ball joint page 88.

293

Driving

Description

Fig. 262 Towing bracket device support / de- tachable ball joint / key.

Depending on the country or version, the towing bracket device's detachable ball joint is located:

underneath the floor panel of the luggage compartment.

The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.

The towing device bracket is supplied with a key.

Key to Fig. 262 13-pin connector Safety lug Hook housing Hook housing cap Ball protective cover Detachable ball Locking lever Lock cover Release bolt Lock Locking balls Key

Note Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you lose your key.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Placing in standby position

Fig. 263 Step 1.

Fig. 264 Step 2.

Before assembling it, place the detachable ball in the standby position with the following two steps.

294

Towing bracket device

Step 1. Turn the key in the direction of arrow 1 un- til the part of the key with the holes reaches the top position Fig. 263 (arrow).

Step 2. Grip the detachable ball below the protec- tive cover. Press the release bolt B in the direction of arrow 2 , and at the same time press lever C in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go Fig. 264.

The lever will remain blocked in this position.

Standby position

Fig. 265 Reserve position: position of the lever and the release bolt.

Standby position adjusted properly Key A Fig. 265 is in the released posi- tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac- ing upwards). Lever B Fig. 265 is in the bottom posi- tion. The release bolt C Fig. 265 can be moved.

Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is ready for installation.

CAUTION The key cannot be removed or turned in the standby position.

Assembling the detachable ball - Step 1

Fig. 266 Fitting the detachable ball / Release bolt in the deployed position.

Fitting the detachable ball Remove the hook housing cap 4 Fig. 262 downwards. Set the detachable ball to its standby posi- tion page 294. Grip the detachable ball from below Fig. 266 and insert it into the hook housing

295

Driving

following the direction of arrow 1 until it en- gages audibly .

Lever A turns automatically in the direction of arrow 2 upwards, and the release bolt B moves outwards (the red and green part will be visible) .

If lever A does not turn automatically or the release bolt B does not come out, the de- tachable ball should be removed by turning the lever as far as possible downwards from the housing cavity, and the detachable ball's support surfaces and the cavity should then be cleaned.

WARNING When attaching the detachable ball, keep your hands well away from the reach of the lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers caught. Never try to pull the lever upwards by force to turn the key. The detachable ball would not be secured properly!

Assembling the detachable ball - Step 2

Fig. 267 Locking the lock.

Fig. 268 Placing the cover over the lock.

Do not omit this first step page 295, As- sembling the detachable ball - Step 1 !

Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 until the part of the key with the holes reaches the bottom position Fig. 267.

Remove the key in the direction of arrow 2 . Place cover B in the lock in the direction of arrow 3 Fig. 268 . Check that the detachable ball is securely attached page 297, Checking proper at- tachment.

CAUTION After removing the key, always place the cover over the lever's lock. If the lock be- comes soiled it will be impossible to insert the key. Keep the towing bracket device's housing cavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre- vent the detachable ball from being prop- erly secured! If the detachable ball is removed, always place the cap on the hook's housing.

296

Towing bracket device

Checking proper attachment

Fig. 269 Detachable ball properly attached.

Whenever you go to use the detachable ball, make sure that it is properly attached first.

Detachable ball properly attached. The detachable ball will not fall out of the housing cavity after a major knock or jerk. Lever A Fig. 269 is fully raised. The release bolt B Fig. 269 is sticking fully out (the red and green part is visible). The key has been removed. Cover C Fig. 269 is placed over the lock.

WARNING When removing the detachable ball, keep your hands well away from the reach of the lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers caught.

The towing bracket device should only be used if the detachable ball has been prop- erly locked!

Removing the detachable ball - Step 1

Fig. 270 Removing the lock cover.

Fig. 271 Releasing the lock.

Remove cover A from the lock in the direc- tion of arrow 1 Fig. 270. Insert key B into the lock in the direction of arrow 2 Fig. 271. Turn the key in the direction of arrow 3 un- til the part of the key with the holes is facing upwards.

WARNING Never remove the detachable ball joint when the trailer is hitched.

Note Before you remove the detachable ball, you are advised to place the protective cover on the ball coupling.

297

Driving

Removing the detachable ball - Step 2

Fig. 272 Releasing the detachable ball.

Do not omit this first step page 297, Re- moving the detachable ball - Step 1 !

Releasing the detachable ball Grip the detachable ball from below. Press the release bolt A in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go, and at the same time press lever B in the direction of arrow 2 as far as it will go.

In this position, the detachable ball is loose and will fall/drop freely downwards. If this does not occur when you release it, press it with the other hand from above.

The detachable ball locks into the standby position at the same time and is therefore ready to be reinserted into the hook housing .

Fit the cap 4 Fig. 262 onto its housing.

WARNING Never leave the detachable ball loose in the luggage compartment. It could cause damage in the luggage compartment in the case of abrupt braking, and even jeopard- ise passenger safety!

CAUTION If you hold the lever and do not press down on it as far as you can, after you re- move the detachable ball, the latter will continue upwards and will not lock into the standby position. The detachable ball should be placed in this position before the next assembly. Keep the detachable ball in the standby position, with the key inserted into the box while you place it facing downwards with the side opposite to the one where the key is inserted. The key could get damaged! When operating the lever, do not apply too much pressure (for example, do not stand on it)!

Note Remove any dirt from the detachable ball before you put it away with the vehicle tools.

Operation and care

Put the cover on the housing cavity so that dirt cannot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer, always check the ball coupling and apply suitable grease if necessary.

Use the protective cover when putting the de- tachable ball away to keep the luggage compartment clean.

Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur- faces and use a suitable cleaning product.

CAUTION The top part of the hook housing is greased. Make sure that the grease has not been removed.

Trailer towing

What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer?

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equipment.

If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con- sult page 302.

298

Towing bracket device

Connectors Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. It is available at any Technical Service.

Trailer weight/drawbar load Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the vehicle climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be re- duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer. When possible, operate the trailer with the maxi- mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbar loads that are given on the data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes

only. The correct towing bracket figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle documentation or on page 341, Techni- cal specifications.

Distributing the load Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them moving.

Tyre pressure The maximum permissible tyre pressure val- ues are shown on the sticker on the rear part of the left front door frame. Set the tyre pres- sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.

Exterior mirrors Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the standard rear vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you should have additional exterior mirrors fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.

Tow rope Always use a cable between the vehicle and the trailer page 299.

Trailer rear lights The trailer's rear lights should comply with the statutory safety regulations page 299.

WARNING Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.

Note Towing a trailer places additional de- mands on the vehicle. We recommend ad- ditional services between the normal in- spection intervals if the vehicle is used fre- quently for towing a trailer. Find out whether special regulations ap- ply to towing a trailer in your country.

Hitching and connecting the trailer

Fig. 273 Diagram: assignment of the pins of the trailer's electrical socket.

299

Driving

Key of the Schematic diagram Fig. 273:

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Cable without positive charge

11 Earth, pin 10

12 Unassigned

13 Earth, pin 9

Electrical socket for trailer The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle. If the system de- tects that a trailer has been connected elec- trically, the electrical equipment on the trailer will receive voltage through this connection.

Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for example, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10 is

only powered when the engine is running. The charge wire (pin 10) charges, for example, a caravan battery.

Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected to each other to avoid discharging or damaging the vehicle's battery.

The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13, should never be connected to each other to avoid overloading the electrical system.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you will need to use an adapter cable. In this case the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts

Side lights (total) 100 Watts

Rear lights (total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

Never exceed the values indicated!

Note If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- rectly connected, the vehicle electronics may be damaged. If the trailer absorbs excessive electric current, the vehicle electronics may be damaged.

Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sour- ces. Only use the connections intended for providing electric current to the trailer.

Ball coupling of towing bracket de- vice*

The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the ball coupling of the towing bracket.

WARNING The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compart- ment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.

Note By law, the ball coupling must be re- moved if a trailer is not being towed if it ob- scures the number plate.

300

Towing bracket device

Driving with a trailer

Fig. 274 Turn the 13-pin connector.

Before driving Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and remove it in the direction of the arrow Fig. 274. Remove the protective cover 5 Fig. 262 upwards.

After driving Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and insert it in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig. 274. Fit the protective cover 5 Fig. 262 on the ball coupling.

Safety lug The safety lug B Fig. 274 is used to hook up the trailer's retainer cable.

On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retainer cable should have slack in all the trailer po- sitions with respect to the vehicle (sharp bends, reverse gear, etc.).

Headlights The front part of the vehicle may be raised when the trailer is connected and the light may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the headlight range adjuster page 1401).

WARNING Never use the safety lug to tow! Adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. All work on the electrical system must be carried out only by specialised workshops. Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem to the electrical connections of the rear lights or any other power sources. After hooking up the trailer and connect- ing the socket, check that all the trailer's rear lights are working properly.

Note If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting, check the fuses in the instrument panel fuse box page 49. The contact between the retainer cable and the safety lug may give rise to me- chanical wear in the lug's surface protec- tion. This wear will not prevent the safety lug from operating properly or cause any fault and is excluded from the warranty. When connecting and disconnecting the trailer, the towing vehicle's handbrake should be applied.

Anti-theft alarm

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- gered when the electrical connection be- tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted.

Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system before connecting or disconnecting a trailer page 131.

Conditions for the integration of a trailer in the anti-theft alarm system. The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an- ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracket device.

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED xenon headlights.

301

Driving

The trailer is connected electrically to the towing vehicle by the trailer connector. The electrical system of the vehicle and the trailer are prepared for operation. The vehicle is locked with the ignition key and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

CAUTION For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear LED lights are not integrated in the an- ti-theft alarm system.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.

Weight distribution The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight distribution.

Speed The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re- duced with increasing speed. For this reason, it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in an unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies es- pecially when driving downhill.

You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak- ing. Never try to stop the snaking by in- creasing speed.

Always brake in due course. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerk- ing that can be caused by locking of trailer wheels. Select a low gear in due course be- fore going down a steep downhill. This ena- bles you to use the engine braking to slow down the vehicle.

Reheating At very high temperatures and during pro- longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high engine speed, always monitor the coolant temperature gauge page 113.

Electronic Stability Control* The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer in case of skidding or rocking.

Retrofitting a towing bracket*

Fig. 275 Attachment points for towing bracket.

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve- hicle is purchased, this must be completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

302

Towing bracket device

The attachment points for the towing bracket A are on the lower part of the vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi- mum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

Elevation values for securing the towing brack- et:

B 65 mm (minimum)

C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehi- cle)

D 1,033 mm

E 322 mm

F 338 mm

Fitting a towing bracket Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a tow- ing bracket, please contact a Technical Serv- ice to check whether your cooling system needs modification. The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa- rate control lamp). Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and reinstalled.

The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow- er socket must be connected to the vehicle electrical system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools. Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop. If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal- led, there is a serious danger of accident. For your own safety, please observe the tow bracket manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION If the power socket is incorrectly instal- led, this could cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.

Note SEAT recommends that the towing hooks be fitted at a specialised workshop. Con- sult your SEAT dealer in case additional modifications to your vehicle are necessa- ry. Due to the specific design of the exhaust, the fitting of a conventional towing hook is not recommended for some sportier ver-

sions. Please consult your Technical Serv- ice.

303

Practical tips

Practical tips

Accessories and modifi- cations to the vehicle

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand- ard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical changes to your vehicle, we recommend that you consult your Technical Service.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufacturer regarding accessories and spare parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Ap- proved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in question is suitable, relia- ble and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the necessary experience and facilities to en- sure that parts are correctly and professio- nally installed.

Despite a continuous observation of the mar- ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability, safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has

not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if these parts have been ap- proved by an official testing agency or are covered by an official approval certificate.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- rect impact on the driver's control of the vehi- cle, such as a cruise control system or elec- tronically-controlled suspension, must be ap- proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's au- thorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit- ted which do not serve to control the vehicle itself, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops or ventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity declaration).

WARNING Accessories, for example telephone hold- ers or cup holders, should never be fitted on the covers, or within the working range, of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci- dent.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac- cording to our specifications. Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components

or software in the vehicle may cause mal- functions. Due to the way the electronic com- ponents are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by the faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of components, and also invalidate your vehicle registration docu- ments.

SEAT Technical Services cannot be held lia- ble for any damage caused by modifications and/or work incorrectly performed. For this reason, we recommend having all work per- formed by a SEAT Technical Service using SEAT Original Spare Parts.

WARNING Any type of work or modification performed incorrectly on your vehicle can lead to mal- functions and can cause accidents.

Radio transmitters and office equipment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation) Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT generally authorises in-vehicle installations of approved types of radio transmitters provi- ded that:

The aerial is installed correctly.

304

Checking and refilling levels

The aerial is installed on the exterior of the vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). The effective transmitting power does not exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- shop will be able to inform you about options for installing and operating radio transmitters with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters Commercial mobile telephones or radio equipment might interfere with the electron- ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be due to:

No external aerial. External aerial incorrectly installed. Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside the vehicle without a properly installed exter- nal aerial .

Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.

Business equipment Retrofit installation of business or private equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- ded the equipment cannot interfere with the

driver's immediate control of the vehicle and that any such equipment carries the mark. Any retrofit equipment that could influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type approval for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.

WARNING Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without a properly installed external aerial can create excessive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.

Note The posterior fitting of electric and elec- tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its licence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under certain circumstances. Please use the mobile telephone/radio operating instructions.

Checking and refilling lev- els

Refuelling

Refuelling

Read the additional information carefully page 46

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor- rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the tank is full. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

WARNING Fuel is highly flammable and can cause serious burns and other injuries. Never smoke or come into contact with

sparks when filling the fuel tank of the vehicle or a spare fuel canister with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.

Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.

For safety reasons we do not recom- mend carrying a spare fuel canister in

305

Practical tips

the vehicle. The canister could be dam- aged in an accident and leak.

If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following: Never fill the spare fuel canister inside

the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in con- tact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.

CAUTION Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately. Never run the tank completely dry. Irreg- ular fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalyt- ic converter and cause damage.

When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel engine the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds before starting the en- gine. Subsequently, when you start the en- gine it may take longer than normal to start firing (up to one minute). This is due to the fact that the fuel system has to purge itself of air before starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto- matic filler nozzle has switched off, this may cause the fuel to overflow if it be- comes warm.

Note There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- essary, request assistance from special- ised personnel.

Fuel

Fuel identification1)

Fig. 276 Sticker on the tank cap (identification of the fuel)

Fuels are identified with different symbols. Depending on the fuel, the different symbols are on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi- cle. The identification serves to prevent con- fusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (E stands for Etha- nol). The number indicates the percent- age of ethanol in the petrol. E5 means, for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. Diesel with biodiesel (B stands for Bio- diesel). The number indicates the per- centage of biodiesel in the diesel. B7

1

2

1) Depending on country 306

Checking and refilling levels

means, for example, a proportion of bio- diesel of max. 7%. Natural gas: CNG means Compressed Natural Gas.

Type of petrol 3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- verter and must only be run on unleaded petrol. The petrol must comply with the standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled (E10)1). The types of petrol are differentiated by using the octane numbers (RON) or via the anti-knock index (AKI).

The following pieces of text show the infor- mation included in the corresponding stickers on the tank lid (examples):

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or normal 91 octane petrol at least We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91

3

octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power loss).

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or super 95 octane petrol at least We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power loss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ble.

CAUTION Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. E30 - E100 button must not be used. The

fuel system would be damaged. Exception: vehicles with Totalflex engine page 308, Ethanol fuel. A single refuelling with leaded fuel or other metal additives entails a permanent deterioration of the effectiveness of the catalytic converter. Only use fuel additives that have been approved by SEAT. The products that con- tain substances to increase the octane rat- ing or decrease knocking may contain met- al additives that damage the engine and catalytic converter. This type of products must not be used. Do not use fuels shown in the pump as containing metals. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Risk of engine damage! High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

Note Fuel with an octane rating higher than the one required by the engine can be used. In countries in which there is no sulphur- free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- phur content fuel.

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.

307

Practical tips

Ethanol fuel 3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with with the marking Petrol/ethanol.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord- ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel- led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that page 307, Type of pet- rol

Note SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu- sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de- crease impurities that using E100 ethanol fuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel fuel 3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine

Please note the information on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according to standard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- tures, thus affecting the start or operation of the engine. To ensure that you can continue to use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold in gas stations is provided -depending on the station- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em- ployee of the petrol station whether their die- sel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suited for current and future temperatures.

CAUTION Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol, heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents as they can cause severely damage the fuel system and the engine. If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not start the engine under any circumstances. Risk of damaging the fuel system and the engine! Obtain technical assistance.

AdBlue

Information on AdBlue

Fig. 277 Related video

The consumption of AdBlue depends on your personal driving style, the temperature of the system and on the outdoor tempera- ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue freezes at temperatures of -11C (+13F). The system has heating elements that guarantee its operation even at low tem- peratures.

The AdBlue tank level capacity is approxi- mately 10.4 litres.

The AdBlue tank should never be empty. When the distance to empty drops below 2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue tank will appear on the dash panel display page 309. If this information is ignored, later on it will not be possible to re-start the engine. If this warning does not appear, it is not necessary to refill the AdBlue tank.

1) This motor is only available in some markets. 308

Checking and refilling levels

AdBlue is a registered brand of the German Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA) and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid).

CAUTION Filling the AdBlue tank excessively can cause damage to the tank.

Refilling AdBlue

Fig. 278 AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refilling Park the vehicle on a flat surface. If the vehi- cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex- ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb, the level indicator may not detect the load prop- erly.

If a warning message about AdBlue levels appears on the dash panel display, fill at

least the minimum amount required (ap- prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amount will the system detect that AdBlue has been added and you will be able to start the en- gine again. The maximum amount that can be refilled is 11 litres.

Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is not switched off during refilling, the warning to re- fill may continue to appear on the instrument panel display.

Fill with a refill bottle Only use AdBlue that complies with ISO 22241-1. Only use original containers.

Open the tank cover Fig. 278. Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an- ti-clockwise direction. Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- tions, indicated on the refill bottle. Check the expiry date. Remove the cap of the refill bottle. Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler neck vertically and screw the bottle on by hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction. Press the refill bottle in the direction of the filler neck and hold it in this position. Wait until the contents of the refill bottle have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do not compress or break the bottle!

Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di- rection and gently pull it upwards . The AdBlue tank is full when no more liquid comes out of the bottle. Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc- tion until it is tightly closed. Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig- nition. Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- onds for the system to detect the fluid load. Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds before starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re- duction.

Open the tank cap. Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise Fig. 278. Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the first time. Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise until you hear a click.

309

Practical tips

WARNING AdBlue should only be stored in the origi- nal container, which should be tightly closed and kept in a safe place. Never keep AdBlue in empty food con- tainers, bottles or other similar containers. Other people may confuse it for other products. Keep AdBlue out of the reach of chil- dren.

CAUTION When refilling, the nozzle grip should be aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle will not connect automatically. Do not try to add any more additive after the nozzle has stopped for the first time. The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue could spill out. Only use AdBlue that complies with ISO 22241-1. Only use original containers. Never mix AdBlue with water, fuel or ad- ditives. Any type of damage caused by such a mixture will not be covered by the warranty. Never pour AdBlue into the fuel tank. This could result in engine damage. Do not carry the refill bottle inside the vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera- ture changes or damage to the bottle), the AdBlue may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ- ment-friendly manner.

Note You can buy refill bottles that are adequate for AdBlue use at SEAT dealerships.

Working in the engine com- partment

Safety notes for work in the engine compartment

Read the additional information carefully page 17

Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compartment:

1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.

2. Apply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the se- lector lever to position P, depending on the case.

4. Wait for the engine to cool down.

5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

6. Raise the bonnet page 17.

You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work carried out by a special- ised workshop if you are uncertain.

All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool- ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, are under constant development. SEAT provides a constant flow of information to Technical Services concerning modifications. For this reason, we recommend you have service flu- ids and consumables replaced by a Techni- cal Service. Please observe the relevant in- structions page 304. The engine compart- ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area .

WARNING All work on the engine or in the engine com- partment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and burns, ac- cidents and even fire. Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bon- net. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition. Apply the handbrake and move the gear lever to neutral or selector lever to position P.

310

Checking and refilling levels

Keep children away from the vehicle. Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns. Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire haz- ard. Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec- trical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 58. The battery could explode. Never touch the radiator fan. It is temper- ature controlled and could start automati- cally, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition! Never cover the engine with additional in- sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of fire! Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised! Protect face, hands and arms by cover- ing the cap with a large, thick cloth to pro- tect against escaping coolant and steam. Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the engine compartment. If you have to work underneath the vehi- cle, you must use suitable stands addition- ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for

securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury. If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following: Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system. Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro- tating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewel- lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting clothes.

Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary precau- tions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.

If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical components, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above warnings: Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network. The vehicle must be unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

Do not smoke. Never work near naked flames.

Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.

WARNING If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it could suddenly open while driving leaving the driver without visibility. This could re- sult in a serious accident. After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured by the locking mechanism in the lock carrier piece. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels. While driving, if you notice that the bon- net is not correctly closed then stop imme- diately and close it correctly. Only open and close the bonnet when there is nobody within its range.

CAUTION When topping up service fluids, make sure not to mistake them. Using the wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and en- gine damage!

For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi- ronment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a specialised workshop.

311

Practical tips

Checking levels

Fig. 279 Diagram for the location of the various el- ements.

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank Engine oil level dipstick Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Vehicle battery Windscreen washer reservoir

The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components mentioned

1

2

3

4

5

6

above. These operations are described in page 310.

Overview You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical specifica- tions as of page 341.

Note The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- tial for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use only those oils that comply with VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should appear on the container of the service oil; when the contain- er displays the specific standards for petrol

312

Checking and refilling levels

and diesel engines together, it means that the oil can be used for both types of engines.

We recommend that the oil change indicated in the Maintenance Programme, be per- formed by a technical service or specialised workshop.

The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in the page 47.

Service intervals Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on time/distance travelled).

Flexible service intervals (LongLife service intervals*) Special oils and processes have been devel- oped which, depending on the characteris- tics and individual driving profiles, enable the extension of the oil change service (LongLife service intervals).

Because this oil is essential for extending the service intervals, it must only be used ob- serving the following indications:

Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service inter- vals. Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 314 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-

vals page 47 (up to a maximum of 0.5 litres).

Fixed service intervals* If your vehicle does not have the LongLife service interval or it has been disabled (by request), you may use oils for fixed service intervals, which also appear in page 47. In this case, your vehicle must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever comes first) page 328.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter* Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash formation, may be used in diesel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- fore:

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. page 47

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corre- sponding VW specifications and recom- mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not continue driving! Engine oil pressure too low.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accom- panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en- gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil page 314.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible. Top up the oil at the next opportunity page 314.

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the system inspected. Until then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refuel.

313

Practical tips

Checking engine oil level

Fig. 280 Engine oil dipstick.

Read the additional information carefully page 46

Checking oil level Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating temperature is reached and then stop.

Wait for about two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out again and check the oil lev- el. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

Depending on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil

consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNING Any work carried out in the engine com- partment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. When working in the engine compart- ment, always observe the safety warnings page 310.

CAUTION If the oil level is above area Fig. 280 A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic con- verter. Contact a Technical Service.

Topping up engine oil

Read the additional information carefully page 46

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in Safety notes for work in the engine compartment on page 310.

The position of the filler neck is shown in the corresponding engine compartment image page 312.

Engine oil specification page 47.

WARNING Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents when topping up.

CAUTION If the oil level is above area Fig. 280 A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic con- verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above zone Fig. 280 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and leak into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- tem.

Changing engine oil

Read the additional information carefully page 46

The engine oil must be changed at the inter- vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.

The oil change intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.

314

Checking and refilling levels

WARNING Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required! Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- serve the warnings page 310, Safety notes for work in the engine compartment. Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries. Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm. Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil. Engine oil is poisonous! Used engine oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children.

CAUTION No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine damage. Any damage caused by the use of such addi- tives would not be covered by the factory warranty.

For the sake of the environment Because of disposal problems and the special tools and specialist knowledge re-

quired, we recommend that you have the engine oil and filter changed by a Techni- cal Service. Never pour oil down drains or into the ground. Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large enough to hold all the engine oil.

Cooling system

Topping up coolant

Read the additional information carefully page 47

Top up coolant when the level is below the MIN (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Switch the ignition off.

Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the marks. When the engine is hot, it may be slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant Wait for the engine to cool down.

Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left .

Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you could damage the engine. If there is no coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- tinue driving. You should obtain professional assistance .

If there is still some coolant in the expansion tank, top up to the upper mark.

Top up with coolant until the level becomes stable.

Screw the cap back on correctly.

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle straight to a specialised workshop to have the cooling system examined. If there are no leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of coolant can only occur if the coolant boils and is forced out of the system as a result of overheating.

WARNING If your vehicle is immobilised for techni- cal reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Switch off the engine, switch on the blinkers and place the emergency trian- gles. Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine

315

Practical tips

compartment, there is a risk of burns. Wait until you can no longer see or hear escap- ing steam or coolant. The engine compartment is a dangerous area. Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings page 310.

WARNING The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of burns! The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze should be stored in the original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Fail- ure to comply could result in poisoning. If working inside the engine compart- ment, remember that, even when the igni- tion is switched off, the radiator fan may start up automatically, and therefore there is a risk of injury.

WARNING If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may fail lead- ing to serious damage. Please make sure that the percentage of additive is correct with respect to the low-

est expected ambient temperature in the zone in which the vehicle is to be used. When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- cle would be immobilised. In this case, the heating would not work either and inade- quately dressed passengers could die of cold.

CAUTION Do not top up the expansion tank with cool- ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter the cooling system. In this case, stop driving. Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.

CAUTION The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not ap- proved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to the engine and the engine cooling system. If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indi- cates that the G13 additive has been mixed with an inadequate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case! This could result in serious faults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, they should be collected and correctly dis- posed of, with respect to the environment.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level

Read the additional information carefully page 48

The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine compart- ment image page 312. The brake fluid res- ervoir has a black and yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.

However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instrument panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low page 117.

WARNING Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 310.

316

Checking and refilling levels

Changing the brake fluid

The Maintenance Programme indicates brake fluid change intervals.

We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Service.

Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings in Safety notes for work in the engine compartment on page 310 in section Safety notes for working in the engine compartment.

In the course of time, brake fluid becomes hy- groscopic and absorbs water from the ambi- ent air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which could impair the braking effect.

Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the VW 501 14 standard.

You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Service. If none is available, use only high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

Using any other kind of brake fluid or one that is not of a high quality may affect operation of the brake system and reduce its effective-

ness. Never use a brake fluid if the container does not state that it complies with VW 501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

WARNING Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im- pairs the braking effect. Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 310. Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk. Perform the brake fluid change accord- ing to the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the brake system for too long. This would seriously affect the effectiveness of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTION Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork immediately.

For the sake of the environment The brake pads and brake fluid must be collected and disposed of according the applicable regulations. The SEAT Technical Service network has the necessary equip-

ment and qualified personnel for collecting and disposing of this waste material.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and topping up the wind- screen washer reservoir water

Read the additional information carefully page 48

The windscreen washer is supplied with liq- uid from the windscreen washer reservoir in the engine compartment. It has a capacity of approximately 3 litres.

The tank is in the engine compartment.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- screen and headlights. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter- gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.

WARNING Any work carried out in the engine com- partment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

317

Practical tips

When working in the engine compart- ment, always observe the safety warnings page 310.

CAUTION Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen washer fluid. Always use approved windscreen cleans- ing products diluted as per instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solu- tions, the tiny holes in the fan-shaped noz- zles could become blocked.

Vehicle battery

Symbols and warnings on handling the battery

Read the additional information carefully page 48

Wear eye protection

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- tective gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited!

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the bat- tery and the electrical system: Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles containing lead. Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralise any acid splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mis- take, consult a doctor immediately. Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When handling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury. A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- leased when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well- ventilated room only. Keep children away from acid and bat- teries. Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition

and all electrical devices. The negative ca- ble on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need on- ly switch off the light. Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un- locking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered. When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable. Switch off all electrical devices before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire. Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in ex- plosions and chemical burns. Always re- place a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0C (+32F). Ensure that the vent hose is always con- nected to the battery. Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

CAUTION Never disconnect the battery if the igni- tion is switched on or if the engine is

318

Checking and refilling levels

running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic components. Do not expose the battery to direct sun- light over a long period of time, as the in- tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing. If the vehicle is left standing in cold con- ditions for a long period, protect the bat- tery from freezing. If it freezes it will be damaged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer charging the bat- tery. You should immediately drive to the nearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary because this will drain the battery.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

The electrolyte level should be checked reg- ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- tries and in older batteries.

Open the bonnet and open the battery cover at the front in Safety notes for work in the engine compartment on page 310 in Symbols and warnings on handling the battery on page 318. For vehicles with the battery under the spare wheel, open the rear lid and lift the floor covering. The battery is located next to the spare wheel.

Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the battery.

If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 312.

The magic eye indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour, depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.

There are two different colours:

Black: correct charge status.

Transparent/light yellow: the battery must be replaced. Contact a specialised work- shop.

Charging or changing the battery

The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires specialist knowledge.

If you often drive short distances or if the ve- hicle is not driven for long periods, the battery should be checked by a specialised work- shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the battery might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- ommend you have the vehicle battery checked by a Technical Service where it will be re-charged or replaced.

Charging the battery The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled environ- ment.

319

Practical tips

Replacing a vehicle battery The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte- nance, performance and safety specifica- tions of your vehicle.

WARNING We recommend you use only mainte- nance-free or cycle free leak-proof batter- ies which comply with standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001 August or later. Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Symbols and warnings on handling the battery on page 318.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis- posed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the obstacle.

Check from time to time if the tyres are damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or dents). Remove any foreign objects em- bedded in the treads.

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- placed immediately.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Replace any missing valve caps as soon as possible.

Mark the wheels before taking them off so that they rotate in the same direction when put back.

When removed, the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.

New tyres New tyres do not give maximum grip straight away and should therefore be run in by driving carefully and at moderate speeds for about the first 500 km (300 miles). This will also increase the useful life of the tyres.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- cording to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.

Low profile tyres Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and a greater rim diameter along with a lower height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a more agile driving behaviour. However, on roads that are in poor condition, this might af- fect comfort and cause more noise.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- ly than standard tyres, for instance due to strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyre pressure is particularly important page 321.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive with special care when driving on roads in poor condition.

Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re- garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on the rims.

320

Wheels

If the rims and tyres have received a heavy impact or have been damaged, have them checked and, if required, replaced at a speci- alised workshop.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damage Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed immediately if there is any reason to suspect that damage may have occurred. In- spect the tyres for damage. If no external damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the car inspected.

Tyres with directional tread pattern An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ways note the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan- ing, excessive noise and wear.

Retrofitting accessories If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or wheel trims, we recommend that you consult with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice regarding current techniques.

WARNING New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents. Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident. If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Fig. 281 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

The maximum tyre pressure values are shown on a sticker stuck to the back of the left front door frame Fig. 281.

1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The values refer to Sum- mer tyres.

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be re- duced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure The correct tyre pressure is especially impor- tant at high speeds. The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a journey.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- ing comfort (comfort tyre pressure). When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con- sumption may increase slightly.

WARNING A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident! At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

321

Practical tips

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prematurely and the ve- hicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sumption.

Service life of tyres

Fig. 282 Tyre tread wear indicators.

Fig. 283 Diagram for changing wheels.

The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style and fitting.

Wear indicators The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators Fig. 282, running across the tread. De- pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark- ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let- ters TWI or other symbols) indicate the po- sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini- mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in ex- port countries .

Tyre pressure Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this

reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month page 321.

Driving style Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable to change them around as shown Fig. 283. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.

Wheel balance The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encountered in nor- mal driving can cause them to become un- balanced, which results in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel alignment checked by a Technical Service.

322

Wheels

WARNING There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving! The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread wear indicators are worn page 322. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater risk of aqua- planing. At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. This cau- ses it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Risk of acci- dent. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked by a Tech- nical Service. Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres. Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- placed immediately!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sumption.

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. Those approved by SEAT are specially matched to the char- acteristics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road-holding and safe handling .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des- ignations makes it easier to choose the cor- rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa- tions marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/55 R16 91V This contains the following information:

Tyre width in mm Height/width ratio in % Tyre construction: Radial Rim diameter in inches Load rating code Speed rating

The tyres could also have the following infor- mation:

A direction of rotation symbol Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outer side of the wheel).

195 55 R 16 91 V

DOT... 1116... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2016.

We recommend that work on tyres and wheels be carried out by a Technical Service. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- posing of the old tyres.

Any technical service has full information on the technical requirements when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

WARNING We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle handling. Risk of accident. Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all times. Never use old tyres or those with an un- known history of use. If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the brakes is not restricted. This could cause the brake system to overheat. All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circum- ference) and the same tread pattern.

323

Practical tips

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.

Note A SEAT Service Centre should be consul- ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of different sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about the combinations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehi- cles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your model may invalidate the ve- hicle's type approval for use on public roads. If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.

Wheel bolts

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the cor- rect wheel bolts with the right length and cor- rectly shaped bolt heads must be used. This

ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it is the same model page 304.

WARNING If the wheel bolts are not tightened cor- rectly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident. The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them. Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel. If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTION The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Tyre monitoring indicator*

Fig. 284 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys- tem button.

Control lamp

It lights up

The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the value set by the driver .

Or: Fault in the tyre pressure gauge.

The tyre pressure loss indicator compares the revolutions and thus the wheel diameter of each wheel using the ESC. If the wheel diam- eter of a wheel changes, the control indicator of the tyres informs of this fact . The wheel diameter changes when:

Tyre pressure is insufficient. The tyre structure is damaged. The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.

324

Wheels

The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or on steep slopes). The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. The temporary spare wheel is fitted. The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustment After modifying tyre pressure or changing any wheels, the new tyre pressure must be stored in the Easy Connect system with the / button and the SETTINGS function button page 34.

In vehicles without a radio, press and hold down the Fig. 284 button, with the ignition on, until an acoustic signal is heard.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex- ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value for a full load (see the sticker on the back of the left front door frame). If the tyre monitor system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.

WARNING When the tyre pressure control lamp lights up, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden turning or braking ma- noeuvre. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status.

The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked. Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi- tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control lamp may light up belatedly or may func- tion incorrectly.

Note If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp lights up after turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.

Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel)*

Location and use of the temporary spare wheel

Fig. 285 In the boot: remove the subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.

How to use the temporary spare wheel If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of pressure, the temporary spare wheel is only intended for temporary use until you reach a workshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soon as possible.

Please note the following restrictions when using the temporary spare wheel. This

325

Practical tips

temporary spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be changed with the temporary spare wheel from another vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or win- ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tem- porary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel that you have removed and replace the punctured front wheel with this wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles with the Beats Audio sound system (6 speakers with 1 subwoofer)* Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel (carpet) as follows:

Pull the carpet upwards to remove it. Disconnect the cable for the subwoofer speaker Fig. 285 1 . Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise 2 . Remove the subwoofer speaker and the spare wheel.

When replacing the spare wheel, place the subwoofer speaker in the direction indicated by the arrow and with the word FRONT fac- ing forward. Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place.

Removing the 16 temporary spare wheel (without subwoofer) Remove the luggage compartment varia- ble floor to access the wheel and the tools page 155. Loosen the strap that secures the box by pressing on the buckle. Remove the toolbox. Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise and remove it. Press the thread and turn it 90 clockwise or anti-clockwise and remove it. Pull on the front part of the spare wheel to remove it.

WARNING After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possi- ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci- dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left front door frame.

Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: risk of accident! Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: risk of accident! Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci- dent. No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim.

Winter service

Winter tyres

In winter conditions winter tyres will consider- ably improve the vehicle's handling. The de- sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com- pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.

Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure of 0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the pressures specified for summer tyres (see the sticker on the back of the left front door frame).

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's registration doc- umentation. Use only radial winter tyres. All

326

Wheels

tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.

Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The speed rating code page 323, New tyres and wheels determines the following speed limits for winter tyres:

max. 160 km/h (99 mph) max. 180 km/h (112 mph) max. 190 km/h (118 mph) max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These stickers are available from your technical service. The legal requirements of each country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessa- rily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel page 323, New tyres and wheels.

WARNING The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to damage and risk of accident.

Q S T H

For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.

327

Maintenance

Maintenance

SEAT Maintenance Pro- gramme

Service intervals

Service work and digital mainte- nance plan

Log of services performed (Digital Main- tenance Plan) The SEAT dealership or a specialised work- shop records Service receipts in a central system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu- mentation of the service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service receipt after every service carried out con- taining all the services carried out on the sys- tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt is replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- able in some markets. In this case, your SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- rent documentation of the work.

Service works In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT authorised service or specialised workshop documents the following information:

When each one of the services was carried out. Whether a specific repair has been sugges- ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future. If you have expressed a special request for the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will write the work order. The components or fluids that were changed. The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until the next inspection. This information is docu- mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service may vary from one vehicle to another. A special- ised workshop will be able to provide specific information on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic cause an accident and severe in- juries.

Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a SEAT authorised service or speci- alised workshop.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Note Regular services on the vehicle not only maintain its value, but also its correct oper- ation and road safety. For this reason, con- duct the services in accordance with SEAT guidelines.

Fixed service or Flexible service

Services are classified as oil change service and inspection. The service interval display on the instrument panel display serves as a reminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine and the conditions of use of the car, either the Fixed service or the Flexible service will be applied for an oil change service..

How to know which type of service needs to his vehicle Check the tables below:

328

SEAT Maintenance Programme

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type of service Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after 1 yearb)

QI3 Every 10000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI4 Every 15000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI6 Flexible According to the service in- terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the information about the speci- fications of the engine oil according to the VW standard page 46.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible Service Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil change service only has to be performed when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take into account the individual conditions of use and personal driving style. A major component of the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci- fications of the engine oil according to the VW standard page 46.

If you do not want to the flexible service you can select the fixed service However, a fixed service may affect service costs The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service intervals display At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica- ted by the service interval display on the in- strument panel page 114 or in the Vehi- cle settings menu of the infotainment sys- tem page 34. The service interval dis- play gives information for service dates that involve an engine oil change or an inspection. When the time for the corresponding service comes, additional work required, such as the change of brake fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information on the conditions of use

The service intervals and groups are usually based on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad- verse conditions of use, some of the work must be carried out before the next service period or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Frequent short trips. Letting the engine idle for a long period of time, as in the case of taxis. Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. Frequent driving with a trailer (depending on equipment). Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following parts (depending on equipment):

Dust and pollen filter Air Care allergen filter Air filter Toothed chain Particulate filter Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialised workshop will gladly inform you about the need of performing service work between

329

Maintenance

normal service intervals, always considering the conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. Have the services conducted at author- ised SEAT services or specialised work- shops.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Sets of services

Sets of services include all the maintenance works needed to ensure the safety and the smooth running of the vehicle (depending on the conditions of use and the features of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or operating fluids). Maintenance services are divided into inspection and review services. Consult the details of the jobs required for your vehicle at:

Your SEAT authorised service Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- opment of components) the sets of services may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or specialised workshop is always receiving up- dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- ceived for their vehicles and approved by SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. These parts correspond exactly to the manu- facturer's requirements in terms of design, accuracy of the measurements and materi- als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this reason, we always recommend the use of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu- facturer's requirements, are an additional service to you, offering the possibility of re- placing complete sets, such as: light engine, gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical components, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are the same as the factory parts, which are also ap- proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT Original Accessories and SEAT approved accessories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and suitability of these accessories have been in- spected specifically for this type of vehicle. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility (SEAT Service Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your SEAT vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase, your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov- ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad- ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri- od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as you carry out the recommended Inspection and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author- ised Service.

330

Vehicle maintenance

When to extend the Mobility Service, is docu- mented in the inspection and maintenance plan the right to the service.

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a fault or an accident, our assistance services will help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT Mobility Service differs depending on the country in which the vehicle was purchased. For further information ask your SEAT dealership or the SEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect condition of new vehicles. Check the pur- chase agreement or complementary addi- tional documentation provided by your Tech- nical Service to see the conditions and the terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- mation in this regard in your SEAT Official Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic considerations

Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may become a prerequisite to demand the war- ranty in the event of corrosion damage and deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- work.

Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the instructions for application on the packaging.

WARNING Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your health if misused. Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Danger of poisoning!

For the sake of the environment When purchasing car care products, chose products that are compatible with the environment. The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the more damage it can cause to the surface. High temperatures, for instance strong sun- light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt using plenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af- ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaners When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- structions for the equipment. This applies particularly to the operating pressure and the distance between the spraying water. Do not aim the jet directly to the side window gas- kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun- roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho- ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high- pressure cleaner.

331

Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed 60C.

Automatic car wash tunnels Spray the vehicle before starting the car wash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor- amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- structions of the car wash tunnel operator, especially if your vehicle has detachable parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by hand To prevent damage to the vehicle when washing it, first remove the thicker dust and dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner for matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do not apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of water with a leather cloth.

WARNING Only wash the vehicle with the ignition switched off or according to the specifica- tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk of accident! When cleaning the underbody or the in- side of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of cut! After cleaning the brakes could act more slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- dent! In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

CAUTION Before washing the vehicle in an auto- matic car wash, please make sure to re- tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de- ployed electrically! Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job! Do not use sponges, abrasive household sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Risk of damaging the surface! Vehicle parts with matte paint: Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface! Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam- age the appearance of matte paint.

Do not put stickers or magnets on parts with matte paint, as removing them may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment The car should only be washed in special wash bays. These places are prepared to prevent oily water from getting into the public drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc- tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual components of the vehicle can be checked in the following tables. The contents should be understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you have

332

Vehicle maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed. Take he general considerations into account in Take special care with... on page 336.

Exterior cleaning

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with clean- ing product which does not contain solvents Camera lenses - soft cloth with cleaning product with no alco- hol content

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spray with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water

Brake abrasion dust

Acid-free special cleaning product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a steel cleaning product is re- quired

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Paint

Problem Solution

Flaws in the paint Check the paint's colour code in an authorised service and re- store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rust tank

Apply rust remover and then apply hard wax. Go you your specialised workshop if you have any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised work- shop take care of this

The water does not create drop- lets on the clean paint

Maintain with hard wax (at least 2 times a year)

No shine de- spite sober main- tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap- ply paint preservative after- wards if the wax used does not contain preservative ingredi- ents

Tanks, e.g. insect remains, bird droppings, tree sap, road salt

Immediately soften with water and remove with a microfibre cloth

Fat-based dirt, e.g. cosmetic products or sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu- tral soap solutiona) and a soft cloth

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain- ted parts page 331

333

Maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos- sible solvent-free plastic clean- er

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al- lowed to dry before retracting

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Superficial dirt particles

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutral soap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make- up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona). Absorb the dissolved grease and paint particles drying with an absorbent cloth, in case you must treat it with water after- wards

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry with an absorbent cloth, if applica- ble, apply neutral soap solution afterwardsa)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap solutiona)

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth Dry stains: leather cleaner

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make- up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth and leather cleaner Dry stains: grease dissolving spray

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable for leather

334

Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu- larly to protect from sunlight. Use a colour preservative if re- quired

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge. Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive products. If the protective coating on the paint of the rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, scratches, etc., the damage should be re- paired immediately.

Camera lenses Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of cracking the lens! To clean the camera lens, never use abra- sive cleaning products or products with alco- hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows Remove snow and ice from windows and exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To avoid scratches, the scraper should only be pushed in one direction and not moved to and fro. Never remove snow or ice from windows and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. Risk of cracks on the windows! To prevent damage to the heating of the rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements.

Covers/trims Do not use cleaning products or chrome based cleaning agents.

Paint The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust before applying wax or care products. Risk of scratches! Do not apply wax or care products if the vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job!

The ambient rust deposits must not be re- moved through friction. Risk of damaging the paint job! Remove cosmetic products and sunlight immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel The screens, the instrument panel and the trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of scratches! Make sure that the instrument panel is switched off and cooled down before clean- ing. Make sure that no liquid leaks between the instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- age!

Control panels Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. Seat belts and their components must nev- er be cleaned with chemical products, nor should they be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob- jects. Risk of damaging the fabric! If you find any damage to the belt webbing, belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, ask your specialised workshop to replace the belt in question.

335

Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath- er Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara leather with leather cleaning products, sol- vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar products. If the stain is very hard to remove, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it removed there. This will prevent damage. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the seats. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ets or belts can damage the surface. Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasteners are closed.

Natural leather Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar products on leather. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ets or belts can damage the surface. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the seats. Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best to cover the leather.

WARNING Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such as humid weather, darkness or when the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat- ings can also cause the windscreen wiper blades to make noise.

Note Remains of insects can be removed much more easily with previously treated paint. Regular car care treatments can prevent deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationary for a long period of time, contact a qualified workshop. They will gladly inform you about the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regarding the vehicle's battery page 318.

336

Event Data Recorder

Information for the user

Event Data Recorder Description and operation

Your vehicle has an event data recorder (EDR).

The EDRs function is to record data in the event of a mild or serious accident. These da- ta are used to support the analysis of how dif- ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv- ing data and data from the restraint systems, such as:

How different vehicle systems worked. Whether the driver and the occupants were wearing their seat belts. How hard the acceleration or brake pedal was pressed. Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are also recorded. This includes data such as whether the systems were inactive or active and if such action had an impact on the vehicles dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the

aforementioned situations, accelerating or decelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- cludes data from systems such as:

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Emergency braking assistance system (Front Assist). Park Pilot system

The EDR data are only recorded in specific accident situations. No data are recorded in normal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around the vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan- ces are personal data such as name, age, or gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such as criminal proceedings authorities) may relate the contents of the EDR data to other data sources and create a personal reference in the context of an accident inves- tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessary to access (if legally permitted to do so) the vehicle's ODB (On-Board-Diagnose) inter- face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless the owner (or, in Leasing cases, the lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex- ceptions to this, depending on legal or con- tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-related products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field research and in order to improve vehicle system quality. Any data used for the purpo- ses of research will be treated anonymously (in other words, no reference will be made to the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

337

Information for the user

Information about the EU Directive 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara- tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- clare that they comply with Directive 2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declaration is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you to associate the name of the device in the dec- laration of compliance with the features of the vehicle and the terminology used in the on-board documentation.

Features of the vehicle

Name of the device according to the dec- laration of compli- ance

Radiofrequency re- mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477, FS94

Features of the vehicle

Name of the device according to the dec- laration of compli- ance

Radio frequency re- mote control (auxili- ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT - 50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys- tem

MQB-B B

Radar sensors for as- sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Features of the vehicle

Name of the device according to the dec- laration of compli- ance

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex- ternal antenna of the car

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated in dashboard module instrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Big family

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG 720166002

8S7.035.503.B 338

Information about the EU Directive 2014/53/EU

Features of the vehicle

Name of the device according to the dec- laration of compli- ance

Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225 6F9.035.225 3V5.035.577.A 7N0.035.552.J 7N0.035.552.K 7N0.035.552.Q 5F4.035.225 5F4.035.225.A 5F4.035.225.B 5F9.035.225 5F9.035.225.A 5F9.035.225.B 575.035.225 575.035.225.A 575.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all relevant components must include the ad- dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo- nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot include a sticker are listed below, as long as it is legally required:

Radioelectrical equipment fitted in the vehicle

Addresses of the manufacturers

Radiofrequency remote control key

Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. Rixbecker Strae 75 59552 Lippstadt, GERMANY

Radioelectrical equipment fitted in the vehicle

Addresses of the manufacturers

Radio frequency re- mote control (auxiliary heater)

Digades gmbH uere Weberstrae 20 02763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo & Comfort SE Friedrichshafener Str. 9 82205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radar sensors for as- sistance systems

ADC Automotive Distance Control Systems GmbH Peter-Dornier-Strae 10 88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbH Postfach 16 61 71226 Leonberg, GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models 433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 W

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / 6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra 339

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Auxiliary heating 868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

Bluethooth 2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Alhambra GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 W Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Radar sensors for assistance systems 76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

340

Technical specifications

Technical data

Technical specifications

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentation always takes precedence over the informa- tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain.

The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif- ferent models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbreviations used in the technical speci- fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the die- sel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 286 Chassis number.

Chassis number The VIN is located in the Easy Connect and under the windscreen, on the driver side

Fig. 286. Additionally, the chassis number is located in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side. The number is engraved on the top side rail, and is partially covered.

VIN in the Easy Connect Select: / button > function button SETTINGS > Service > Chassis number.

Identification plate The identification plate is located on the rear pillar of the right-hand front door. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an iden- tification plate.

Identifying letters The identifying letters of the engine can be viewed on the instrument panel when the en- gine is switched off and the ignition is on.

Hold down the button on the dash panel for more than 15 seconds.

Information on fuel con- sumption

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised by certified EU laboratories, according to the

341

Technical data

legislation in force at the time (for more infor- mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: Eu- ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de- pend on the equipment/features of each indi- vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, environ- mental conditions, load or number of passen- gers.

Note In practice, and considering all the factors mentioned here, consumption values can differ from those calculated in the current European regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittings or retro-fitting accessories will increase the weight of the vehicle .

WARNING Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and requirements. Never exceed the gross axle weight rat- ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the permissible axle load or the permissible to- tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac- teristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Trailer mode

Trailer weights

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- proved are selected in intensive trials accord- ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be dif- ferent in other countries. All data in the official vehicle documentation takes precedence over these data at all times .

Drawbar loads The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball coupling of the towing bracket must not exceed 55 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow approaching the maxi- mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer weight is legally required for the drawbar load.

WARNING For safety reasons, you should not drive at speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer. This also applies in coun- tries where higher speeds are permitted. Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permis- sible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving character- istics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehi- cle.

342

Technical specifications

Wheels

Tyre pressure and wheel bolts

Tyre pressure The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the back of the left front door frame. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres .

The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar higher than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).

Wheel bolts After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of ac- cidents - particularly at high speeds. If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen while the vehi- cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Note We recommend that you ask your Techni- cal Service for information about appropri- ate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

343

Technical data

Engine data

Gasoline engines

1.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm 70 (95)/5,000-5,500 85 (115)/5,000-5,500

Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 175/2,000-3,500 200/2,000-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 3/999

Fuel Sper 95 RON / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) RON

Gearbox manual manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 173 (IV) 182 (V) 182 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.4 6.6 6.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.4 9.8 10.0

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,615-1,700a) 1,625-1,710a) 1,645-1,730a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,165 1,187 1,210

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 850 860 880

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900b) 815-900b) 815-900b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580 590 600

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,100 1,100

a) Varies depending on the features. b) Varies depending on the rear spring.

344

Technical specifications

Gasoline engines

1.5 TSI Evo Start-Stop 1.6 MPI

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800

Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 250/1,500-3,500 155/3,800-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,498 4/1,598

Fuel Sper 95 RON / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) RON

Gearbox manual manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 205 (V) 181 (IV) 181 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.8 7.1 7.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.3 11.1 11.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,665-1,750a) 1,595-1,680a) 1,635-1,720a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,222 1,156 1,194

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900 830 870

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900b) 815-900b) 815-900b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 610 570 590

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,100 1,100

a) Varies depending on the features. b) Varies depending on the rear spring.

345

Technical data

Diesel engines

1.6 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm 70 (95)/2,750-4,600 85 (115)/3,250-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 250/1,500-2,600 250/1,500-3,200

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,598 4/1,598

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG manual

Top speed (km/h) 172 (V) 174 185

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.9 8.4 7.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.9 12.8 10.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,715-1,800a) 1,745-1,830a) 1,725-1,810a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,297 1,320 1,303

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 950 980 960

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900b) 815-900b) 815-900b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 640 660 650

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,100 1,200

a) Varies depending on the features. b) Varies depending on the rear spring.

346

Technical specifications

Dimensions

Fig. 287 Dimensions and angles.

347

Technical data

Fig. 287 ARONA

A Front projection (mm) 803

B Rear projection (mm) 769

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,566

D Length (mm) 4,138

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,503

F Backa) track (mm) 1,486

G Width (mm) 1,780

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,552b)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 190

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 20.1

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 29.5

Turning radius (m) 11.0

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. b) Dimension to the roof bars.

348

Index

Index A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Adaptive cruise control

display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 257

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 function for preventing overtaking in an in-

side lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

AdBlue information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 maximum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Adjust Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Adjusting front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 146 seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Adjusting the front seats adjusting the lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Adjusting the head restraints front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Adjusting the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Adjustment

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 73

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 75 functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 76 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 76

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Air recirculation

air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Alcantara suede: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Anchoring

the front tow line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 183 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 225, 227 Anti-locking system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 84 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 84

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 App

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 183 Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-

sistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 emergency braking assistance (Front As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

349

Index

parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 parking system Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Audible warning signal

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 unfastened safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 emergency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 launch control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . 40 selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 steering wheel with gear shift paddles . . . . 233 tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 233

Automatic transmission control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Average consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

B Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Belt tensioners

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 indication in the external rear view mirror . 268 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Bluetooth connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 312 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 316

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 240 Brakes

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 new Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 229 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Braking

brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 BSD

see Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Bulbs

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

C Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Central locking

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 automatic speed-dependent locking . . . . . . 127 central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 key by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 self-locking system to prevent involuntary

unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Changing bulbs additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 DRL (daytime running light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 rear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

350

Index

rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Child-proof locking

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 81 Child seats

categorisation into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 80 securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Clean

windscreen brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Cleaning

Alcantara suede . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 carbon fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333, 335 cloth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 decorative sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 headlights / tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 sensors/camera lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

the radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 trims/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333, 334 washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 fan regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Clocks analogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 set time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Cloth: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Coming Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Communication between the Infotainment

system and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 WLAN point of access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Contact key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

ABS anti-blocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Control lamps engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 refuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Controls and displays general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

351

Index

Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 134 Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Coolant

checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Coolant temperature

safety recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Cooling system

checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Correct sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Cylinder deactivation

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . 106

D Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 22 Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Detachable ball

assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 296 checking attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

placing in standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 298 standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Diesel fuel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Digital instrument panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Digital SEAT Cockpit navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Display indications

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 compass indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 driving recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 status of active cylinder management

(ACT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Disposal belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Distance control see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Doors childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 63, 64, 65 Driver-side general instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driving driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 economic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 301, 302 with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Driving abroad headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Dynamic lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

E E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

352

Index

Electrical power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Electrical socket

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 134

convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 136 Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . 224, 225, 226

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 217 Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Electronic torque management (XDS) . . . . . . . 228 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

automatic gearbox emergency program . . 237 bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 57 emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Emergency braking assistance system indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Emergency operation front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Emission control system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Engine and ignition automatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 219 stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Engine breakdown Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 312 battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 314 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 windscreen washer liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 345 Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 312

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 314 checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 312 topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Engine oil pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Enlarging the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Environment environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 environmentally-friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Environmental tip refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Exhaust filtering system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

353

Index

Exhaust purification system for vehicles with diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . . 281 Exterior lighting

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 folding in electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 folding in manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8 External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

F Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Fault in electronic differential lock (EDL)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Faulty bulbs

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Filling the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Fog

lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . . . 140 Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . 140 Frequency band

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Front Assist indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front seats manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 306 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 243

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Fuel identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Fuel tank cap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 90

fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

G Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

changing gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . 230 kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . 233 General

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 General instrument panel

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 138

General overview of the engine compart- ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

H Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 141 HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . . 70 Head-protection airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

354

Index

Headlights driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 demisting the windscreen and side win-

dows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 162 Heating and fresh air system

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Heating or cooling the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Hydraulic Brake Assist

automatic hazard warning lights activa- tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

I Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Identifying letters on the engine

show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 215 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 215

see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 identifying letters of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 warning and information messages . . . . . . . 109

Indications on the screen doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 positions of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 general panel of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 input mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 on-screen keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 update navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Bluetooth audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 changing the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 general panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 proximity sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 scroll knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 scroll (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 search in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 sharing a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 switch on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 verification boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 328 Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

355

Index

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104 control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104 display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 instructions shown on the screen . . . . . . . . . . 107 instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104 service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 structure of the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 use with the multifunction steering wheel . . 116 use with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . . . . . 115

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Interference from a mobile telephone . . . . . . . . 172 Interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

K Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Key by remote control

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Keyless-Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Keyless-Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Keyless Access Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 128

Keyless Access locking and ignition system see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Keys replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 123 vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Kick-down automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

L Launch control (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . 235 Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Leaving Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 137

additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 interior light and front reading lights . . . . . . . . 97

interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 lighting of instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 lighting of the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Load compartment in the luggage compart-

ment see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 153

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 153 Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Locking and unlocking in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Locking the front passenger door manually . . . 16 Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 153

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . 155 manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

356

Index

stowing the shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 see also Loading the luggage compart-

ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Luggage compartment shelf

stowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . 155

M Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Media

changing the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 messages and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 playback sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 playing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Mobile signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Motor Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Multi-function steering wheel

without voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Multifunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

N Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 importing vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 messages and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 points of interest (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 predictive navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 select the destination on the map . . . . . . . . . 198 split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 traffic reports (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Noises

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 321

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

O Octane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104 trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 One-touch opening and closing

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 fuel cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 in the lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 134 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Operating malfunction Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Outside temperature

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Overview

of the structure of the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

P Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

automatic braking intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

357

Index

conditions for exiting a parking space . . . . . 281 exiting a parking space (only for parallel

spaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 perpendicular parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 stopping prematurely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 234 with Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Parking aid adjusting the display and audible warn-

ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 289 automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 braking while manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 290 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 289

Parking aid system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 284, 288

Parking assistance parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 271 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Parking distance warning system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 284, 288

Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 284, 288

Particulate filter malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Passenger

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 63, 64, 65 Passenger-side instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Petrol

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Positioning seat belts

during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Preheating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Press & Drive

starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Puncture

action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

R Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 259 Radio

changing frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 information and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 memorise station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Radio DISPLAY: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

see Parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Rear bulbs in the side panel

disassemble the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 134 Rear lights in the rear lid

disassemble the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Rear seat

folding down the backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Rear seat passengers

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 63, 64, 65 Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Rear window wiper blades

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Refuel control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

refuelling Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Removing and attaching head restraints . . . . 146

358

Index

Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Replacement

parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Replacing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Reverse Assist

instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 231 Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104, 111 Rims

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Roll-back function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Roof luggage rack

attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Running in

brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

S Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Safe Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Safety child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . 22 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Safety instructions

belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 use of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 80

Safety recommendations coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Saving fuel inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 removable covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Seat belt position for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 71 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 73 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 72 SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 data transmission and control functions . . . 185

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Selective catalytic reduction

see Exhaust purification system (diesel) . . 308 Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Service conditions of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Digital maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 fixed service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Service receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 service work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 sets of services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Service Menu

identifying letters on the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 107 restart oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Service warning: check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Set

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

359

Index

Side airbags description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Special characteristics

tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Special features

Lowering the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Start-Stop system

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 switch the engine off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Start-Stop System driver instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 216

after the fuel tank has run dry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 238 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Steering wheel adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . 233

Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

of front door panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 right front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 storage pocket in the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Switch-off delay (Infotainment system) . . . . . . 172 Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . 31, 215

T Technical data

roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Telephone

Bluetooth profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 display and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Temperature display of the engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Tightening torque

wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Time

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 230, 233 Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30 Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 86 Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Towing

blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Towing bracket

retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 operation and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 86 Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

360

Index

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 301 driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 290 rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Trailer turn signals control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Transporting items

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Transporting objects roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Travel data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Travel data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Turn signals

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Tyre Mobility Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Tyre Mobility System see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 343 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Tyre repair kit see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321, 322, 324 service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 with directional tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

U Unfastening your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Unfasten the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Unlocking and locking

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Unlocking manually rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 connecting an external data storage de-

vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 128 vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 318 assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Vehicle care windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . 60

Vehicle documentation compartment . . . . . . . 150 Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys-

tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Vehicle paint

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

W Warning lamps

engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

see also Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . 117 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

361

Index

Washing the vehicle external vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 What negatively affects driving safety? . . . . . . 62 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 343

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 324

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 343 central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Wheel trim removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Windows electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 134

Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . 86 Windscreen defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 143 Windscreen washer brushes

clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Windscreen washer water

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 filling amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Windscreen wiper blades service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 143 lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 replacing the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Winter conditions battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Winter tyres sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

connecting an external audio source . . . . . . 195

X XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

362

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.18

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Owners m

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Arona Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Arona 2018 v2 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Arona as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Arona. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Arona 2018 v2 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Arona 2018 v2 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Arona 2018 v2 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Arona 2018 v2 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Arona 2018 v2 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.